Home

Programmer Manual

1. TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C ADDRESS TYPE USER TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C CONDITION START TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual C 25 Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 PARALLEL VALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI CONDITION SS TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER
2. Argument Description GPKNOB1 Multipurpose a knob GPKNOB2 Multipurpose b knob HORZPos Horizontal Position knob HORZScale Horizontal Scale knob PANKNOB1 Outer pan knob TRIGLevel Trigger Level knob VERTPOS lt n gt Vertical Position knob VERTSCALE lt n gt Vertical Scale knob ZOOM Inner zoom knob FPANEL TURN TRIGLEVEL 10 duplicates turning the front panel Trigger Level knob clockwise by 10 units GPIBUsb ADDress Query Only Returns the current GPIB address setting for a connected TEK USB 488 adaptor Group Syntax module Miscellaneous GPIBUsb ADDress GPIBUsb ID Query Only Returns the identification string of the connected TEK USB 488 adaptor module and firmware version If a TEK USB 488 2 module is not connected the system returns Not detected Group Miscellaneous Syntax GPIBUsb ID HARDCopy No Query Form Sends a hard copy of the screen display to the currently active printer using the current palette and layout settings Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 157 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Hard Copy HARDCopy START HARDCopy WAI CLS START sends a block of data representing the current screen image to the requested port The data sent is in the image format specified by SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat and the compression level is controlled by whatever format has been selected BMP and TIFF are u
3. Command Default value TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING DC TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 2 00E 08 TRIGGER A LEVEL 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LEVEL AUXIN 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LEVEL D0 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D1 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D10 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D 11 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D 12 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D13 14 TRIGGER A LEVEL D14 14 TRIGGER A LEVEL D15 14 TRIGGER A LEVEL D2 14 TRIGGER A LEVEL D3 14 TRIGGER A LEVEL D4 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D5 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D6 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D7 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D8 1 4 TRIGGER A LEVEL D9 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS LOGIC TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION AND TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH2 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CLOCK EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CLOCK SOURCE NONE TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT DO X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D1 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D10 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D11 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D12 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D13 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D14 X C 28 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D15 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D2 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D3 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D5 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D6 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D7 X TRIGG
4. 0 1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0 000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGEl Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 183 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS2 STATE 1 TYPE PERIOD UNITS S SOURCEl CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 MAXIMUM 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS3 STATE 1 TYPE PK2PK UNITS V SOURCEL CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 MAXIMUM 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS4 STATE 0 PERIOD UNITS S SOURCE1 CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 COUNT 0 0 0000 MEAN 0 0000 MINIMUM 0 0000 STDDEV 0 0000 MEASUREMENT METHOD AUTO REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000 LOW 0 0000 MID1 0 0000 MID2 0 0000 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 0000 Low 10 0000 MID1 50 0000 MID2 50 0000 MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE OFF NUMHORZ 0 NUMVERT 0 21 99 0000E 36 HORZ2 99 0000E 36 HORZ3 99 0000E 36 HORZ4 99 0000E 36 VERT1 99 0000E 36 VERT2 99 0000E 36 VERT3 99 0000E 36 VERT4 99 0000E 36 MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE OFF WEIGHTING 32 MEASUREMENT GATING SCREEN MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot No Query Form MEASUrement GATing 2 184 Group Syntax Related Commands Group Syntax Removes the measureme
5. 2 338 Sets or returns the lower threshold for the channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Used in Runt and Slew Rate triggers as the lower threshold Used for all other trigger types as the single level threshold Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH x ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH x TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V NR3 is the clock level in volts TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 50E 3 sets the lower limit threshold for CH2 of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 might return TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 1 2000E 01 indicating that the lower limit threshold for CH2 of the pulse runt trigger is set to 120 mV TRIGger A LOWerthreshold D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the lower threshold for the digital channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Used in runt and slew rate as the lower threshold Used for all other trigger types as the single level threshold MSO TRIGger A LOWerthreshold D x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LOWerthreshold D lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold voltage in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifi
6. MATH 1 TYPe is DUAL FFT math is defined if the string is in the form FFT lt wfm gt where lt wfm gt is any live channel or reference waveform and theM ATH 1 TYPe is FFT Advanced math is defined if the contents of the string can be parsed by the advanced math parser without errors and MATH 1 TYPe is ADVanced On the front panel the Dual Wfm Math FFT and Advanced Math menus contain controls that allow building equivalent math expressions to those described above Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Math MATH 1 DEFine Qstring MATH 1 DEFine lt gt MATH 1 TYPe Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt QString gt quoted string argument is the mathematical expression that defines the waveform Table 2 39 Advanced Math expression elements Expression Description CH1 CH4 REF1 REF4 Specifies a waveform data source FFT INTG DIFF Executes a Fast Fourier Transform integration or differentiation operation on the expression that follows The FFT operator must be the first left most operator in an expression All these operations must end with a right parenthesis AMPlitude AREa BURst CARea CMEan CRMs DELay FALL FREQuency HIGH LOW MAXimum MEAN MINImum NDUty NOVershoot NWIdth PDUTy PERIod PHAse PK2pk POVershoot PWIdth RISe
7. NR1 is the length of the data string in bytes Length range is I to 8 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 8 sets the data size to 8 bytes SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 indicating the data size is 1 byte SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 246 Sets or returns the low binary data string used for FLEXRAY trigger condition if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa VALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALUE Qstring is a quoted string that is the low binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger condition if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE 11001010 sets the binary data string to 11001010 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX indicates the binary data string is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the end of frame type used for FLEXRAY trigger Search
8. Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHoOld SETT ime lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold SETTime NR3 specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 281 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold lower threshold to determine where to place a mark Search lt x gt is the search number which is always 1 CH lt x gt is the channel number MSO oscilloscopes only Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A SETHOld THReshold CH x lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt NR3 is the lower threshold in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold MATH MATH1 Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold lower threshold to determine where to place a mark Where lt x gt is the search number which is always 1 MSO oscilloscopes only Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger SETHold THReshold MATH MATH1 lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold THReshold MATH MATH1 NR3 is the lower threshold in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold REF lt x gt Conditions 2 282 Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold lower thresho
9. TRIGger B EDGE Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the source slope and coupling for B trigger Trigger TRIGger B EDGE TRIGger B EDGE COUPling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce TRIGGER B EDGE might return TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH1 SLOPE RISE COUPLING DC TRIGger B EDGE COUPIing Group Syntax Related Commands Sets or returns the type of coupling for the B trigger Trigger TRIGger B EDGE COUPling DC HFRej LFRej NOISErej TRIGger B EDGE COUPling TRIGger B EDGE Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 365 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples DC selects DC trigger coupling HFRe j selects high frequency reject coupling LFRe j selects low frequency reject coupling NOISEre j selects DC low sensitivity TRIGGER EDGE COUPLING DC selects DC for the B trigger coupling TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING might return TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING ATRIGGER for the B trigger coupling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the slope for the B trigger Trigger TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe TRIGger B EDGE RISe triggers on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL triggers on the falling or negative edge of a signal TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE FALL sets the B edge trigger to occur on the falling slope TRIGGER B EDGE SLO
10. Trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 317 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x LIN DATa HIVALue Qstring is a quoted string that is the binary data string used for LIN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN DATA HIVALUE 11001010 sets the high value to 11001010 TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN DATA HIVALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX Indicating the high value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALIifier 2 318 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier This only applies if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALi fier LESSThan sets the LIN data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than EQUa sets the LIN data qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the LIN data qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the LIN data qualifier to out of range TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER OUTRANGE sets the data
11. Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the I2C address mode to 7 or 10 Bit SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODE ADDR7 ADDR10 SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 specifies 7 bit addresses ADDR10 specifies 10 bit addresses SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt l2C ADDRess TYPe Sets or returns the I2C address type SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 253 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B X I2C ADDRess TYPe GENeralcall STARtbyte HSmode EEPROM USER SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt I2C ADDRess TYPe GENeralcal specifies the GENeralcall address type STARtbyte specifies the STARtbyte address type HSmode specifies the HSmode address type EEPROM specifies the EEPROM address type USER specifies a user address SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for an I2C trigger search if the search condition is ADDR or ADDRA
12. HIVALue 2 303 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray C Y CLEcount QUALifier 2 303 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray C Y CLEcount VALue 2 304 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue 2 305 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet 2 305 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUA Lifier 2 306 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SIZe 2 306 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue 2 307 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTY PE 2 307 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE 2 308 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue 2 309 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALifier 2 309 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue 2 310 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType 2 310 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC 2 311 Index 8 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount 2 311 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID 2 312 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits 2 312 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAY Length 2 313 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess MODe 2 313 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess TYPe 2 314 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess VALue 2 314 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C CONDition 2 315 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection 2 315 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe 2 316 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue 2 316 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN COND ition 2 317 TRIGger A BUS B
13. Mark MARK SELected ZOOom POSi tion MARK TOTal Query Only Group Syntax MATH MATH1 LABel Group Returns how many marks are currently in use Mark MARK TOTa1 Sets or queries the waveform label for the math waveform Math Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 175 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples MATH MATH1 LABel Qstring MATH MATH1 1 1 Qstring is the quoted string used as the label for the math waveform MATH LABEL Output sets the label for the math waveform to Output MATH LABEL might return MATH LABEL Sum of channel 1 and channel 2 indicating the current label for the math waveform MATH 1 Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples MATH 1 DEFine 2 176 Returns the definition of the math waveform The returned data depends on the setting of MATH 1 TYPe command Math MATH 1 MATH 1 TYPe MATH or MATH1 might return MATH TYPE DUAL DEFINE CHI CH2 VERTICAL SCALE 100 0000E 3 POSITION 0 0000 UNITS V MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 0000E 6 POSITION 50 0000 UNITS S MATH SPECTRAL MAG DB WINDOW HANNING Sets or returns the current math function as a text string Dual math is defined if the string is of the form wfm operation lt wfm gt where the lt wfm gt s are any combination of live channels or reference waveforms lt operation gt is any of or and
14. Returns the position of the specified horizontal measurement indicator MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ Returns the number of horizontal measurement indicators currently being displayed MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT Returns the number of vertical measurement indicators currently being displayed MEASUrement INDICators STATE Sets or returns the state of visible measurement indicators MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt Returns the value of the specified vertical measurement indicator MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt Returns all measurement parameters MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt Returns the number of values accumulated since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay Returns the delay measurement parameters for the specified measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection Sets or returns the search direction to use for delay measurements MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt Sets or returns the slope of the edge to use for delay from and to waveform measurements MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum Returns the maximum value found since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN Returns the mean value accumulated since the last statistical reset Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 25 Measurement Commands cont Command Description MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt
15. Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the parallel clock edge for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK EDGE EITher RISing FALling BUS B lt x gt PARal lel CLOCK EDGE EIther specifies either edge as the clock edge RISing specifies the rising edge as the clock edge FAL ling specifies the falling edge as the clock edge BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK ISCLOCKed 2 80 Sets or returns the parallel bus clock function for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Bus BUS B x PARallel CLOCK ISCLOCKed YES NO BUS B lt X gt PARallel CLOCK ISCLOCKed YES specifes that the Parallel bus is clocked NO specifes that the Parallel bus is not clocked BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the Parallel bus source lt x gt where x is the bus number Bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK SOUrce 1 2 01102 103 04105 06107 08 09 01010111012 013 014 015 BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK SOUrce CH1 CH4 or DO D15 specifies the channel to use as the Parallel bit source BUS B lt x gt PARallel WIDth Group Syntax Arguments BUS B lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the number of bits used for the width of the Parallel bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Bus BUS B l
16. Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D5 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D6 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D7 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D8 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D9 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT MATH X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT REF 1 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT REF2 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD MATH 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD REF1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD REF2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD MATH 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD REF1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD REF2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN LESSTHAN SEARCH SEARCH
17. zontal HORIZONTAL might return the following horizontal settings HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE 1 TIME 0 0000 HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 20 0000E 9 SAMPLERATE 5 0000E 9 UNITS S UNITS STRING S HORIZONTAL SAMPLERATE 5 0000E 9 RECORDLENGTH 1000000 HORizontal ACQLENGTH Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands 2 162 Returns the record length Horizontal HORizontal ACQLENGTH HORizontal RECOrdlength Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORIZONTAL ACQLENGTH might return HORizontal HORIZONTAL ACQLENGTH 1 0000E 6 indicating that the record length is 1 million points HORizontal DELay MODe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the horizontal delay mode Horizontal HORizontal DELay MODe OFF ON lt NR1 gt HORizontal DELay MODe HORizontal POSition OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off This causes the horizontal position command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel ON sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to on lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off any other value sets this mode to on HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE OFF sets the Horizontal Delay Mode to off allowing the horizontal position command to operate like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE might return HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE OFF indicat
18. ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement WAI Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of the oscilloscope but the commands will not be processed by the oscilloscope until all in process OPC operations are complete If the input buffer becomes full the controller will be unable to write commands to the buffer This can cause a time out Using the BUSY Query The BUSY query allows you to find out whether the oscilloscope is busy processing a command that has an extended processing time such as single sequence acquisition The same command sequence using the BUSY query for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement while BUSY keep looping Tektronix 4000 Series Program
19. B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE Sets or returns the end of frame type SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE Sets or returns the error type SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for FLEXRAY frame ID high value SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALIfier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY frame ID qualifier SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY frame ID low value Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Search Commands cont Command Command Groups Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType Sets or returns the frame type SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC Sets or returns the CRC portion of the binary header string SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount Sets or returns the cycle count portion of the binary header string SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID Sets or returns the frame id portion of the binary header string SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits Sets or returns the indicator bits portion of the binary header string SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt
20. Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMHORZ might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMHORZ 2 indicating there are currently 2 horizontal lines drawn on the graticule The indicators show where the measurement specified by MEASUrement INDICators STATE is being performed MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the number of vertical measurement indicators currently being displayed Measurement MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMVERT might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS NUMVERT 2 indicating there are currently 2 vertical lines drawn on the graticule The indicators show where the measurement specified by MEASUrement INDICators STATE is being performed MEASUrement INDICators STATE Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 194 Sets or returns the state of visible measurement indicators Measurement MEASUrement INDICators STATE OFF MEAS lt x gt MEASUrement INDICators STATE OFF turns the visible measurement indicators off 5 lt gt displays the visible measurement indicators for measurement x where x can be 1 2 3 or 4 NOTE There must be an active measurement before you can activate an indicator for a specified measurement MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE MEAS2 turns on the display of visible measurement indicators for measurement 2 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer M
21. Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B X SPI DATa IN MISOj VALue Qstring TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa IN MISO VALue Arguments Qstring is the binary data string where the number of bits 1s 8 times the number of bytes specified The only allowed characters in the string are 0 1 and X TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger condition is MOSI or MISOMOSI Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOST VALUe lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue Arguments lt QString gt is the binary data string with the number of bits specified by the TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe command The only allowed characters in the QString are 0 1 and X 2 324 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger condition is MISO MOSI or MISOMOSI Applies to bus x where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa
22. DIAg RESU1t LOG DIAg RESUIt FLAg lt QString gt in the following format Status Module name gt lt Status gt lt Module name gt DIAG RESULT LOG might return DIAG RESULT LOG NOT RUN CPU NOT RUN DISPLAY NOT RUN FPANEL NOT RUN IO NOT RUN ACQ NOT RUN RO M NOT RUN APPKEY DIAg SELect No Query Form Group Syntax 2 132 Sets the type of diagnostics grouping Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg SELect ALL APPKey CPU DISplay FPAne 10 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments ALL runs all diagnostic groups APPKey runs just the application key diagnostic group CPU runs just the CPU diagnostic group DISplay runs just the display circuit diagnostic group FFPAnel runs just the front panel diagnostic group IO runs just the IO board diagnostic group ROM runs just the IO board diagnostic group ACQ runs just the acquisition system diagnostic group DIAg SELect function No Query Form Runs self tests on the specified system subsystem Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax DIAg SELect function Arguments function specifies a single oscilloscope subsystem on which to run self tests diagnostics Valid values are ACQ tests the acquisition system APPKey tests the application keys CPU tests the CPU DISplay tests the display FPAnel tests the front panel controls IO tests the IO ports R
23. EQual SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt CAN DATa QUAL i fier SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue LESSThan searches for bus data less than the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Than searches for bus data greater than the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue EQUa1l searches for bus data equal to the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue UNEQual searches for bus data not equal to the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue LESSEQual searches for bus data less equal to the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue EQual searches for bus data equal to the value specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for a CAN search if the search condition is DATA or IDANDDATA SEARCH lt X gt is the search number and lt gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B X CAN DATa SIZe NRI is the dat
24. Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for the A video trigger Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce CH1 CH4 or DO D15 specifies the input channel to use as the A video trigger TRIGGER VIDEO SOURCE CHI sets the source for A video trigger to Channel 1 TRIGGER A VIDEO SOURCE might return TRIGger A VIDeo SOURCE CH2 indicating that the source for the A video trigger is set to Channel 2 TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard Group 2 362 Sets or returns the standard for the video trigger Trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard NTSc PAL SECAM CUSTom HDtv TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard NTSc sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC 525 60 2 1 standard a line rate of 525 lines per frame and a field rate of 60 Hz PAL sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the NTSC 625 50 2 1 standard a line rate of 625 lines per frame and a field rate of 50 Hz SECAM sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video signals that meet the SECAM standard CUSTom sets the oscilloscope to trigger on video horizontal scan rate parameters defined by TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN command HDtv sets the oscilloscope to trigger on HDTV video signals that meet standards defined by t
25. HEADer Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State that causes the oscilloscope to either include or omit headers on query responses NOTE This command does not affect IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk these commands never return headers This command does affect the Response Header Enable State of both the USBTMC and VXI 11 interfaces Refer to the Introduction for additional information Group X Miscellaneous Syntax HEADer OFF ON lt NR1 gt HEADer Related Commands VERBose Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 161 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples OFF sets the Response Header Enable State to false This causes the oscilloscope to omit headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned ON sets the Response Header Enable State to true This causes the oscilloscope to include headers on applicable query responses You can then use the query response as a command lt NR1 gt 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false any other value sets this state to true HEADER OFF specifies that the oscilloscope omits headers on query responses so that only the argument is returned HEADER might return HEADER 1 indicating that the oscilloscope is including headers on applicable query responses HORizontal Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns all settings for the horizontal commands Horizontal
26. NEDGECount NOVershoot NPULSECount NWIdth PEDGECount PDUty PERIod 2 POVershoot PPULSECount PWIdth 15 5 MEASUrement IMMed TYPe Arguments 11 measures the amplitude of the selected waveform In other words it measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Amplitude High Low AREa measures the voltage over time The area is over the entire waveform or gated region and is measured in volt seconds The area measured above the ground is positive while the area below ground is negative This measurement is available only on DPO models BURst measures the duration of a burst The measurement is made over the entire waveform or gated region CARea cycle area measures the voltage over time In other words it measures in volt seconds the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 189 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 190 gated region The area measured above the common reference point is positive while the area below the common reference point is negative This measurement is available only on DPO models CMEan cycle mean measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models CRMs cycle r
27. ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT MATH ON turns the math waveform display on and selects it SELECT MATH might return SELECT MATH 1 indicating that the math waveform is being displayed Turns on and off the display of the reference waveform x The x gt variable represents the reference channel number The query returns whether the channel is on or off Vertical SELect REF x lt 1 gt SELect REF x ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 289 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SET Query Only 2 290 Group Syntax Related Commands Examples NRI 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT REF2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on and selects reference waveform 2 SELECT REF2 might return SELECT REF2 1 indicating that reference waveform 2 is being displayed Returns the commands that list the oscilloscope settings except for configuration information for t
28. This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue lt Qstring gt is the binary data string to be used for the trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the trigger condition for a SPI trigger Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDi tion 55 STARTof frame MISO MISOMOSI TRIGger A BUS B x SPI CONDition BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING SS specifies the Slave Selection condition STARTOf frame is applicable when BUS B x SPI FRAMING is set to IDLEtime When the trigger condition is set to STARTof frame the instrument triggers on the first SPI clock after an idle time when there are no clocks Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 323 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MISO specifies the Master In Slave Out condition MOSI specifies the Master Out Slave In condition MISOMOSI specifies the Master In Slave Out and Master Out Slave In conditions TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a SPI trigger if the trigger condition is MISO or MISOMOSI Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number
29. WFMinpre Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples WFMinpre BIT Nr Group Syntax Related Commands 2 378 Returns the waveform formatting and scaling specifications to be applied to the next incoming CURVe command data Waveform Transfer WFMInpre WFMoOutpre WFMINPRE might return the waveform formatting as WFMINPRE BIT NR 8 BN FMT RI BYT NR 1 BYT OR MSB ENCDG BIN NR PT 500 PT FMT Y 0 XINCR 2 0000E 6 XZERO 1 7536E 6 XUNIT S YMULT 1 0000E 3 YOFF 0 0000 YZERO 0 0000 YUNIT v Sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the incoming waveform Changing the value of WFMInpre BIT Nr also changes the value of WFMlInpre BYT Nr Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BIT Nr NR1 WFMInpre BIT Nr WFMInpre BYT Nr Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples WFMinpre BN Fmt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre BYT Nr Group Syntax Related Commands Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR1 gt number of bits per data point can be 8 or 16 WFMINPRE BIT NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for incoming data WFMINPRE BIT NR might return WFMINPRE BIT NR 8 indicating that incoming waveform data uses 8 bits per waveform point Sets or returns the format of binary data for incoming waveforms Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BN_Fmt R
30. ZOOm MODe STATE Turns Zoom mode on or off The Zoom query returns the current state of Zoom mode This command is equivalent to pressing the zoom button located on the front panel Group Zoom Syntax Zoomi MODe STATE ON OFF NR1 Zoom STATE Arguments turns on Zoom mode OFF turns off Zoom mode lt NR1 gt 0 turns off Zoom mode any other value turns on Zoom mode Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 397 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples ZOOM MODE OFF turns off Zoom mode ZOOM MODE might return ZOOM MODE 1 indicating that Zoom mode is currently turned on ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt Query Only Returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display lt x gt can only be I Group Zoom Syntax Z00m zooMoc Examples 200 200 1 might return ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE 1 SCALE 400 0000E 12 POSITION 46 8986 FACTOR 50 0000E 3 HORIZO NTAL POSITION 46 8986 SCALE 400 0000E 12 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor Query Only Returns the zoom factor of a particular zoom box lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax 200 200 lt gt FACtor Returns lt NR1 gt is the zoom factor of a zoom box ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the horizontal position for the specified zoom where x is the integer I representing the single zoom window lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax ZOOm ZOOM x HORizontal POSition lt
31. 123 Exponent too large 124 Too many digits 130 Suffix error 131 Invalid suffix 134 Suffix too long 140 Character data error 141 Invalid character data 144 Character data too long 150 String data error 151 Invalid string data 152 String data too long 160 Block data error 161 Invalid block data 170 Command expression error 171 Invalid expression Execution Error The following table lists the execution errors that are detected during execution of a command Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 200 Execution error 221 Settings conflict 222 224 Data out of range Illegal parameter value Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 cont Code Message 241 Hardware missing 250 Mass storage error 251 Missing mass storage 252 Missing media 253 Corrupt media 254 Media full 255 Directory full 256 File name not found 257 File name error 258 Media protected 259 File name too long 270 Hardcopy error 271 Hardcopy device not responding 272 Hardcopy is busy 273 Hardcopy aborted 274 Hardcopy configuration error 280 Program error 282 Insufficient network printer information 283 Network printer not responding 284 Network printer server not responding 286 Program runtime err
32. 2 361 TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity 2 361 TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce 2 362 TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard 2 362 TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD 2 363 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime 2 353 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj POLarity 2 354 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj SOUrce 2 354 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj WHEn 2 355 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall 2 353 TRIGger B EDGE COUPling 2 365 TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe 2 366 TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce 2 366 TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt 2 367 TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt 2 368 TRIGger B LEVel D lt x gt 2 369 TRIGger B LO Werthreshold CH lt x gt 2 369 TRIGger B LOWerthreshold D lt x gt 2 370 TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 372 TRIGger EXTernal PRObe 2 372 TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts 2 373 TRIGger A 2 296 TRIGger A BUS 2 297 TRIGger A EDGE 2 325 TRIGger A HOLDoff 2 328 TRIGger A LEVel 2 329 TRIGger A LOGIc 2 330 TRIGger A MODe 2 340 TRIGger A PULse 2 340 TRIGger A RUNT 2 344 TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 345 TRIGger A SETHold 2 347 TRIGger A TY Pe 2 355 TRIGger A VIDeo 2 357 TRIGger B 2 364 TRIGger B BY 2 364 TRIGger B EDGE 2 365 TRIGger B EVENTS 2 367 TRIGger B LEVel 2 368 TRIGger B STATE 2 370 TRIGger B TIMe 2 371 TRIGger B TYPe 2 371 TRIGger EXTernal 2 372 TRIGger S TATE 2 373 TST 2 373 Index 9 Index U UNLock 2 374 USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal 2 374 USBTMC PRODUCTID HEX
33. B lt x gt LIN SOUrce icH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce CH x specifies the LIN source channel where x is 1 to 4 D lt x gt specifies the LIN source channel where x is 1 to 16 BUS Bl LIN SOURCE CH4 sets the LIN source to channel 4 BUS B1 LIN SOURCE might return BUS B1 LIN SOURCE CH1 indicating the LIN source is channel 1 BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the LIN standard Bus BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard v1x V2X MIXed BUS B x LIN STANDard V1X sets the LIN standard to V1X V2X sets the LIN standard to V2X Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 79 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MIXed sets the LIN standard to MIXED BUS B1 LIN STANDARD V1X sets the LIN standard is V1X BUS B1 LIN STANDARD might return BUS BL LIN STANDARD V2X indicating the LIN standard is V2X BUS B lt x gt PARallel BIT lt x gt SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the parallel bit source for B lt x gt where x is the bus number and Bit lt x gt is the bit number Bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel BIT lt x gt SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 amp D9I D10 D11 D12 101310141015 BUS B lt x gt PARallel BIT lt x gt SOUrce CH1 CH4 DO D15 specifies the bit source B lt x gt BIT lt x gt specifies the bit number BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK EDGE Group
34. Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order B1 specifies the Bus 1 source B2 specifies the Bus 2 source B3 specifies the Bus 3 source B4 specifies the Bus 4 source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the slope for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 15 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A EDGE 51 RISe specifies a rising edge FALL specifies a falling edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the source waveform for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where x is the channel number MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel Sets or returns the level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt gt is the search number Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 265 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LEVel lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LEVel NR3 specifies th
35. Description CURSor XY POLar THETA POSITION lt x gt Returns the cursor X or cursor Y polar coordinate CURSor XY POLar THETA UNIts Returns the cursor polar coordinate units CURSor XY PRODUCT DELta Returns the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position CURSor XY PRODUCT POSITION lt x gt Returns the position of the X or Y cursor used to calculate the X x Y cursor measurement CURSor XY PRODUCT UNIts Returns the XY cursor product units CURSor XY RATIO DELta Returns the ratio of the difference between the cursor X position and cursor Y position CURSor XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt Returns the X or Y position for the specified cursor CURSor XY RATIO UNIts Returns the X and Y cursor units for the ratio measurement CURSor XY RECTangular X DELta Returns the cursor X delta value in rectangular coordinates CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the cursor X rectangular coordinates CURSor XY RECTangular X UNIts Returns the Cursor X rectangular units CURSor XY RECTangular Y DELta Returns The cursor Y delta value in rectangular coordinates CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt gt Sets or returns the cursor Y rectangular coordinates CURSor XY RECTangular Y UNIts Returns the cursor Y rectangular units Display Command Group 2 18 Use the commands in the Display Command Group to change the gr
36. Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the RS232C polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity NORMal INVERTed BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity sets the RS232C bus polarity to positive INVERTed sets the RS232C bus polarity to negative BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX SOUrce Conditions Group 2 84 Sets or returns the RS232 RX source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B x RS232C RX SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 Off BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX SOUrce CH1 CH4 or DO D15 specifies the channel to use for the RS232 RX source Off sets the specified bus input to off BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the RS232 TX Source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 Off BUS B x RS232C TX SOUrce CH1 CH4 or 00 015 specifies the channel to use as the RS232 TX source sets the specified bus input to off BUS B x SPI BITOrder Group
37. IMMED TYPE RMS indicating that the immediate measurement is the true Root Mean Square voltage Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 191 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the units of the immediate measurement VOLTS VOLTS SQUARED SEC HERTZ PERCENT DIVS SAMPLES OHMS AMPS WATTS MINUTES DEGREES UNKNOWN AMPS SQUARED HOURS DAYS DB BYTES INVERSE HERTZ IRE V OVER V V OVER A VOLTS WATTS V OVER W VOLTS DB V OVER DB A OVER V A OVER AMPS WATTS A OVER W AMPS DB A OVER DB WATTS VOLTS W OVER V WATTS AMPS W OVER A WATTS SQUARED W OVER W WATTS DB W OVER DB DB VOLTS DB OVER V DB AMPS DB OVER A DB WATTS DB OVER W DB SQUARED DB OVER DB VOLTS SEC AMPS SEC WATTS SEC V OVER 5 A OVER S W OVER S Measurement MEASUrement IMMed UNIts MEASUREMENT IMMED UNITS might return MEASUREMENT IMMED UNIts s indicating that units for the immediate measurement are in seconds MEASUrement IMMed VALue Query Only 2 192 Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the value of the measurement specified by the MEASUrement IMMed TYPe command The measurement is immediately taken on the source s specified by a MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce command NOTE A change to HORizontal MAIn SCALe or CH lt x gt SCALe will not necessarily have taken affect if immediately followed by this command
38. MINImum Returns the minimum value found since the last statistical reset MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 Sets or returns the channel from which measurements are taken MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 Sets or returns the channel to which measurements are sent MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE Sets or returns whether the specified measurement slot is computed and displayed MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Returns the standard deviation of values accumulated since the last statistical reset Sets or returns the measurement lt x gt type MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts Returns measurement lt x gt units MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue Returns the value of measurement lt x gt MEASUrement METHod Sets or returns the method used for calculating reference levels MEASUrement REFLevel Returns the current reference level parameters MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH Sets or returns the top reference level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW Sets or returns the low reference level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID Sets or returns the mid reference level for measurements MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 Sets or returns the mid reference level for delay to measurements MEASUrement REFLevel METHod Sets or returns the method for assigning high and low reference levels MEASUrement REFLev
39. Measurement warning Low resolution 544 Measurement warning Uncertain edge 545 Measurement warning Invalid in minmax 546 Measurement warning Need 3 edges 547 Measurement warning Clipping positive negative 548 Measurement warning Clipping positive 549 Measurement warning Clipping negative Table 3 9 Execution Warning Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 540 Measurement warning 541 Measurement warning Low signal amplitude 542 Measurement warning Unstable histogram 543 Measurement warning Low resolution 544 Measurement warning Uncertain edge 545 Measurement warning Invalid min max 546 Measurement warning Need 3 edges 547 Measurement warning Clipping positive negative 548 549 Measurement warning Clipping positive Measurement warning Clipping negative Internal Warning following table shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault in the oscilloscope Table 3 10 Internal Warning Messages Code Message 630 Internal warning 500 overload Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events 3 18 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix A Character Set B7 B6 B5 BITS NUMBERS B4 B3 B2 B1 CONTROL SYMBOLS 0 20 40 LAO 60 LA16 0000 NUL DLE SP 0 0 0 10 16 20 32 30 48 1 GTL 21 LLO 41 LM 61 LA17 0001 SOH DC1 17 21 33 31 49 2
40. NEXt NO NOCARE NOISErej NONe NOPARity NOR 1 NOTCOMPuted NR1 NR_Pt NTIMES NTIMes NTSC NULL NULLFRDynamic NULLFRStatic NUL NUMACq NUMAVg NUMENTries NUMERiC NUMEnv NUMHORZ NUMVERT OCCURS ODD OFF OFFSet ON ONCE ONFAIL OPTion OR OUT OUTrange OVERLoad OWNer Off PACKET PAL PARallel PARi ty PASS PASSWord PATtern PAYLength PAYLoad PEAKdetect PERCent PERIod PERSistence PERcent PHASe PING PK2Pk PNG POLARity POLar POLarity PORTRait PORTUguese POSITION POSition POSitive POVershoot POWerupstatus PPULSECount PRESS PREVIEW PREViewstate PREVious PRINTer PRODDELta PRODUCT PRODUCTID PROGressive PRObe PT Fmt PT ORder PT Off PULSEWIDth PULSEWidth PULSe PULSe PWIdth QUALifier RADIUS RATDELta RATE15K RATE1M RATE20K RATE25K RATE35K RATE5OK RATE800K RATIO RDELta READ READFile RECAT I RECOrdlength RECTX RECTY RECTangular REF Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual REF1 REF2 REF3 REF4 REFLevel REM REMOte REName REPEATStart RESET RESOlution RESPtime RESUIt RESistance RESults RI RIBinary RISEFall RISe RISing RMDir RMS ROM RP RPBinary RS232 RS232C RUN RUNSTOP RUNT RUNt RUSSian RWINClude RX RXDATA RXENDPacket RXSTArt SAMPLERate SAMPLEpoint SAMple SAVe SCAN SCAle SCLK SCREEN SCREen SDATA SEARCH SEARCHtotrigger SECAM SEConds SELect SELected Appendix B Reserved Words SEQuence SERIALnum
41. NR1 SELect CH x ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT CH2 ON turns the channel 2 waveform display on and selects channel 2 SELECT CH1 might return SELECT CH1 1 indicating that channel 1 is being displayed Sets or returns the waveform that 1s the recipient of future channel related commands for example the cursor commands The command form also performs the equivalent of a SELect lt gt ON command as well as the Math Reference and Bus variations of that command Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 287 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Returns Examples SELect D lt x gt 2 288 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Vertical SELect CONTRO CH lt x gt MATH BUS lt x gt SELect CONTRO1 CH lt x gt specifies a channel waveform as the waveform affected by the front panel controls lt x gt is the channel number MATH specifies the math waveform as the waveform that is affected by the front panel controls BUS lt x gt specifies a bus waveform as the waveform affected by the front panel controls lt x gt specifies the bus number NONE if all the channels are turned off NONE is ignored
42. Qstring is a quoted string specifying the binary address string to be used for LIN search 1 search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX indicating the binary address is undefined SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a Parallel trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and lt gt is the bus number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x PARallel vALue lt QString gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x PARallel VALue Qstring is the binary data string SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition Conditions Group Syntax 2 260 Sets or returns the condition for a RS232 trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition RXSTArt RXDATA RXENDPacket TXSTArt TXDATA TXENDPacket SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt RS232C CONDi tion Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RXSTArt specifies a search based on the RX Start Bit RXDATA specifies a search based on RX Data RXE
43. SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 263 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt SPI MOSI OUT VALue bin SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt SPI MOSI OUT VALue bin is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string for an SPI trigger search if the search condition is MISO MOSI or MISOMOSI SEARCH lt X gt is the search number and lt gt is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt SPI DATa SIZe NR1 is the data string length in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax 2 264 Sets or returns bus serial search x 16 the search number This command requires DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 B2 B3 B4 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments
44. STOP stops acquisitions ON starts acquisitions RUN starts acquisitions Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples ACQuire STOPAfter Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ALlas Group Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR1 gt 0 stops acquisitions any other value starts acquisitions ACQUIRE STATE RUN starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets the count of the number of acquisitions ACQUIRE STATE might return ACQUIRE STATE 0 indicating that the acquisition Is stopped Sets or returns whether the oscilloscope continually acquires acquisitions or acquires a single sequence Acquisition ACQuire STOPAfter RUNSTOp SEQuence ACQui re STOPAfter ACQuire S TATE RUNSTOp specifies that the oscilloscope will continually acquire data if ACQuire S TATE is turned on SEQuence specifies that the next acquisition will be a single sequence acquisition ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUnsTOP sets the oscilloscope to continually acquire data ACQUIRE STOPAFTER might return ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE indicating that the next acquisition the oscilloscope makes will be of the single sequence type Sets or returns the state of alias functionality Use Alias commands to define new commands as a sequence of standard commands You may find this useful when repeatedly using the same commands to perform certain tasks like setting up measurements Aliases are similar to macros but do not
45. Syntax MARK SELected END MARK SELected FOCUS Query Only Returns the focus of the selected mark 0 to 100 of the waveform Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 173 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected FOCUS MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn Query Only Returns the number of marks in the current zoom pixel column Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn MARK SELected OWNer Query Only Returns the owner of the selected mark Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected OwNer Returns Qstring is the owner of the mark Examples MARK SELECTED OWNER might return USER SEARCH1 MARK SELected SOURCE Query Only Returns the source waveform for the selected mark Group Mark Syntax MARK SELected SOURCE MARK SELected STARt Query Only Returns the starting point of the selected mark 0 to 100 of the waveform 2 174 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Mark MARK SELected STARt MARK SELected STATe Query Only Group Syntax Returns the on or off state of the selected mark The selected mark is at or near the center of the screen If you press the front panel Set Clear button this mark will disappear Mark MARK SELected STATe MARK SELected ZOOm POSition Query Only Group Syntax Returns the position of the selected mark 0 to 100 of the zoom overview window
46. Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the bit order for the specified SPI bus LSB is least significant bit first MSB is most significant bit first Bus BUS B x SPI BITOrder LSB MSB 05 lt gt 5 LSB sets the bit order to least significant bit first MSB sets the bit order to most significant bit first Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 85 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples BUS B1 SPI BITORDER LSB sets the bit order to least significant bit first BUS B1 SPI BITORDER might return BUS BL SPI BITORDER MSB indicating the SPI bit order is set to most significant bit first BUS B lt x gt SPK CLOCK SCLKY POLARity Sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Bus Syntax BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity FALL RISe BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARi ty Arguments FALL specifies the falling edge RISe specifies the rising edge BUS B x SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI SCLK source for bus x where is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Group Bus Syntax BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B x SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Arguments 1 4 00 015 is the channel to use as
47. TRIG A BUS B1 SPI DAT MISO VAL XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B1 SPI DAT SIZ 1 SEARCH SEARCH TRIG A BUS B1 I2C COND STAR DAT VAL XXXXXXXX SIZ 1 DIR NOCARE SEARCH 1 TRIG A BUS B1 I2C ADDR MOD ADDR7 TYP USER VAL XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B1 CAN COND SOF FRAME DATA DAT VAL XXXXXXXX SIZ 1 D IR NOCARE QUAL EQU SEARCH SEARCHL TRIG A BUS BL CAN ID MOD Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ST VAL XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRI G A BUS B2 SPI COND SS DAT MOSI VAL XXXXXXXX 5 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 SPT DAT MISO VAL XXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 SPT DAT SIZ SEARCH SEARCH TRIG A BUS B2 12C COND STAR DAT VAL XXXXXXXX SIZ 1 DIR NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH TRIG A BUS B2 I12C ADDR MOD ADDR7 TYP USER VAL XXXXXXX 3 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A BUS B2 CAN COND SOF FRAME DATA DAT VAL XXXXXXXX SIZ 1 DIR NOCARE QUAL EQU SEARCH SEARCHI TRIG A BUS B2 CAN ID MOD ST VAL XXXXXXXXXXX 5 SEARCH 1 TRIG A BUS 500 B1 SEA RCH SEARCH1 TRIG A TYP EDG LEV 0 0000 LEV CH1 0 0000 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 MATH 0 0000 RE F1 0 0000 REF2 0 0000 REF3 0 0000 REF4 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A UPP CH1 800 0000E 3 CH2 800 000 0 3 800 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 MATH 800 0000E 3 REF1 800 0000E 3 REF2 800 0000E 3 REF3 800 000 0 3 4 800 0000E
48. TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 336 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern W HEn LESSLimit 2 336 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern W HEn MORELimit 2 337 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern 2 334 TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt 2 337 TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold D lt x gt 2 338 TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 338 TRIGger A LO Werthreshold D lt x gt 2 339 TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX 2 340 TRIGger A PULse CLAss 2 341 TRIGger A PULSE Width POLarity 2 342 TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce 2 342 TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn 2 343 TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth 2 343 TRIGger A PULSEWIDth 2 341 TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 2 344 TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce 2 345 TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 346 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCK EDGE 2 347 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 348 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold 2 348 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk 2 347 TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 349 TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 2 350 TRIGger A SETHold DATa 2 349 TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime 2 351 TRIGger A SETHold SETTime 2 351 TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt 2 352 TRIGger A SETHold THReshold D lt x gt 2 352 TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 356 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom LINEPeriod 2 358 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN 2 358 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom S YNCInterval 2 359 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE 2 357 TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat 2 359 TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD 2 360 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Index TRIGger A VIDeo LINE
49. TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the logic operator for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion AND NANd NOR OR SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion AND places a mark if all conditions are true NANd places a mark if any of the conditions are false NOR places a mark if all conditions are false OR places a mark if any of the conditions are true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Group Syntax Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 267 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments HIGH specifies the logic high LOW specifies the logic low X specifies a don t care state SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns whether the clock edge is a rising or falling for a logic search to determine where to place a mark
50. dB W dB dB dBA dBV dBW dBdB day degrees div hr min ohms percent s Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YUNit lt QString gt WFMInpre YUNit WFMoOutpre YUNit lt QString gt contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the vertical unit of measure for the incoming waveform WFMINPRE YUNIT might return WFMINPRE YUNIT V indicating the vertical units for the incoming waveform are volts WFMINPRE YUNIT A specifies that the vertical units for the incoming waveform are Amperes Sets or returns the vertical offset of the incoming waveform in units specified by WFMInpre YUNit Variations in this number are analogous to changing the vertical offset of the waveform YMUIt YOFf and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is the data level curve in dlisa data point in CURVe Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order value in units curve in dl YOFf in dl YMUIt YZEro in units NOTE For a given waveform record YMUIt YOFf and YZEro have to be a consistent set otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may give incorrect results Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YZEro lt NR3 gt WFMInpre YZEro WFMInpre YUNit WFMOutpre Y ZEro NR3 is the offset in YUNits WFMINPRE YZERO 1 5 0 specifies that th
51. programs to import the data SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL specifies that the internal file format is the format used for saving waveforms SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT might return SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL indicating that waveforms are saved using the internal format Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 233 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SAVe WAVEform GATIng Group Syntax Arguments Examples Specifies whether save waveform operations should save the entire waveform NONe or a specified portion of the waveform Save and Recall SAVe WAVEform GATIng NONe CURSors SCREEN SAVe WAVEform GATIng CURSors turns on cursors and the gates are the waveform record points at the cursor positions NONe saves the entire waveform SCREEN if zoom is on the gates are the start and end waveform record points of the zoom upper graticule otherwise the gates are the start and end waveform record points of the main graticule SAVE WAVEFORM GATING CURSors specifies that when the waveform gating is set to cursors save waveform operations should save the waveform points between the cursors If cursors are turned off waveform gating automatically reverts to NONE SEARCH Query Only Group Syntax Examples 2 234 Returns all search related settings Search SEARCH SEARCH might return SEARCH SEARCHL TRIG A BUS BL SPI COND SS DAT MOSI VAL XXXXXXXX 5 SEARCH SEARCHL
52. x D lt x gt THREshold Sets or returns the logical threshold for digital channel lt x gt D lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the vertical position for digital channel lt x gt REF lt x gt Returns reference waveform data for channel y REF lt x gt DATE Returns the date that a reference waveform was stored REF lt x gt HORizontal DELay TIMe Sets or returns the horizontal position of the specified reference waveform in percent of the waveform that is displayed to the right of the center vertical graticule REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle REF lt x gt LABel Sets or returns the horizontal scale for a reference waveform Sets or returns the specified reference waveform label Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 49 Command Groups Table 2 31 Vertical Commands cont Command Description Sets or returns the vertical position for reference channel x REF lt x gt TIMe Returns the time that a reference waveform was stored REF lt x gt VERTical POSition Sets or returns the vertical position of the specified reference waveform REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle Sets or returns the reference waveform vertical scale in vertical units div SELect Returns information on which waveforms are on or off and which waveform is selected SELect BUS lt x gt Turns on or off the specified bus waveform or returns whether the specified bus channel is on or off SELect CH
53. 10096 of the waveform MARK SELected FOCUS Returns the focus of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn Returns how many marks are in the current zoom pixel column MARK SELected OWNer Returns the owner of the selected mark MARK SELected SOURCE Returns the source waveform of the selected mark MARK SELected STARt Returns the start of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the waveform MARK SELected STATe Returns the on or off state of the selected mark MARK SELected ZOOm POSition MARK TOTal Returns the position of the selected mark in terms of 0 to 100 of the upper window Returns how many marks are used Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 23 Command Groups Math Command Group Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and define a math waveform Use the available math functions to define your math waveform The math waveform you create depends on sources listed in the math expression If you change these sources the math waveform you previously defined will be affected Math expressions can be simple containing no mathematical computation such as which specifies that a waveform shows the signal source of Channel 1 Math expressions can also be complex consisting of up to 128 characters and comprising many sources functions and operands The acquisition of a live waveform can stop for several reasons
54. 12C ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the I2C address mode to 7 or 10 bit Applies to bus x where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 ADDR10 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess MODe ADDR7 specifies the 7 bit I2C address mode ADDR10 specifies the 10 bit I2C address mode Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 313 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR1O sets the I2C address mode to 10 bit TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess TYPe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the I2C address type The only supported address type is USER Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess TYPe icENeralcall STARtbyte HSmode EEPROM USER TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe GENeralcall specifies a general call address STARtbyte specifies a start byte address HSmode specifies a high speed mode address EEPROM specifies an EEPROM address USER specifies a user address TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 314 Sets or returns the binary address string used for the PC trigger if the trigger condition is ADDRESS or ADDRANDDATA Applies to bus x wh
55. 2 Y The ratio is calculated as Position 1 Y1 X1 Position 2 2 2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt CURSor XY RATIO UNIts Query Only Returns the cursor X and cursor Y units for the ratio measurement Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr XY RATIO UNIts CURSor XY RECTangular X DELta Query Only Returns the cursor X delta value in rectangular coordinates Group Cursor Syntax CURSor xY RECTangular X DELta 2 120 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION x Sets or returns the X rectangular coordinate for cursor 1 or cursor 2 Cursors are specified by x and can be either 1 or 2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt Arguments lt NR3 gt is the coordinate in volts CURSor XY RECTangular X UNIts Query Only Returns the cursor X rectangular units Group Cursor Syntax CURSor xY RECTangular X UNIts CURSor XY RECTangular Y DELta Query Only Returns The cursor Y delta value in rectangular coordinates Group Cursor Syntax CURSor xY RECTangular Y DELta CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the Y rectangular coordinate for cursor 1 or cursor 2 The cursor is specified by x Group Cursor Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 121 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax A
56. 2 141 Ethernet Command Group 2 19 ETHERnet DNS IPADDress 2 142 ETHERnet ENET ADDress 2 143 ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress 2 143 ETHERnet PING STATUS 2 145 ETHERnet DHCPbootp 2 141 ETHERnet DOMAINname 2 142 ETHERnet HTTPPort 2 143 ETHERnet IPADDress 2 144 ETHERnet NAME 2 144 ETHERnet PASS Word 2 145 ETHERnet PING 2 145 ETHERnet SUBNETMask 2 146 EVENT 2 146 EVMsg 2 147 EVQty 2 147 F FACtory 2 148 File System Command Group 2 20 FILESystem FREESpace 2 152 FILESystem WRITEFile 2 154 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Index FILESystem 2 149 FILESystem CWD 2 149 FILESystem DELEte 2 150 FILESystem DIR 2 151 FILESystem FOR Mat 2 151 FILESystem MKDir 2 152 FILESystem READFile 2 152 FILESystem REName 2 153 FILESystem RMDir 2 153 FPAnel PRESS 2 154 FPAnel TURN 2 156 G GPIBUsb ADDress 2 157 GPIBUsb ID 2 157 H Hard copy Command Group 2 21 HARDCopy 2 157 HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter 2 158 HARDCopy PRINTer ADD 2 160 HARDCopy PRINTer DELete 2 160 HARDCopy PRINTer LIST 2 160 HARDCopy PRINTer REName 2 161 HARDCopy INKSaver 2 158 HARDCopy LAYout 2 159 HARDCopy PREVIEW 2 159 HEADer 2 161 Horizontal Command Group 2 22 HORizontal ACQLENGTH 2 162 HORizontal DELay MODe 2 163 HORizontal DELay TIMe 2 163 HORizontal DIGital R ECOrdlength MAGnivu 2 164 HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAIN 2 164 HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAGnivvu 2 164 HORizontal DIGital
57. 2 285 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH 2 285 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt 2 286 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime 2 283 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity 2 283 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce 2 284 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn 2 284 SEARCH 2 234 SELect 2 286 SELect BUS x 2 287 SELect CH lt x gt 2 287 SELect D lt x gt 2 288 SELect REF lt x gt 2 289 SELect CONTROI 2 287 SELect MATH 1 2 289 SET 2 290 SETUP lt x gt DATE 2 291 SETUP lt x gt LABEL 2 291 SETUP lt x gt TIME 2 292 SRE 2 292 Status and Error Command Group 2 37 Index 7 Index STB 2 292 T TEKSecure 2 293 TIME 2 294 TOTaluptime 2 295 TRG 2 295 Trigger Command Group 2 38 TRIGger 2 295 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition 2 297 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 298 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier 2 299 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe 2 300 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue 2 300 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype 2 300 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe 2 301 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue 2 302 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition 2 302 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CY CLEcount
58. 2225 Measurement error No waveform to measure 2226 Measurement error Null Waveform 2227 Measurement error Positive and Negative Clipping 2228 Measurement error Positive Clipping 2229 Measurement error Negative Clipping 2230 Measurement error High Ref Low Ref 2231 Measurement error No statistics available 2233 Requested waveform is temporarily unavailable 2235 Math error invalid math description 2240 Invalid password 2241 Waveform requested is invalid 2244 Source waveform is not active 2245 Saveref error selected channel is turned off 2250 Reference error the reference waveform file is invalid 2253 Reference error too many points received 2254 Reference error too few points received 2259 File too big 2270 Alias error 2271 Alias syntax error 2273 Illegal alias label 2276 Alias expansion error 2277 Alias redefinition not allowed 2278 Alias header not found 2285 TekSecure R Pass 2286 TekSecure R Fail 2500 Setup error file does not look like a setup file 2501 Setup warning could not recall all values from external setup 2620 Mask error too few points received Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Device Error System Event Execution Warning Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 cont Code Message 2760 Mark limit reached 2761 No mark present 2162 Search copy failed The following table lists the device errors that can occur during oscillosc
59. 3 3 Status and Events Queues 3 4 PSC Command Output Queue Use the SRE command to set the SRER Use the SRE query to read the register The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte Register is read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a zero 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ESBBMV Figure 3 5 The Service Request Enable Register SRER The PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power on Sending PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows m DESER 255 equivalent to a DESe 255 command B ESER 0 equivalent to an ESE 0 command m SRER 0 equivalent to an SRE 0 command Sending PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile memory through a power cycle NOTE enable the PON Power On event to generate a Service Request send PSC 0 use the DESe and ESE commands to enable PON in the DESER and ESER and use the SRE command to enable bit 5 in the SRER Subsequent power on cycles will generate a Service Request The PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power on Sending PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows The oscilloscope stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties this queue each time it receives new command or query message after an EOM The controller must read a query response before it sends the next command or query or
60. A TRANsition RISEFallj WHEn Sets or returns the condition setting for an transition search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Search Commands cont Command Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TY Pe Sets or returns the trigger type setting for a search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt level for all channel waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold UPPerthreshold MATH level for all math waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the waveform upper threshold UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt level for all reference waveform searches Status and Error Command Group Use the commands in the Status and Error Command Group to determine the status of the oscilloscope and control events Several commands and queries used with the oscilloscope are common to all 488 2 compliant devices The IEEE Std 488 2 1987 defines these commands and queries The common commands begin with an asterisk character Table 2 29 Status and Error Commands Command Description ALLEv Returns all events and their messages BUSY Returns oscilloscope status CLS Clears status DESE Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register ESE Sets or returns the bits in the Event Status Enable Register ESR Returns
61. A BUS B3 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 SEARCH SE
62. A BUS B3 SPI DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA S TART 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC C 26 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT
63. ALlas CATalog Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels ALlas DEFine Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label ALlas DELEte Removes a specified alias ALlas DELEte ALL Deletes all existing aliases ALlas DELEte NAMe Removes a specified alias ALlas STATE Sets or returns the alias state Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Bus Command Group Command Groups Use the Bus commands when working with serial or parallel bus measurements Install the DPOEMBD application module when working with PC or SPI bus signals Install the DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX module when working with CAN bus signals Install the DPO4COMP module when working with RS232 bus signals m Install the DPO4AUTO or DPO4AUTOMAX module when working with LIN bus signals Install the DPO4AUTOMAX module when working with FlexRay bus signals NOTE LIN and FlexRay work on DPO4000s with serial numbers greater than C020000 and on all MSO4000s NOTE The parallel bus commands work with MSO4000 Series oscilloscopes only Table 2 15 Bus Commands Commands Description BUS Returns the parameters for each bus BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate Sets or returns the bit rate for the CAN bus BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe Sets or returns the probing method used to probe the CAN bus BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint Sets or returns the sample point in to sample during each bit period BUS B lt x g
64. AUTO CH4 D7 RST AUTOSet CHannel D8 SAV AUTOZero CHecksum D9 SRE AUX CLASS DATA STB AUXOut CLEar DATABits TRG AUXin CLEARMenu DATE TST AVErage CLEARSNapshot DATa WAT Auto CLOCk DATT 1 B CMEan DB 1CH Bl COLUMN DC 7 B2 COMMAND DECimal A B3 CONDi tion DEFine ABORt B4 CONTRO DEGAUSS ABOrt BACKLight CONTinue DEGrees ABSo lute BACKWards COPy DELEte AC BANdwidth COUNT DELEte ACKMISS BASE COUP ling DELIMiter ACQ BDIFFBP CPU DELTa ACQLENGTH BINary CR DELTatime ACQuire BITOrder CRC DELay ACTIVeprinter BITRate CRCHeader DELayed ADD BIT Nr CRCTrailer DELete ADDR10 BLAckmanharris CREATE DELta ADDR7 BM CRMS DESE ADDRANDDATA BMP CROSSHair DESKew ADDRess BN Fmt CURSor DESTination ADDress BOTh CURSOrs DHCPbootp ADVanced BOX CURVE DIAg ALIas BTRIGger CURrent DIFFerential ALIas BURst CUSTOm DIGital ALL BUS CWD DIGtal ALLEV BUSY CYCLEcount DIR ALLFields BY D DIRection ALLLines BYPass DO DISplay ALTERNATE BYT_Nr D1 DISplaymode ALWAYS BYT_Or D10 DNS Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual B 1 Appendix B Reserved Words DOMAINname DOTsonly DPOModels DUAL DUMP DYNAMi C ECL EDGe EEPROM EITher ENCdg END ENET ENGL ish ENV ENVelope EOF EOFTYPE EQual ERROR ERRTYPE ERRlog ERRor ETHERnet EVEN EVENT EVENTS EVENTtable EVMsg EVQty EXECute EXT EXTended EXTernal FACtor FACtory FAIL FALL FALSe FALling FASTer FAStest FFT FIELD FIFty FILEFormat FILESystem FIRSt FIVEdivs FLAg FLEXray FOCUS FOLder
65. B 2 FORCEDRange FORCe FORMAT FORMat FORWards 1 FRACTional FRAMEID FRAMEType FRAMETypeid FRAMEtype FRAMING FRAMetime FRAme FREE FREESpace FRENch FREQuency FUL FUNCtion GAIN GATEWay GATIng GENeralcall GERMan GND GPIBUsb GRAticule GRId HAMmi ng HANning HARDCopy HBArs HD1080150 HD1080160 HD1080P24 HD1080P25 HD1080PSF24 HD480P60 HD720P60 HDtv HEADER HEADer HEADertime HEIght HERtz HEXadecimal HFRej HIGH HIGHLimit HIRes HIStogram HIVALue HOLDTime HOLDoff HORZ HORizontal HORizontalf HPOS HSmode HTTPPort I2C ID TDANDDATA IDFORmat IDLETime IDLEtime IDentifier IMAGe IMMed IMPedance IN INDBits INDICators INDIvidual INDependent INFInite INIT INKSaver INPut INTENSITy INTERLAced 1 INVERTed INVert INVerted INrange IO IPADDress ISCLOCKed ITALian JAPAnese KOREan LABEL LABel LANGuage LANdscape LARge LAYOUt LESSEQual LESSLimit LESSthan LF LFRej LIN LINE LINEAr LINEPeriod LIST LOCk LOG LOGIC LOOP LOW LOWLimit LOwerthreshold LSB MAG MAGni vu MAIN MAIn MAIn MARK MARKSINCOLumn MATH 1 MATH 1 MAXBytedelim MAXSamplerate MAXimum MEAN MEAS MEASUrement MEDium MEG MESSage METHod MID MID2 MINImum MINMax MISO MISOMOSI MIXed MKDir MODe MOREEQual MORELimit MOREThan MOREthan MOSI MSB NAME NAMe NANd NEGative NEWpass Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual
66. B4 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C ADDRESS TYPE USER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C CONDITION START SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 PARALLEL VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B
67. BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Qstring is a quoted string representing the CRC portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC 00110010101 sets the CRC protion of the binary header string 00110010101 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the CRC protion of the binary header string is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the cycle count portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLECount Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLECOunt lt QString gt is a quoted string representing the cycle count portion of the binary header String used for FLEXRAY trigger SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT 001101 sets the cycle count to 001101 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS BL FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS BL FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX indicating the cycle count is don t cares
68. BUS B2 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 PARALLEL VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA MISO VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA MOSI VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER
69. CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B lt x gt SPIL SELect SS SOUrce CH1 CH4 or DO D15 is the channel to use as the SPI SS source Sets or returns the on off state of bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Bus BUS B lt X gt STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON BUS B lt X gt STATE SELect BUS lt x gt ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns on the bus OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the bus Sets or returns the bus type for x where x 1s the bus number Bus BUS B lt x gt TYPE I2C SPI CAN RS232C PARallel BUS B x TYPE Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order I2C specifies the Inter IC bus SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus not available on two channel models CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus RS232C specifies the RS232C bus PARallel specifies the Parallel bus BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the lower threshold for each channel This applies to all search and trigger types that use the channel This command supersedes the BUS THReshold CH lt x gt above Bus BUS LOWerthreshold CH x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 TTL sets the lower
70. Command Description TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray F RAMEID HIVALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY frame ID high value TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALiIfier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY frame ID qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY frame ID low value TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType Sets or returns the frame type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC Sets or returns the CRC portion of the binary header string TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER CY CLEcount Sets or returns the cycle count portion of the binary header string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID Sets or returns the frame id portion of the binary header string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits Sets or returns the indicator bits portion of the binary header string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAYLength Sets or returns the payload length portion of the binary header string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess MODe Sets or returns 12C address mode to 7 or 10 bit TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess TYPe Sets or returns 12C address type to USER TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for the 12C trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C CONDition
71. Command Group 2 11 Alias Command Group 2 12 ALlIas 2 61 ALIas STATE 2 64 ALIas CATalog 2 62 ALlIas DEFine 2 62 ALIas DELEte 2 63 ALIas DELEte NAMe 2 64 ALIas DELEte ALL 2 64 ALLEv 2 65 AUTOSet 2 65 AUXin PRObe AUTOZero 2 66 AUXin PRObe DEGAUss STATE 2 68 AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange 2 68 AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber 2 69 AUXin PRObe ID TYPE 2 69 AUXin PRObe RESistance 2 69 AUXin 2 66 AUXin PRObe 2 66 AUXin PRObe COMMAND 2 67 AUXin PRObe DEGAUss 2 67 AUXin PRObe GAIN 2 68 AUXin PRObe SIGnal 2 70 AUXin PRObe UNIts 2 70 B BUS 2 70 BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate 2 71 BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe 2 71 BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint 2 72 BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce 2 72 BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt 2 73 BUS B lt x gt DISplay TYPe 2 73 BUS B lt x gt FLEXray BITRate 2 74 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CHannel 2 74 BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SIGnal 2 74 BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SOUtrce 2 75 BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess RWINClude 2 75 BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 2 76 BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce 2 76 BUS B lt x gt LABel 2 77 BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate 2 77 BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat 2 78 BUS B lt x gt LIN POLAR ity 2 78 BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint 2 78 BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce 2 79 BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard 2 79 BUS B lt x gt PARallel BIT lt x gt SOUrce 2 80 BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK EDGE 2 80 BUS B lt x gt P
72. Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REF lt x gt TIMe Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the time that reference waveform data was copied into the internal reference memory for reference channel x where x is the reference channel number Vertical REF lt x gt TIMe REF4 TIME might return 16 54 05 REF lt x gt VERTical POSition 2 226 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the vertical position of the reference waveform specified by lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down Position adjusts only the display position of a waveform The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which signal values are displayed For example if the position for Reference 3 is set to 2 0 the signal represented by that reference will be displayed at 2 0 divisions above the center of the screen Vertical REF x VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt REF x VERTical POSition CH lt x gt POSition MATH 1 VERTical POSition NR3 is the desired position in divisions from the center horizontal graticule The range is from 5 0 to 5 0 divisions REF2 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3E 00 positions the Reference 2 input signal 1 3 divisions above the center horizontal graticule REF1 VERTICAL POSITION might retu
73. D3 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D4 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D5 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D6 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D7 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D8 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D9 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD EXT 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS WIDTH TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN LESSTHAN TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN OCCURS TRIGGER A RUNT WIDTH 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE NONE TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 9 91E 37 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD DO 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D1 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D10 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D11 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D12 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D13 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D14 14 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D15 14 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D2 1 4 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D3 1 4 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D4 1 4 TRIGGER A SETHOLD TH
74. EVMsg FACtory SRE lt NR1 gt STB might return 96 showing that the SBR contains the binary value 01100000 TEKSecure No Query Form This command initializes both waveform and setup memories overwriting any previously stored data These are the WFMInpre WFMOutpre and DATa command values after the TEKSecure operation Group Syntax gt WF BIN gt WF 4 0 100 gt WF gt WF 4 0 gt WF BIN WF gn WF 4 0 DAT DAT MOUTPRE BYT NR 1 WFMOUTPRE BIT NR 8 WFMOUTPRE ENCDG WFMOUTPRE BN FMT RI WFMOUTPRE BYT OR MSB MOUTPRE WFID Chl DC coupling 100 0mv div 00us div 10000 points Sample mode WFMOUTPRE NR PT 00 WFMOUTPRE PT FMT Y WFMOUTPRE XUNIT s MOUTPRE XINCR 4 0000E 9 WFMOUTPRE XZERO 20 0000E 6 MOUTPRE PT OFF 0 WFMOUTPRE YUNIT V WFMOUTPRE YMULT 000E 3 WFMOUTPRE YOFF 0 0000 WFMOUTPRE YZERO 0 0000 MINPRE BYT NR 1 WFMINPRE BIT NR 8 WFMINPRE ENCDG WFMINPRE BN FMT RI WFMINPRE BYT OR MSB PT 10000 WFMINPRE PT FMT Y WFMINPRE XUNIT WFMINPRE XINCR 4 0000E 9 WFMINPRE XZERO 0 0000 MINPRE PT OFF 0 WFMINPRE YUNIT V WFMINPRE YMULT 000E 3 WFMINPRE YOFF 0 0000 WFMINPRE YZERO 0 0000 A DESTINATION REF1 DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DATA SOURCE CH1 A START 1 DATA STOP 10000 DATA WIDTH 1 NOTE The TEKSecure command can take up to five minutes to complete The oscilloscope is inoperable during this period Miscellaneous TEKSec ure Tektronix 4000 Series Progra
75. FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS TYPE USER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C CONDITION START Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIF
76. LIN ERRTYPE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the error type be used for LIN trigger Trigger 05 lt gt 1 SYNC PARi ty CHecksum HEADertime RESPtime FRAMetime TRIGger A BUS B x LIN ERRTYPE SYNC sets the LIN error type to SYNC PARi ty sets the LIN error type to parity CHecksum sets the LIN error type to checksum HEADertime sets the LIN error type to header time RESPtime sets the LIN error type to response time FRAMetime sets the LIN error type to frame time TRIGGER A BUS BI LIN ERRTYPE CHECKSUM sets the LIN error type to checksum TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN ERRTYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN ERRTYPE SYNC indicating the LIN error type is SYNC TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 320 Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x LIN IDentifier VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x LIN IDentifier VALue Qstring is the binary address string used for LIN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA TRIGGER A BUS BL LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE 110010 sets the identifier value to 110010 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B I LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX indicatin
77. LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 274 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH 2 274 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LO Werthreshold REF lt x gt 2 275 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width POLarity 2 275 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width SOUrce 2 275 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WHEn 2 276 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth 2 276 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity 2 277 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce 2 277 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn 2 278 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 278 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCK EDGE 2 279 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Index SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce 2 279 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold 2 279 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 280 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 2 281 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime 2 281 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold SETTime 2 281 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt 2 282 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold REF lt x gt 2 282 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THResholdf MATH MATH 1 2 282 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TY Pe 2 284 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt
78. NR3 gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 DELTatime lt NR3 gt specifies the delta time in seconds TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 15E 6 sets the delta time of the transition trigger to 15 us TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the delta time of the transition trigger is set to 2 ns Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 353 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the polarity for the transition trigger Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFall POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 POLarity POSitive indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower most negative to higher most positive level for transition triggering to occur NEGative indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper most positive to lower most negative level for transition triggering to occur EITher indicates either positive or negative polarity TRIGGER A TRAnSITION POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the transition polarity to negative TRIGGER A TRAnSITION POLARITY might return TRIGGER A TRAnSITION POLARITY EITHER indicating that the polarity can be either positive or negative TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 354 Sets or returns the source for transition tr
79. NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM x OR izontal POSition 2 398 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NR3 is a value from 0 to 100 00 and is the percent of the upper window that is to the left of screen center when the zoom factor is 1 or greater ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 sets the Zoom reference pointer at 50 of acquired waveform ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL POSITION might return ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 0000 indicating that the Zoom1 reference pointer is currently set at 50 of acquired waveform ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the zoom horizontal scale factor for the specified zoom where x is the integer 1 representing the single zoom window x can only be I Zoom ZOOm ZOOM x HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM x HORizontal SCAle NR3 is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction in 1 2 5 increments ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL SCALE 5 sets the horizontal scale to 5 seconds ZOOM ZOOM2 HORIZONTAL SCALE might return 200 2 HORIZONTAL SCALE 1 indicating that the horizontal scale is 1 second ZOOm ZOOM lt gt gt POSition Group Syntax Arguments Sets the horizontal position of the zoom box in terms of 0 to 100 0 of upper window lt x gt can only be 1 Zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt X gt POSi tion lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POS
80. OFFSet lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa OFFSet NR1 is the offset of the data string in bytes A byte offset of 1 signifies don t care and no byte offset is used The instrument will trigger or match any byte value that fits TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 0 indicating that a data offset of 0 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 305 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 0 indicating that a data offset of 0 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUALIifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data qualifier Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa QUAL i fier Arguments LESSThan sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to greater than EQUa sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to eqaual UNEQual sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to out of range Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the data qualifier to LESSTHAN
81. Programmer Manual
82. Programmer Manual 2 87 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the SPI MOSI source for bus lt x where x is the bus number gt This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce CH1 CH4 DO D15 is the channel to use as the SPI MISO source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA SIZe Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the number of bits per word for the specified SPI bus Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA SIZe lt NR1 gt BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA SIZe NR1 is the data size of the specified bus BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 8 sets the data size for the specified bus to 8 bits per word BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE might return BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 8 indicating the data size for the SPI B1 bus is 8 bits per word BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING Group Syntax 2 88 Sets or returns the type of SPI framing Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING SS IDLEtime BUS B lt X gt SPI FRAMING Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SS specifies framing by SS non 2 wire IDLEtime specifies framing by Idle Time 2 wire BUS B1 SPI FRAMING SS sets the SPI framing type to SS
83. REFLEVEL PERCENT MID 1 60 sets the mid reference level to 60 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID 65 indicating that the percentage mid reference level is set to 6596 of HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 Sets or returns the percent where 100 is equal to HIGH that is used to calculate the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 211 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of delay measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 NR3 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default mid reference level is 50 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 40 sets the mid2 reference level to 40 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 45 indicating that the percentage mid2 reference level is set to 45 of HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the mid reference level for channel lt x gt wher
84. RESULTS SPC returns the results of the last SPC operation either PASS or FAIL Returns the vertical parameters for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt Sets or returns the selectable low pass bandwidth limit filter for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt BANdwidth TwEnty TWOfi fty FUL lt NR3 gt CH x BANdwi dth TWEnty sets the upper bandwidth limit of channel x to 20 MHz TWOf i sets the upper bandwidth limit of channel x to 250 MHz FULT disables any optional bandwidth limiting The specified channel operates at its maximum attainable bandwidth NR3 is a double precision ASCII string The oscilloscope rounds this value to an available bandwidth using geometric rounding and then uses this value to set the upper bandwidth limit NOTE Other values may be possible depending on the attached probes Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 97 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples CH lt x gt COUPling Group Syntax Arguments Examples CH lt x gt DESKew Group Syntax Arguments 2 98 CH1 BANDWIDTH TWENTY sets the bandwidth of channel 1 to 20 MHz Sets or returns the input attenuator coupling setting for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt COUPling AC DC GND CH x COUPling AC sets channel x to AC coupling DC sets channel x
85. Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it controls In order for an event to be reported to a bit in the Status Register the corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to one If the bit in the Enable Register is set to zero the event 1s not recorded Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers The Enable Registers and the commands used to set them are described below The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER This register controls which types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event Queue The bits in the DESER correspond to those in the SESR Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER Use the DESE query to read the DESER 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC Figure 3 3 The Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The Event Status Enable Register ESER This register controls which types of events are summarized by the Event Status Bit ESB in the SBR Use the ESE command to set the bits in the ESER Use the ESE query to read it 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC Figure 3 4 The Event Status Enable Register ESER The Service Request Enable Register SRER This register controls which bits in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized by the Master Status Summary MSS bit Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual
86. SAMPLERate MAIN 2 164 HORizontal MAIn SAMPLERate 2 165 HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing 2 166 HORizontal MAIn UNIts 2 166 HORizontal PREViewstate 2 167 HORizontal RECOrdlength 2 167 HORizontal RESOlution 2 168 HORizontal SAMPLERate 2 168 HORizontal 2 162 HORizontal MAIn SCAle 2 165 Index 3 Index HORizontal MAIn 2 165 HORizontal POSition 2 166 HORizontal SCAle 2 168 ID 2 169 IDN 2 169 L LANGuage 2 170 LOCk 2 170 LRN 2 171 Mark Command Group 2 23 MARK 2 172 MARK SELected FOCUS 2 173 MARK SELected MARKSINCOLumn 2 174 MARK SELected OWNer 2 174 MARK SELected SOURCE 2 174 MARK SELected STARt 2 174 MARK SELected STATe 2 175 MARK SELected ZOOm POSition 2 175 MARK CREATE 2 172 MARK DELEte 2 173 MARK FREE 2 173 MARK SELected END 2 173 MARK TOTal 2 175 Math Command Group 2 24 MATH 1 HORizontal POSition 2 178 MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle 2 178 MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts 2 179 MATH 1 SPECTral MAG 2 179 MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow 2 180 MATH 1 VERTical POSition 2 181 MATH 1 VERTical SCAle 2 181 MATH 1 VERTical UNIts 2 182 MATH 1 2 176 MATH 1 DEFine 2 176 MATH I TYPe 2 180 MATH MATH1 LABel 2 175 MATHVAR VAR lt x gt 2 183 MATHVAR 2 182 Measurement Command Group 2 25 MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot 2 184 MEASUrement MMed DELay DIRection 2 186 Index 4 MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt 2 186 MEASUrement IMMed DELay 2 185 MEASUremen
87. SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the condition setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark x is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEN LESSthan than EQual UNEQual OCCURS SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger Ax RUNT WHEN OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command than argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period equal to the time period specified in SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance NOTEQual argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period greater than or less than but not equal the time period specified in SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 278 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the width setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark x is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X
88. STARTof frame 50 051 MISOMOST SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x SPI CONDi tion BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING SS specifies a search based on the Slave Selection condition STARTOf frame is applicable when BUS B x SPI FRAMING is set to IDLEtime When the trigger condition is set to STARTof frame the instrument triggers on the first SPI clock after an idle time when there are no clocks MISO specifies a search based on the Master In Slave Out condition MOST specifies a search based on the Master Out Slave In condition MISOMOSI specifies a search based on the Master In Slave Out and Master Out Slave In conditions SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string for an SPI trigger search if the search condition is MISO or MISOMOSI SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue lt bin gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue lt bin gt is the data string in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOSI OUT VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for an SPI trigger search if search the condition is MOSI or MISOMOSI
89. STOP are order independent When DATa STOP is less than DATa STARt the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE query If you always want to transfer complete waveforms set DATa STARt to 1 and DATa STOP to the maximum record length or larger DATA STOP might return DATA STOP 14900 indicating that 14900 is the last waveform data point that will be transferred DATA STOP 15000 specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data point 15000 Sets or returns the date the oscilloscope displays Miscellaneous DATE lt QString gt DATE TIME lt QString gt is a date in the form yyyy mm dd where yyyy refers to a four digit year number mm refers to a two digit month number from 01 to 12 and dd refers to a two digit day number in the month Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples DDT Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DESE Group Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATE 2006 01 24 specifies that the date is set to January 24 2006 DATE might return DATE 2006 01 24 indicating the current date is set to January 24 2006 Allows you to specify a command or a list of commands that execute when the oscilloscope receives a command or the GET 488 2 interface message Define Device Trigger DDT is a special alias that the command uses Miscellaneous DDT lt Block gt lt QString gt DDT ALlas Block is a c
90. Sets or returns the I2C search condition to be valid on a Read Write or Either condition SEARCH x is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt X gt I2C DATa DIRection READ specifies a read condition WRITE specifies a write condition NOCARE specifies either a read or write condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe Conditions Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an I2C trigger search if the search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA SEARCH x is the search number and B x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 255 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa SIZe NR1 is the data string length in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for an I2C trigger search if the search condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA SEARCH lt X gt is the search number and B x is the bus number This c
91. Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for a RS232 trigger search if the Trigger condition is TX SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and lt gt is the bus number This command requires DPO4COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the length of the data string in Bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a RS232 trigger search if the condition involves RX SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires DPO4COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALUE SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Conditions Group 2 262 Sets or returns the search condition for a SPI trigger search SEARCH x is the search number and lt gt is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x SPI CONDition 55
92. System Syntax X FILESystem MKDir directory path Related Commands FILESystem CWD FILESystem DIR Arguments directory path is a quoted string that specifies the directory to create Examples FILESYSTEM MKDIR D NewDirectory creates the directory named NewDirectory at the root of the D drive These two commands create the directory MyNewSubDirectory within the existing directory MyDirectory at the root of the D drive FILESYSTEM CWD D MyDi recto ry FILESYSTEM MKDIR MyNewSubDi rectory This of course assumes that D MyDirectory already existed and was not a read only directory FILESystem READFile No Query Form Writes the contents of the specified file to the specified interface If the specified file does not exist or is not readable an appropriate error event is posted Group File System 2 152 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FILESystem READFile Qstring FILESystem C WD lt QString gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory specify only the file name FILESYSTEM READFILE D test_data tek00016CH1 csv reads the content of the specified file if the file exists and is readable and sends the content of the file to the current interface FILESystem REName No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arg
93. TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAYLength Sets or returns the payload length portion of the binary header string SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess MODe Sets or returns the I2C address mode to 7 or 10 Bit SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess TYPe SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the I2C address type to I2C special addresses Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for I2C search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C CONDition Sets or returns the search condition for I2C search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa SIZe Sets or returns the I2C search condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for I2C search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for I2C search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Sets or returns the search condition for a LIN search Sets or returns the binary data string SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x LIN DATa QUALifier Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier SEARCH
94. Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 333 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCK SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the channel to use as the clock source The clock can be selected as NONE A selection of None implies pattern trigger Any other selection implies state trigger Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 NONE TRIGger A LOGIC INPUt CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies the analog input channel source DO D15 specifies the digital input channel source NONE specifies a Pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the logic pattern for a trigger on digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut D x HIGH LOW X TRIGger A LOGIC INPut D x High specifies the logic high state Low specifies the logic low state X specifies a don t care state TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern Query Only Group 2 334 Returns the conditions used for generating an logic pattern trigger with respect to the defined input pattern and identifies the time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate the trigger Trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN might return TRIGG
95. UE E O 2 31 Status and Error Command 22 2 37 Trigger Command extera acea veau ah SERRE ee SERRA Ree RR eeu nad dong ERRARE 2 38 Vertical Command Group 2 47 Waveform Transfer Command 2 2 2 eeanennees 2 50 Zoom Command Group 2 55 Commands Listed in Alphabetical 2 2 2 2 57 St tus anid EVENS NEHME 3 1 Register pista seems ahead see 3 1 unu sr E E dadiewdecuns 3 4 Event Handling Seg ent E ere net Ter det 3 5 Synchronization Methods 3 05 reete bere PUDE EE err 3 7 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 1 Table of Contents Appendix Ar Character Set roe A Pon ER PE ed S E E qe e SERE Ee 1 Appendix B Reserved 8 2 se een seen B 1 Appendix C Factory Defaults 2 ehe e ere e C 1 Default Setups cue rue ee eee ERR TEDSS e eee uae C 1 Index Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Getting Started This manual explains the use of commands for remotely controlling your oscilloscope With this information you can write computer programs to perform functions such a
96. UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CYCLECount QUAL i fier Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 303 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples LESSThan sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to more than EQUa sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier to out of range TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFTER LESSTHAN sets the cycle count qualifier to LESSTHAN TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating that the cycle count qualifier is set to EQUAL TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue 2 304 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count low value Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CYCLECount VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALUE lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the FLEXRAY binary data string that is the cycle count low value TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXR
97. XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C ADDRESS TYPE USER TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C CONDITION START TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 12C DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B4 I2C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC TRIGGER A BUS B4 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 PARALLEL VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI CONDITION SS TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS SOURCE B1 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual C 27 Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont
98. You can turn off the channel stop the waveform or stop the trigger When you turn off the channel math continues and data is acquired but is not displayed When you stop either the waveform or the trigger the math calculation stops and the last math calculation performed is displayed When a live waveform update or reference waveform is altered math waveforms containing those waveforms as sources are also updated to reflect the changes Remember that sources must exist but do not need to be displayed to be used in and to update math waveforms Table 2 24 Math Commands Command Description MATH 1 Returns the definition of the math waveform MATH 1 DEFine Sets or returns the current math function as a text string MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the math horizontal display scale for FFT or for Dual Math waveforms MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts Returns the math waveform horizontal unit value MATH MATH1 LABel Sets or queries the waveform label for the math waveform MATH 1 SPECTral MAG Sets or returns the units of spectral magnification in the math string MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow Sets or returns the window function for math waveform spectral input data MATH 1 VERTical POSition Sets or returns the vertical position of the currently selected math type MATH 1 VERTical SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale of the currently selected math type MATH 1 VERTical UNIts Returns the math waveform ve
99. communications signal is found Supports CAN PC SPI RS232 communications signals VIDeo specifies that the trigger occurs when a video signal is found TRIGGER A TYPE EDGE sets the A trigger type to EDGE TRIGGER A TYPE might return TRIGGER A TYPE PULSE indicating that the A trigger type is a pulse trigger TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 356 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the upper threshold for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Each channel can have an independent level Used only for runt and slew rate trigger types Trigger TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH x NR3 is the threshold level in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 50E 3 sets the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV for channel 2 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 might return TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 1 2000E 01 indicating that the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger is set to 120 mV Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A VIDeo Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the trigger video parameters Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo TRIGGER A VIDEO might return TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY POSITIVE SOURCE CH1 STANDARD NTSC SYNC ALLLINES HOLDOFF FIELD 0 0000 TRIGGER
100. couplng Dual Waveform Math GND coupling Vert Scale A string containing the vertical scale factor of 100 0 mV div the unzoomed waveform The numeric portion 20 00 dB div will always be four digits The examples cover 45 00 deg div all known internal units 785 4 mrad div 500 0 uVs div 10 00 kV s div 200 0 mV div 50 00 unk div Horiz Scale A string containing the horizontal scale factor of 100 ms div the unzoomed waveform The numeric portion 10 00 kHz div will always be four digits The examples cover all known internal units Record Length A string containing the number of waveform 1000 points points available in the entire record The 1000000 points numeric portion is given as an integer Acquisition Mode A string describing the mode used to acquire Sample mode the waveform Pk Detect mode Envelope mode Average mode Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 393 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples WFMOUTPRE WFID might return WFMOUTPRE WFID Chl DC coupling 100 0mvolts div 500 0us div 1000 points Sample mode WFMOutpre XINcr Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the horizontal point spacing in units of WFMOutpre XUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command This value corresponds to the sampling interval The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified
101. dB V dB W dB dB dBA dBV dBW dBdB day degrees div hr min ohms percent s Waveform Transfer WFMInpre XUNit Qstring WFMInpre XUNit WFMoOutpre XUNit Qstring contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the horizontal unit of measure for the incoming waveform Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 383 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples WFMinpre XZEro Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YMUIt 2 384 WFMINPRE XUNIT HZ specifies that the horizontal units for the incoming waveform are hertz WFMINPRE XUNIT might return WFMINPRE XUNIT 5 indicating that the horizontal units for the incoming waveform are seconds Sets or returns the position value in XUNIts of the first sample of the incoming waveform Waveform Transfer WFMInpre XZEro lt NR3 gt WFMInpre XZEro WFMlInpre XINcr WFMInpre XUNit WFMOutpre XZEro lt NR3 gt argument is the floating point value of the position in XUNits of the first sample in the incoming waveform If XUNits is s lt NR3 gt is the time of the first sample in the incoming waveform WFMINPRE XZERO 5 7E 6 which indicates the trigger occurred 5 7 us before the first sample in the waveform WFMINPRE XZERO might return WFMINPRE XZEro 7 5000E 6 indicating that the trigger occurs 7 5 us after the first sample in the waveform Sets or returns the vertical scale factor of the incoming
102. for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NR3 is the low reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default low reference level is 1096 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW 15 sets the high reference level to 15 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW 10 indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 10 of HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the percent where 100 is equal to HIGH that is used to calculate the mid reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of period frequency delay and all cyclic measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 NR3 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID 1 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default mid reference level is 50 MEASUREMENT
103. for the vertical bar cursors Cursor CURSOr VBArs CURSOR VBARS might return the following vertical bar settings CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS POSITION 1 0000E 06 POSITION2 9 0000E 06 CURSor VBArs ALTERNATE lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Arguments Returns the alternate readout for the waveform Vbar cursors specified by lt x gt This alternate readout is in effect when the selected waveform is a bus or digital channel Cursor CURSor VBArs ALTERNATE lt x gt I 1 specifies vertical bar cursorl I 2 specifies vertical bar cursor2 CURSor VBArs DELTa Query Only Group 2 114 Returns the horizontal difference between the two vertical bar cursors The units are specified by the CURSor VBArs UNIts command This is equivalent to watching the cursor readout in the display while using the appropriate cursor mode Cursor Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSOr VBArs DELTa CURSor VBArs UNIts NR3 CURSOR VBARS DELTA might return CURSOR VBARS DELTa 1 0640E 00 indicating that the time between the vertical bar cursors is 1 064 s CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns Examples Returns the horizontal value of the specified vertical bar ticks for cursor x Cursor CURSOr VBArs HPOS x
104. gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT WIDth NR3 specifies the minimum width in seconds Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the clock slope setting for a setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHO1d CLOCk EDGE FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the clock source setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHOold CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 REF SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies an input channel as the edge source MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold Group Sets or returns the clock threshold setting for an setup hold trigge
105. gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command EQUa places a mark if the specific pattern is true longer than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit command but less than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command UNEQual places a mark if the specific pattern is true less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit command or longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit command SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern search to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn LESSL imi t lt NR3 gt specifies the maximum amount of time to hold the pattern true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit 2 272 Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern search to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEAR
106. ignored if sent to an unsupported probe Vertical CH x PRObe SIGnal BYPass PASS CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal BYPass sets the probe to Bypass mode PASS sets the probe to Pass mode Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts Query Only Returns a string describing the units of measure for the probe attached to channel x where x is the channel number Group Vertical Syntax lt gt PRObe UNIts Examples CH4 PROBE UNITS might return CHA PROBE UNITS V indicating that the units of measure for the probe attached to channel 4 are volts CH lt x gt SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale for the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter For a signal with constant amplitude increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger Scale affects all waveforms but affects channel waveforms differently from other waveforms For channel waveforms this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition window as well as the display scale The range and resolution of scale values depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have specified B For reference and math waveforms this setting controls the display only graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acq
107. is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold REF x TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC THReShold REF lt x gt TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the channel waveform lower threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all channel searches that use a lower threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH x TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH Group Syntax Arguments 2 274 Sets or returns the math waveform lower threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all math searches that use a lower threshold x is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the reference waveform lower thresh
108. lt x gt Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Sets or returns the upper threshold for each channel 2 15 Command Groups Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group The Calibration and Diagnostic commands provide information about the current state of oscilloscope calibration They also initiate internal signal path calibration SPC or execute diagnostic tests Commands that are specific to factory calibration are not described in this manual They are described in the Service manual located on the DPO4000 Documentation CD ROM in PDF format You can also order a printed copy Table 2 16 Calibration and Diagnostic Commands Command Description CAL Instructs the oscilloscope to perform self calibration and returns the oscilloscope self calibration status CALibrate FACtory S TATus Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatile memory CALibrate INTERNal Starts a signal path compensation CALibrate INTERNal STARt Starts the internal signal path calibration CALibrate INTERNal STATus Returns the current status of the internal signal path calibration CALibrate RESults Returns the status of all calibration subsystems without performing an SPC operation CALibrate RESults FACtory Returns the status of internal and factory calibration CALibrate RESults SPC Returns the results of the last SPC operation DIAg LOOP OPTion Sets the
109. lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue 2 317 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALifier 2 318 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe 2 319 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue 2 319 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE 2 320 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue 2 320 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue 2 321 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C COND ition 2 32 1 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe 2 322 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue 2 322 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe 2 322 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue 2 323 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition 2 323 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe 2 325 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue 2 324 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa OUT MOSIJ VALue 2 324 TRIGger A BUS SOUrce 2 325 TRIGger A EDGE COUPling 2 326 TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 2 327 TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce 2 327 TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe 2 328 TRIGger A LE Vel AUXin 2 329 TRIGger A LE Vel CH lt x gt 2 330 TRIGger A LE Vel D lt x gt 2 330 TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss 2 33 1 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion 2 332 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt 2 333 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE 2 333 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUtce 2 334 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt 2 334 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut 2 332 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern DELTatime 2 335 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D lt x gt 2 335
110. lt x gt PARallel BIT lt x gt SOUrce Sets or returns the Parallel bit source for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK EDGE Sets or returns the Parallel clock edge for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK ISCLOCKed Sets or returns the Parallel bus clock function for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK SOUrce Sets or returns the Parallel clock source for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt PARallel WIDth Sets or returns the width of the Parallel bus BUS B lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the position of the specified bus waveform BUS B lt x gt RS232C BITRate Sets or returns the RS232 bit rate for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits Sets or returns the number of bits for the data frame BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter Sets or returns the RS232 delimiting value for a packet on the specified bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode Sets or returns the display mode for the specified bus display and event table BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity Sets or returns parity for RS232 data BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity Sets or returns the RS232C polarity for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX SOUrce Sets or returns the RS232 RX source BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX SOUrce Sets or returns the RS232 TX Source BUS B lt x gt SPI BITOrder Sets or returns the bit order for the specified SPI bus BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCKJ SCL
111. lt x gt Turns on or off the specified waveform or returns whether the specified channel is on or off SELect CONTROI Sets or returns the waveform that is selected as the implied recipient of channel related commands SELect D lt x gt Turns on the display of digital channel lt x gt and resets the acquisition SELect MATH 1 Turns on or off the math waveform or returns whether the math waveform is on or off SELect REF lt x gt Turns on or off the specified reference waveform or returns whether the specified reference waveform is on or off Waveform Transfer Command Group 2 50 Data Formats Use the commands in the Waveform Transfer Command Group to transfer waveform data points to and from the oscilloscope Waveform data points are a collection of values that define a waveform One data value usually represents one data point in the waveform record When working with envelope waveforms each data value is either the minimum or maximum of a min max pair Before you transfer waveform data you must specify the data format record length and waveform source or destination data points for DPO and MSO models are signed integer format only Valid data widths for CH1 CH4 MATH REF1 REF4 and D0 D15 are 1 and 2 byte widths The valid data widths for the digital collection is either 4 or 8 byte widths Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups The oscilloscope can transfer waveform data in either ASC
112. or returns the reference waveform level for edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Sets or returns the logic operator for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCK EDGE Sets or returns whether the clock edge is rise or fall for a logic search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Search Commands cont Command Command Groups Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns the clock source definition for logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH Sets or returns the criteria for a logic search to determine where to place a mark for digital channel lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search Sets or returns the criteria for a pattern search to determine where to place a mark for digital channel x SEARCH SEARCH
113. qualifier to out of range Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN DATA QUALIFIER might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data qualifier is set to equal TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SiZe Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the size of the data string in bytes TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 8 sets the data size to 8 bytes TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 1 indicating the data size is 1 byte TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger condition if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x LIN DATa VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x LIN DATa VALue Qstring is a quoted string that 1s the LIN trigger data value TRIGGER A BUS BI LIN DATA VALUE 11001101 sets the data value to 11001101 TRIGGER A BUS BI LIN DATA VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS BI LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the data value is don t care Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 319 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt
114. query The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre NR Pt CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAV Eform SAVe WAV Eform FILEFormat WFMInpre NR Pt WFMOUTPRE NR PT might return WFMOUTPRE NR PT 10000 indicating that there are 10000 data points to be sent WFMOutpre PT_Fmt Query Only Group Returns the point format for the outgoing waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command Returned values are either ENV which indicates envelope mode format in which the data 1s returned as a series of min max pairs or Y which indicates normal waveform points The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 39 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Examples wFMOutpre PT_Fmt CURVe DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE PT FMT might return wFMOutpre PT ENV indicating that the waveform data 1s a series of min max pairs WFMOutpre PT Off Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples The set form of this command is ignored The query form always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displayed If the waveform 1s not displayed the query form generates an error and returns event code 2244 This command i
115. return CH1 PROBE ID SERNUMBER B010289 indicating that the serial number of the probe attached to channel 1 is B010289 CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE Query Only Returns the type of probe attached to the channel specified by x where x is the channel number Level 2 or higher probes supply their exact product nomenclature for Level 0 or 1 probes a generic No Probe Detected message 18 returned Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 105 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Examples Vertical CH x PRObe ID TYPE CH1 PROBE ID TYPE might return CH1 PROBE ID TYPE P6203 indicating that P6203 type probe is attached to channel 1 CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance Query Only Group Syntax Examples CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal Group Syntax Arguments 2 106 Returns the resistance factor of the probe attached to channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH x PRObe RESi stance CH2 PRObe RESistance might return CH2 PROBE RESISTANCE 10 0000E 6 indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to Channel 2is 1 NOTE This query will return 0 0 if no probe is attached or the attached probe does not report the input resistance Sets or returns the input bypass setting of a TekVPI probe attached to channel lt gt where x is the channel number The probe must support input bypass for example TCP0001 This command is
116. returns the relationship of delta time to transitioning signal TRIGger A TYPe Sets or returns the type of A trigger TRIGger A VIDeo Returns the video TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE parameters for the A trigger Sets or returns the video trigger format TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom LINEPeriod Sets or queries the line period Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 45 Command Groups 2 46 Table 2 30 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN Sets or returns the horizontal line scan rate of the A video trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SYNCInterval Sets or queries the sync interval TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Sets or returns the HDTV video signal format on which to trigger TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD Sets or returns the video trigger holdoff TRIGger A VIDeo LINE Sets or returns the video line number on which the oscilloscope triggers TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity Sets or returns the polarity of the A video trigger TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce Sets or returns the polarity of the video trigger TRIGger A VIDeo STANdard Sets or returns the video standard TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD Sets or returns the video field trigger TRIGger B Sets the B trigger level to 50 or returns the B trigger parameters TRIGger B BY Sets or returns B trigger time or event qualifiers TRIGger B EDGE Returns B trigger edge t
117. settings stored in memory The settings are stored using the SAV command Group Save and Recall Syntax RECATT SETUp FACtory lt NRl gt lt file path gt Related Commands FACtory RCL RST SAV SAVe SETUp FILESystem C WD Arguments Factory restores the factory setup NRI is a value in the range from 1 to 10 which specifies a saved setup storage location file path specifies a location for an oscilloscope setup file file path is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form lt drive gt lt dir gt lt filename gt lt extension gt and one or dir s are optional If you do not specify them the oscilloscope will read the file from the default directory see FILESystem CWD lt filename gt stands for a filename the use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but highly recommended Examples RECALL SETUP FACTORY recalls and makes current the oscilloscope setup to its factory defaults RECALL SETUP 2 recalls the oscilloscope setup from setup storage location 2 RECALL SETUP TEK00000 SET recalls the setup from the file TEK00000 SET in the default directory for setups D TekScope setups RECAII WAVEform No Query Form This command no query form recalls a stored waveform to a reference location Group Save and Recall Syntax RECAll wAvEform file path gt REF lt x gt Related Commands SAVe WAV Ef
118. specified block data to a file in the oscilloscope current working directory If the specified file does not exist or is not readable an appropriate error event is posted File System FILESystem WRITEFile file path data FILESystem CWD file path is the quoted string that defines the file name and path If the path 18 within the current working directory specify the file name only data can be either DEFINITE LENGTH encoding or INDEFINITE LENGTH ARBITRARY BLOCK PROGRAM DATA encoding as described in IEEE488 2 FPAnel PRESS No Query Form Group 2 154 Simulates the action of pressing a specified front panel button When the front panel is locked the front panel button and multipurpose knob operations are suspended The 1 PRESS and the FPAnel TURN commands will also not work You can work around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands instead of the front panel commands Miscellaneous Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments FPAnel PRESS button Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order button is thename of a front panel button Most of the argument names associate directly with their front panel buttons For example AUTOSet is for the Autoset button The few commands that do not have obvious associations are listed below Table 2 37 FPAnel PRESS arguments Argument D
119. the Aux In input Vertical AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange lt NR3 gt AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange NR3 is the probe range which is probe dependent Sets or returns the gain factor of a probe that is attached to the Aux In input Vertical AUXin PRObe GAIN NR3 AUXin PRObe GAIN NR3 is the probe gain which is probe dependent Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples AUXin PROBE GAIN might return AUXin PROBE GAIN 100 0000E 3 indicating that the attached 10x probe delivers 0 1 V to the Aux In BNC for every 1 0 V applied to the probe input AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber Query Only Returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input Group X Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber AUXin PRObe ID TYPE Query Only Returns the type of probe that is attached to the auxiliary input Group Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe ID TYPE AUXin PRObe RESistance Query Only Returns the resistance of the probe attached to the front panel Aux In connector Group Vertical Syntax AUXin PRObe RESistance Examples AUXin PRObe RESistance might return AUXin PROBE RESISTANCE 1 0000E 6 indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to the front panel Aux In connector is 1 NOTE This query will return 0 0 if no probe is attached or the attached probe does not report the input resistance Tektronix 4000 Series Progr
120. the LIN data qualifier to out of range SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS BL LIN DATA QUALIFTIER LESSThan sets the data qualifier to lessthan SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER might return SEARCH SEARCHL TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data qualifier is equal SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SiZe Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN Search if search condition is DATA or IDANDDATA Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B x LIN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B X LIN DATa SIZe NR1 is the length of the data in bytes SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS BT LIN DATA SIZE 8 sets the LIN data size 15 8 bytes SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B LIN DATA SIZE 1 indicating that the LIN data size 15 1 byte SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue 2 258 Sets or returns the binary data string used for a LIN search if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x LIN DATa VALue lt QString gt SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B X LIN DATa VALue Qs
121. the contents of the Standard Event Status Register EVENT Returns event code from the event queue EVMsg Returns event code message from the event queue EVQty Return number of events in the event queue Generates the operation complete message in the standard event status register when all pending operations are finished Or returns 1 when all current operations are finished PSC Sets or returns the power on status flag PUD Sets or returns a string of protected user data Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 37 Command Groups Table 2 29 Status and Error Commands cont Command Description RST Resets the oscilloscope to factory default settings SRE Sets or returns the bits in the Service Request Enable Register STB Returns the contents of the Status Byte Register WAI Prevents the oscilloscope from executing further commands until all pending operations finish Trigger Command Group 2 38 Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all aspects of triggering for the oscilloscope There are two triggers A and B Where appropriate this command set has parallel construction between triggers You can set the A or B triggers to edge mode Edge triggering lets you display a waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through a voltage level of your choosing You can also set A triggers to pulse logic or video modes With pulse triggering the os
122. the number of available digital waveform position slots NOTE If the number of live digital channels exceeds the number of slots their height is reduced to a smaller size allowing all digital channels to be displayed Group Display Syntax DISplay DIGital HEIght SMA11 MEDium LARge DISplay DIGital HEIght Arguments sets the height to 40 MEDium sets the height to 20 LARge sets the height to 10 DISplay FORMat Sets or returns the display format Group Display Syntax DISplay FORMat DISplay FORMat Arguments YT sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the default mode XY argument displays one waveform against another Selecting one source causes Its corresponding source to be implicitly selected producing a single trace from the two input waveforms Examples DISPLAY FORMAT XY sets the display format to XY DISPLAY FORMAT might return DISPLAY FORMAT YT indicating the display format is YT Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 135 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISplay GRAticule Group Syntax Arguments Examples DISplay INTENSITy Group Syntax Examples Selects or queries the type of graticule the oscilloscope displays Display DISplay GRAticule CROSSHair FRAme FUL1 GRId DISplay GRAticule CROSSHair specifies a frame and cross hairs FRAme specifies a frame only FUL specifies a frame a grid and cross hairs GRId specifies a
123. the structure E Header m lt Header gt lt Space gt lt Argument gt lt Coma gt lt Argument gt You can specify a query command at any level within the command tree unless otherwise noted These branch queries return information about all the mnemonics below the specified branch or level Headers Use the HEADer command to control whether the oscilloscope returns headers as part of the query response If header is on the query response returns command headers then formats itself as a valid set command When header is off the response includes only the values This may make it easier to parse and extract the information from the response The table below shows the difference in responses Table 2 3 Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses Query Header Off Header On TIME 14 30 00 TIME 14 30 00 ACQuire NUMAVg 100 ACQUIRE NUMAVG 100 Command Parts Header Comma go SAVe WAVEform CH1 REF3 Mnemonics Space Arguments Clearing the oscilloscope You can clear the Output Queue and reset the oscilloscope to accept a new command or query by using the selected Device Clear DCL function Command Entry The following rules apply when entering commands B You can enter commands in upper or lower case B You can precede any command with white space characters White space characters include any combination of the ASCII control characters 00 through 09 and OB through 20 hexadecimal 0 through
124. threshold to 800mV BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 might return BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 800 0000E 3 indicating the CH1 lower threshold is 800 mV BUS THReshold CH lt x gt Conditions Group Sets or returns the threshold for analog channel lt x gt where x is the channel number This setting applies to all trigger types that use the channel This command requires a DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module Bus Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 91 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments BUS THReshold D lt x gt Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments BUS THReshold CH lt x gt ECL TTL lt NR3 gt BUS THReshold CH x TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a TTL preset high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold level in volts Sets or returns the threshold for digital channel lt x gt where x is the digital channel number This will apply to all Search and Trigger Types that use the channel This command requires a DPO4COMP application module or RS232C Bus BUS THReshold D lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL BUS THReshold D lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel D lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold level in volts BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group
125. to enter the number of waveform acquisitions to average Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 59 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ACQuire STATE 2 60 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Acquisition ACQuire NUMAVg lt NR1 gt ACQui re NUMAVg ACQuire MODe lt NR1 gt is the number of waveform acquisitions to average The range of values is from 2 to 512 in powers of two ACQUIRE NUMAVG 16 specifies that 16 waveform averages will be performed before exponential averaging starts ACQUIRE NUMAVG might return ACQUIRE NUMAVG 64 indicating that there are 64 acquisitions specified for averaging Starts or stops acquisitions When state is set to ON or RUN a new acquisition will be started If the last acquisition was a single acquisition sequence a new single sequence acquisition will be started If the last acquisition was continuous a new continuous acquisition will be started If RUN is issued in the middle of completing a single sequence acquisition for example averaging or enveloping the acquisition sequence is restarted and any accumulated data is discarded Also the oscilloscope resets the number of acquisitions If the RUN argument is issued while in continuous mode acquisition continues Acquisition ACQui re STATE OFF ON RUN STOP lt NR1 gt ACQuire STATE ACQuire STOPA fter OFF stops acquisitions
126. true for at least 8 ns to generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt This command sets or queries the logic trigger threshold voltage for the channel specified by x Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 337 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH x NR3 specifies the threshold voltage in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH2 3 0E 3 sets the A logic trigger threshold voltage for Channel 2 to 3 mV TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH3 might return TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH3 1 2000E 00 indicating that the logic trigger threshold voltage for Channel 3 is 1 2 V TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold D lt x gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the trigger A logic threshold level for the specified digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number This commands affects all trigger types using the digital channel Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold D x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold D x TRIGger A LEVel D lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold level in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt
127. turned on and all statistics are being displayed for each measurement Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 213 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement STATIstics WElghting Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples MESSage Group Syntax Examples MESSage BOX 2 214 Sets or returns the time constant for mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations Measurement MEASUrement STATIstics WEIghting lt NR1 gt MEASUrement STATIstics WEIghting MEASUrement STATIstics MODE lt NR1 gt is the number of samples used for the mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 4 sets statistical weighting to four samples MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING might return MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 4 indicating that measurement statistics weighting is currently set to 4 samples This command sets or queries message parameters Miscellaneous MESSage MESSage MESSAGE might return MESSAGE SHOW TP401 BOX 271 82 292 114 STATE O indicating the message parameters Sets or returns the size and position of the message window This command does not display the message unless MESSage STATE is on Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order and are the screen coordinates of the top left corner of the message box X2 and Y2 are the screen coo
128. using the ALLEv query which returns the exact number of events Status and Error EVQty ALLEv EVENT EVMsg EVQTY might return EVQTY 3 indicating the number of event codes in the Event Queue Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 147 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FACtory No Query Form 2 148 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings This command does the following Clears the Event Status Enable Register Clears the Service Request Enable Register Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255 Purges all defined aliases Enables all Command Headers Sets the macro defined by DDT to a zero length field Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations This command does not reset the following Communication settings Selected GPIB address Sate of the VXI 11 Ethernet IEEE Std 488 2 interface Calibration data that affects device specifications Protected user data Stored settings Power On Status Clear Flag Oscilloscope password Save and Recall FACtory PSC RCL RECAIESETUp RST SAV SAVe SETUp None FACTORY resets the oscilloscope to its factory default settings Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FILESystem Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples FILESystem CWD Group Returns the di
129. value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTY PE Group Syntax Sets or returns the end of file type used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray EOFTYPE STATic DYNAMic ANY TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 307 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples STATic specifies triggering on the STATIC end of file type DYNAM ic specifies triggering on the DYNAMIC end of file type ANY specifies triggering on a STATIC or DYNAMIC end of file type TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE ANY sets the FLEXRAY end of file type to ANY TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY EOFTYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC indicating the FLEXRAY end of file type is STATIC TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 308 Sets or returns the error type be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE CRCHeader CRCTrai ler SYNCFrame STARTupnosync NULLFRStatic NULLFRDynamic TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE CRCHeader sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to CRCHeader CRCTrai ler sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to CRCTrailer SYNCFrame sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to SYNCFrame STARTupnosync sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to STARTupnosync NULLFRStatic sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to NULLFRStat
130. waveform expressed in YUNits per waveform data point level For one byte waveform data there are 256 data point levels For two byte waveform data there are 65 536 data point levels YMUIt YOFf and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is the data level curve in dl is a data point in CURVe value in units curve in dl YOFf in dl YMUIt YZEro in units NOTE For a given waveform record YMUlt YOFf and YZEro have to be a consistent set otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may give incorrect results Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YOFf Group Syntax Related Commands Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YMUlt lt NR3 gt WFMInpre YMU1t DATa DESTination WFMInpre BYT Nr WFMInpre YUNit lt NR3 gt is the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the incoming waveform points WFMINPRE YMULT might return WFMINPRE YMULT 40 0000E 3 which if YUNit is V indicates that the vertical scale is 40 mV digitizing level 1V div for 8 bit data WFMINPRE YMULT 20E 3 specifies that if WFMInpre YUNit 15 V and WFMInpre BYT Nr is 1 the vertical scale is 20 mV digitizing level 500 mV div Sets or returns the vertical position of the incoming waveform digitizing levels Variations in this number ar
131. x HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPUt D x HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPUt MATH HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPUt MATH HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut REF lt x gt Group Syntax Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPUt REF x HIGH LOwW X SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut REF lt x gt Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 269 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the logic criteria for a logic pattern trigger search to determine wh
132. 00 TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 20 0000E 9 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 cH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 0000E 9 LIMIT 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 20 0000E 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 SETUP lt x gt DATE Query Only Group Syntax Examples SETUP lt x gt LABEL Group Syntax Arguments Examples Returns the date when the oscilloscope setup was saved for the specified channel XX Save and Recall SETUP x DATE SETUP4 DATE might return SETUP4 DATE 04 18 06 which is the setup date for channel 4 Sets or returns the setup label for the specified channel x where x be 1 through 10 Save and Recall SETUP lt x gt LABEL Qstring Qstring is an alphanumeric string of characters enclosed in quotes that defines the label text for SETUP lt x gt The length of the string is limited to 30 characters SETUP LABEL might return SETUPL LABEL TEST 2 which is the label setup for channel 1 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 29 Commands Listed in Alphabetical
133. 00 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A H OLDOFF TIME 20 0000E 9 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0 000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 0000E 9 LIMIT 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 20 0000E 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 THRESHOLD 0 0000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 4 0000E 9 SETTIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS TRAnSITION TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN LESSTHAN WIDTH Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 171 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARK Group Syntax Arguments 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN OCCURS WIDTH 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A TRAnSITION SOURCE CHl Moves to the next or previous reference mark on the waveform Returns the current mark position Mark MARK NEXT PREVious MARK NEXT moves to the next reference mark on the right PREVious moves to the next reference mark on the left MARK CREATE No Query Form 2 172 Group Syntax Arguments Creates a mark on a specified waveform or all waveforms in a column Mark MARK CREATE lt gt lt gt REF x DIGi tal COLUMN CH x c
134. 00 Series Programmer Manual 2 219 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Table 2 40 Commands that Generate an OPC Message Operation Command Single sequence acquisition ACQuire S TATE ON NR 1 AUXin PRObe DEGAUss EXECute CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss EXECute DIAg STATE EXECute RECAII SETUp file path RECAII WAVEform file path REF x SAVe IMAGe file path SAVe SETUp file path SAVe WAVEform wfm REF lt x gt TEKSecure Hard copy operation HARDCopy START Calibration step STARt PREVious CONTinue Status and Error OPC OPC BUSY WAI OPC generates the operation complete message in the SESR at the completion of all pending OPC operations OPC might return to indicate that all pending OPC operations are finished PASSWord No Query Form Group 2 220 Enables the PUD and NEWpass set commands Sending PASS Word without any arguments disables these same commands Once the password is successfully entered the PUD and NEWpass commands are enabled until the oscilloscope is powered off or until the FACtory command or the PASSWord command with no arguments is issued To change the password you must first enter the valid password with the PASSWord command and then change to your new password with the NEWpass command Remember that the password is case sensitive Miscellaneous Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Rela
135. 000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OCCURS WIDTH 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A TRAnSITION SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN SLOWER DELTATIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY POSITIVE SOURCE CH1 STANDARD NTSC SYNC ALLLINES HOLDOFF FIELD 0 0000 TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE SCAN RATET15K TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 1 H DTV FORMAT HD1080160 TRIGGER A BUS SOURCE B1 Bl1 I2C CONDITION START DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SIZE 1 START 0 0000 DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS Bl1 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 TYPE USER VALUE XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI CONDITION MOSI DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPT DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 1 START 0 0000 TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the trigger type I2C CAN SPI RS232 or Parallel There are up to four serial buses 1 4 depending on your instrument model Each can be independently set to one of the serial trigger types The serial parameters related to the trigger are broken into two sections Trigger A SERIAL xxx consisting of parameters the user will change frequently and BUS B1 xxx consisting of parameters the user will specify once bus definition Conditions Requires DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD DPO4COMP application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS I2C SPI CAN RS232 PARallel TRIGger A BUS Arguments I2C specifies the Inter IC bus SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Inter
136. 1 TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN OCCURS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A RUNT WIDTH 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE NONE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 9 91E 37 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD MATH 0 00E 00 C 20 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD REF 1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD REF2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 8 00E 09 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY POSITIVE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN SLOWER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A TYPE EDGE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 8 00E 01 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 8 00E 01 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD MATH 8 00E 01 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD REF1 8 00E 01 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD REF2 8 00E 01 SELECT BUS1 0 SELECT BUS2 0 SELECT BUS
137. 14 103 TA3 123 TA19 143 SA3 163 SA19 C 6 43 67 53 83 63 99 73 115 104 TA4 124 TA20 144 SA4 164 SA20 D d t 44 68 54 84 64 100 74 116 105 TAS 125 21 145 SA5 165 SA21 E U e u 45 69 55 85 65 101 75 117 106 TAG 126 TA22 146 SA6 166 SA22 F V f V 46 70 56 86 66 102 76 118 107 127 TA23 147 SA7 167 SA23 G g w 47 71 57 87 67 108 77 119 110 8 130 TA24 150 SA8 170 SA24 H X x 48 72 58 88 78 120 111 9 131 TA25 171 SA25 Y y 49 73 59 89 79 121 112 10 132 TA26 172 SA26 J 7 2 4 74 5A 90 7A 122 113 TAM 133 27 173 SA27 K 4B 75 5B 91 7B 123 114 12 134 28 174 5 28 L i 4C 76 5C 92 7C 124 115 TA13 135 TA29 175 SA29 M 1 4D 77 5D 93 7D 125 116 TA14 136 TA30 176 SA30 N 4E 78 5E 94 7E 126 117 15 137 UNT 177 0 RUBOUT 4F 79 5F 95 DEL TALK SECONDARY ADDRESSES ADDRESSES OR COMMANDS Tektronix REF ANSI STD X3 4 1977 IEEE STD 488 1 1987 ISO STD 646 2973 A 1 Appendix Character Set A 2 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix B Reserved Words This is a list of reserved words for your instrument Capital letters identify the required minimum spelling CAL AMP 1itude CALibrate D11 CLS AND CAN D12 DDT ANY CANH D13 ESE APPKey CANL D14 ESR AREa CARea D15 IDN ASCII CATalog D2 LRN ASCIi CH D3 ASCii CH1 D4 PSC ASSIgn CH2 D5 PUD ATRIGger CH3 D6 RCL
138. 2 16 CH lt x gt BANdwidth 2 97 CH lt x gt COUPIling 2 98 CH lt x gt DESKew 2 98 CH lt x gt IMPedance 2 99 CH lt x gt INVert 2 99 CH lt x gt LABel 2 100 CH lt x gt OFFSet 2 100 CH lt x gt POSition 2 101 CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero 2 102 CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND 2 102 CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss 2 103 CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE 2 103 CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange 2 104 CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN 2 104 CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber 2 105 CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE 2 105 CH lt x gt PRObe ID 2 105 CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance 2 106 CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal 2 106 CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts 2 107 CH lt x gt PRObe 2 102 CH lt x gt SCAle 2 107 CH lt x gt TERmination 2 108 CH lt x gt VOLts 2 108 CH lt x gt YUNits 2 109 lt gt 2 97 CLEARMenu 2 109 CLS 2 109 Command Groups 2 11 Cursor Command Group 2 16 CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt 2 112 CURSor VBArs ALTERNATE lt x gt 2 114 CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt 2 115 Index 2 CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt 2 115 CURSor VBArs VDELTa 2 117 CURSor X Y POLar RADIUS DELta 2 118 CURSor X Y POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt 2 118 CURSor XY POLar RADIUS UNIts 2 118 CURSor X Y POLar THETA DELta 2 118 CURSor XY POLar THETA POSITION lt x gt 2 118 CURSor XY POLar THETA UNIts 2 119 CURSor XY PRODUCT DELt2 2 119 CURSor XY PRODUCT POSITION lt x gt 2 119 CURSor XY PRODUCT UNIts 2 119 CURSor XY RATIO DELt2 2 120 C
139. 22 42 LA2 62 LA18 0010 STX DC2 H 2 12 18 22 34 32 50 23 43 LA3 63 LA19 0011 DC3 L 3 3 13 19 23 35 33 51 4 SDC 24 DCL 44 LA 64 LA20 0100 EOT DC4 4 4 14 20 24 36 34 52 5 PPC 25 PPU 45 LA5 65 LA21 0101 ENQ NAK 926 5 15 21 25 37 35 53 26 46 LAG 66 LA22 0110 SYN amp 6 16 22 26 38 36 54 27 47 LA7 67 LA23 0 1 1 1 BEL ETB 7 7 17 23 27 39 37 55 10 GET 30 SPE 50 Las 70 LA24 1000 BS CAN 8 8 18 24 28 40 38 56 11 TCT 31 SPD 51 LA9 71 LA25 1001 HT EM 9 9 19 25 29 4 39 57 12 32 52 LA10 72 LA26 1010 LF SUB A 10 1A 26 2A 42 3A 58 13 33 53 LAM 73 LA27 1011 VT ESC B 11 1B 27 2B 43 3B 59 14 34 54 LA12 74 LA28 1100 FF FS P lt 12 1C 28 2C 44 3C 60 15 35 55 LA13 75 LA29 1101 CR GS D 13 1D 29 2D 45 3D 61 16 36 56 LA14 76 LA30 1110 50 RS gt 14 1E 30 2E 46 3E 62 17 37 57 LA15 77 UNL 111 1 SI US 1 F 15 1F 31 2F 47 3F 63 ADDRESSED UNIVERSAL LISTEN COMMANDS COMMANDS ADDRESSES KEY octal 5 ee GPIB code with ATN asserted ASCII character hex 5 5 decimal Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual UPPER CASE LOWER CASE 100 Tao 120 16 140 5 0 160 SA16 P Y 40 64 50 80 60 96 70 112 101 TM 121 17 141 SA1 161 SA17 A q 4 65 51 81 61 97 71 113 102 TA2 122 18 142 SA2 162 SA18 B R b r 42 66 52 82 62 98 72 1
140. 3 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOW 0 0000 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 MATH 0 0000 REF1 0 0000 REF2 0 0000 REF3 0 0000 REF4 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A EDGE SOU CH1 SLO RIS SE ARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOGI FUNC AND THR CH1 0 0000 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 MATH 0 0000 REF1 0 0000 REF2 0 0000 REF3 0 0000 4 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOGI INP CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X MA TH X REFL X REF2 X REF3 X REF4 X CLOC SOU NONE EDGE RIS SEARCH1 TRIG A LOGI PAT INP X CH 2 X CH3 X CH4 X MATH X REF2 X REF3 X REF4 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A LOGI PAT WHE TRU WHE LESSL 8 0000E 9 L 8 0000E 9 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A PULSEW SOU CH1 POL POS WHE LESS WID 8 0000E 9 SEA RCH SEARCHL TRIG A RUNT SOU CH1 POL POS WHE OCCURS WID 8 0000E 9 SEARCH SEARCH TRIG A TRAN SOU CH1 POL POS WHE SLOW DELT 8 0000 9 1 SOU CH1 EDGE RIS THR 0 0000 1 SETH DAT SOU 2 0 0000 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIG A SETH HOLDT 8 0000 9 5 8 0000 E 9 SEARCH SEARCHL STATE 0 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy No Query Form Group Copies the search criteria to the trigger or the trigger criteria to a search lt x gt is the search number Search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 235 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt C
141. 3 0 SELECT BUS4 0 1 0 SELECT CH1 SELECT CH2 SELECT CONTROL CH1 SELECT DO SELECT D1 SELECT D10 SELECT D11 SELECT D12 SELECT D13 SELECT D14 SELECT D15 SELECT D2 SELECT D3 SELECT D4 SELECT D5 SELECT D6 SELECT D7 SELECT D8 SELECT D9 SELECT DALL SELECT MATH SELECT REF1 o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o o ol eo Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual C 21 Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value SELECT REF2 0 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRI
142. 4 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA MISO VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA MOSI VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 SPI DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS SOURCE B1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE RISE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL MATH 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL REF1 0 00E 00 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LEVEL REF2 0 00E 00 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Command Appendix C Factory Defaults Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION AND SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH2 X SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CLOCK EDGE RISE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CLOCK SOURCE NONE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT DO SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D10 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D11 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D12 SEARCH SEARCH1 TR
143. 47 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE 2 247 Index 5 Index SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue 2 248 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXrtay FRAMEID QUALifier 2 248 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue 2 249 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType 2 250 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC 2 250 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount 2 25 1 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID 2 251 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits 2 252 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAY Length 2 252 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess MODe 2 253 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess TYPe 2 253 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess VALue 2 254 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C CONDition 2 254 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DIRection 2 255 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa SIZe 2 255 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa VALue 2 256 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition 2 256 SEARCH SEARCH l
144. 8 Use the commands in the Miscellaneous Command Group to perform actions that do not fit into other categories Several commands and queries are common to all 488 2 1987 devices The 488 2 1987 standard defines these commands The common commands begin with an asterisk character Table 2 26 Miscellaneous Commands Command Description AUTOSet Sets the vertical horizontal and trigger controls to provide a stable display of the selected waveform CLEARMenu Clears the current menu from the display DATE Sets or returns the date displayed by the oscilloscope DDT Sets or returns the commands that will be executed by the group execute trigger FPAnel PRESS Simulates the action of pressing a specified front panel button FPAnel TURN Duplicates the action of turning a specified front panel control knob GPIBUsb ADDress Returns the current GPIB address GPIBUsb ID Returns the identification string of the connected adaptor module and firmware version HEADer Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual MSO Command Group Command Groups Table 2 26 Miscellaneous Commands cont Command Description ID Returns identifying information about the oscilloscope and its firmware IDN Returns the same information as the ID command except the data is formatted according to Tektronix Codes a
145. 9 and 11 through 32 decimal m The oscilloscope ignores commands consisting of any combination of white space characters and line feeds Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 3 Command Syntax 2 4 Abbreviating Concatenating You can abbreviate many oscilloscope commands Each command in this documentation shows the minimum acceptable abbreviations in capitals For example you can enter the command ACQuire NUMAvg simply as ACQ NUMA or acq numa Abbreviation rules may change over time as new oscilloscope models are introduced Thus for the most robust code use the full spelling If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included as part of query responses you can further control whether the returned headers are abbreviated or are full length with the VERBose command You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries using a semicolon The oscilloscope executes concatenated commands in the order received When concatenating commands and queries you must follow these rules 1 Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the beginning colon on all commands except the first one For example the commands TRIGger MODe NORMal and ACQuire NUMAVg 8 be concatenated into the following single command TRIGger MODe NORMal ACQuire NUMAVg 8 2 Ifconcatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last mnemonic you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate the be
146. A PULse CLAss Sets or returns the type of pulse on which to trigger TRIGger A PULSEWIDth Returns the trigger A pulse width parameters TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Sets or returns the criteria for width specification of pulse width trigger events TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth Sets or returns the width setting for the pulse width trigger TRIGger A RUNT Returns the current runt pulse trigger logic parameters TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn Sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it uncovers a runt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Sets or returns the minimum width for A pulse runt trigger TRIGger A SETHold Returns settings for setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A SETHold CLOCK Returns clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input for setup hold triggering TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk EDGE Sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns the clock source for the A logic trigger setup and hold input TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THRes
147. A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 0 0E 0 indicating the channel 1 threshold is set to 0 0 volts TRIGger A SETHold THReshold D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments 2 352 Sets the Threshold for the Selected Digital Channel Affects all trigger types using the Digital Channel MSO TRIGger A SETHold THReshold D lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A SETHOld THReshold D x NR3 specifies the threshold voltage in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D1 ECL sets the threshold to ECL levels TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D1 might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D1 1 3000 indicating the threshold is set to 1 3 volts TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns transition time trigger parameters Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal 1 TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt TRIGger A LO Werthreshold CH x TRIGGER A TRAnSITION might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN SLOWER DELTATIME 8 0000E 9 TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transition value for the transition trigger Trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj DELTatime lt
148. A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE SCANRATE15K TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 1 HDTV FORMAT HD1080160 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom FORMat TYPE Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the video trigger format Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSToOmMI FORMat TYPE INTERLACed PROGressive TRIGger A VIDeo CUSToOM FORMat TYPE INTERLAced argument sets the format for interlaced video lines PROGressive argument sets the format for progressive video lines TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE sets the custom format for the A video trigger to progressive lines TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT INTERLACED indicating that interlaced is selected as the custom format for the A video trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 357 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom LINEPeriod Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or queries the line period for the standard under test Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm LINEPeriod lt NR3 gt TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm LINEPeriod NR3 is the custom video line period TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM LINEPERIOD 50 5E 6 sets the video line per
149. A applications use SESR bit 6 to respond to any of several events including some front panel actions 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE OPC Figure 3 1 The Standard Event Status Register SESR Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 1 Status and Events 3 2 Table 3 1 SESR Bit Functions Bit Function 7 MSB PON Power On Shows that the oscilloscope was powered on On completion the diagnostic self tests also set this bit 6 URQ User Request Indicates that an application event has occurred See note 5 CME Command Error Shows that an error occurred while the oscilloscope was parsing a command or query 4 EXE Execution Error Shows that an error executing a command or query 3 DDE Device Error Shows that a device error occurred 2 QYE Query Error Either an attempt was made to read the Output Queue when no data was present or pending or that data in the Output Queue was lost 1 RQC Request Control This is not used 0 LSB OPC Operation Complete Shows that the operation is complete This bit is set when all pending operations complete following an command The Status Byte Register SBR Records whether output is available in the Output Queue whether the oscilloscope requests service and whether the SESR has recorded any events Use a Serial Poll or the STB query to read the contents of the SBR The bits in
150. ARALLEL BIT15 SOURCE D15 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT16 SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT17 SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT2 SOURCE D2 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT3 SOURCE D3 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT4 SOURCE D4 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT5 SOURCE D5 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT6 SOURCE D6 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT7 SOURCE D7 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT8 SOURCE D8 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT9 SOURCE D9 BUS B1 PARALLEL CLOCK EDGE RISING BUS B1 PARALLEL CLOCK ISCLOCKED NO BUS B1 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 PARALLEL WIDTH 16 BUS B1 POSITION 0 00E 00 BUS B1 RS232C BITRATE 9600 BUS B1 RS232C DATABITS 8 BUS B1 RS232C DELIMITER LF BUS B1 RS232C DISPLAYMODE FRAME BUS B1 RS232C PARITY NONE BUS B1 RS232C POLARITY NORMAL BUS B1 RS232C RX SOURCE OFF BUS B1 RS232C TX SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 SPI BITORDER MSB BUS B1 SPI CLOCK POLARITY RISE C 2 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value BUS B1 SPI CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 SPI DATA IN POLARITY HIGH BUS B1 SPI DATA IN SOURCE OFF BUS B1 SPI DATA OUT POLARITY HIGH BUS B1 SPI DATA OUT SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 8 BUS B1 SPI FRAMING SS BUS B1 SPI IDLETIME 1 00E 07 BUS B1 SPI SELECT POLARITY LOW BUS B1 SPI SELECT SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 STATE 0 BUS B1 TYPE PARALLEL BUS B2 CAN BITRATE 500000 BUS B2 CAN PROBE CANH BUS B2 CAN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B2 CAN SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 DISPLAY FORMAT HE
151. ARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS BL FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the cycle count qualifier is set to EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue Group Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count low value Search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 243 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CYCLECOunt VALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CYCLECOunt VALue Qstring is a quoted string that is the binary cycle count value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE 110010 sets the cycle count value to 110010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX indicating the cycle count value is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the high binary data string used for FLEXRAY trigger if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa HIVALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue Qstr
152. ARCHT1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C ADDRESS TYPE USER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C CONDITION START SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 12C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA SIZE 1 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 PARALLEL VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA MISO VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA MOSI
153. ARallel CLOCK ISCLOCKed 2 80 BUS B lt x gt PARallel CLOCK SOUrece 2 81 BUS B lt x gt PARallel WIDth 2 81 BUS B lt x gt POSition 2 81 BUS B lt x gt RS232C BITRate 2 82 BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits 2 82 BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter 2 83 BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode 2 83 BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity 2 84 BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity 2 84 BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX SOUrce 2 84 BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX SOUrce 2 85 BUS B lt x gt SPI BITOrder 2 85 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA SIZe 2 88 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity 2 86 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce 2 87 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity 2 87 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce 2 88 BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING 2 88 BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime 2 89 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK POLARity 2 86 BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce 2 86 BUS B x SPI SELect SS POLARity 2 89 BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce 2 90 BUS B lt x gt STATE 2 90 BUS B lt x gt TYPE 2 90 BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt 2 91 BUS THReshold CH lt x gt 2 91 Index 1 Index BUS THReshold D lt x gt 2 92 BUS UPPerthreshold CH x 2 92 BUSY 2 93 C CAL 2 94 CALibrate FACtory STATus 2 94 CALibrate INTERNal STARt 2 95 CALibrate INTERNal STATus 2 95 CALibrate RESults FACtory 2 96 CALibrate RESults SPC 2 96 CALibrate INTERNal 2 94 CALibrate RESults 2 96 Calibration and Diagnostic Command Group
154. ASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This technique is efficient but requires sophisticated programming Using the OPC Query OPC query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation that generates an OPC message is complete A time out could occur if you try to read the output queue before there is any data in it The same command sequence using the OPC query for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 ON HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 11 Status and Events 3 12 Messages No Event Command Error Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC Wait for read from Output Queue Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This is the simplest approach It requires no status handling or loops However you must set the controller time out for longer than the acquisition operation The information contained in the topic tabs above covers all the programming interface messages the oscilloscope generates in response to commands and queries For most messages a secondary message from the oscilloscope gives detail about the cause of the error or the meaning of the message Th
155. AY CYCLECOUNT VALUE 11001101 sets the cycle count value to 11001101 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX indicating the cycle count value is don t care Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the high binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa HIVALue lt QString gt TRIGger BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the FLEXRAY binary data high value TRIGGER 1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE 11001101XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX1 sets the binary data string high value to 11001101XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXXX1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the binary data string high value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the offset of the data string in bytes to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa
156. BUS B1 SPI FRAMING IDELTIME might return BUS BL SPI FRAMING IDELTIME indicating the SPI framing type is set to IDLETIME BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the SPI bus idle time in seconds for the specified bus Bus BUS B x SPI IDLETime lt NR3 gt BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime NR3 is the SPI bus idle time in seconds BUS BL SPI IDLETIME 100 0000E 9 sets the idle time to 100 ns BUS B1 SPI IDLETIME might return BUS BL SPI IDLETIME 100 0000E 9 indicating the idle time is set to 100 ns BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the SPI SS polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity LOW HIGH BUS B x SPI SELect SS POLARi ty LOW specifies an active low polarity HIGH specifies an active high polarity Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 89 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments BUS B lt x gt STATE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments BUS B lt x gt TYPE Group Syntax 2 90 Sets or returns the SPI SS source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce CH1
157. CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for the CAN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CY CLEcount HIVALue Sets or returns the trigger condition for FLEXRAY Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count high value TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount QUALiIfier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count low value TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue Sets or returns the high binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFF Set Sets or returns the offset of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUALIifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa S Ze Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue Sets or returns the low binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger condition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE Sets or returns the end of file type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTY PE Sets or returns the error type Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 39 Command Groups 2 40 Table 2 30 Trigger Commands cont
158. CH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn MORELimit NR3 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn MOREL imi t lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum amount of time to hold the pattern true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the channel threshold level for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold MATH Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the math waveform threshold level for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC THReshold MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 273 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the reference waveform threshold level for a logic trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt
159. CURSor VBArs UNIts x specifies the cursor Valid values are 1 and 2 lt NR3 gt indicates the value of one of the tics The units are specified by the CURSor VBArs UNIts command CURSOr VBArs HPOS2 might return CURSOR VBARS HPOS2 100E 3 indicating the value of one vertical bar tick CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt Group Sets or returns the horizontal position for the specified vertical bar cursor The cursor is specified by lt x gt which can be or 2 Values are with respect to trigger position or the zero reference point for the designated waveform if horizontal units are not set to time Use the CURSor VBArs UNIts command to specify units Cursor Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 115 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns Examples CURSor VBArs UNIts Group Syntax Arguments Returns Examples 2 116 CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt CURSOr VBArs POSITION lt x gt CURSor VBArs UNIts lt NR3 gt specifies the cursor position A floating point value with an exponent CURSOr VBArs POSITION2 9 00E 6 positions the cursor2 vertical bar cursor at 9 ms CURSor VBArs POSITION1 this command might return CURSOR VBARS POSITION1 1 0000E 06 indicating that the cursor vertical bar is positioned at 1 us Sets or returns the units for the vertical bar cursors Cursor CURSOr VBArs UNIts SEConds HERtz DEGrees PERcen
160. Cdg Sets or returns the reference waveform for storing waveform data sent to the oscilloscope Sets or returns the format of outgoing waveform data DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the location of waveform data transferred from the oscilloscope DATa STARt Sets or returns the starting point in waveform transfer DATa STOP Sets or returns the ending data point in waveform transfer WAVFrm Returns a branch query containing waveform data in either binary or ASCII format waveform formatting data and the location of the waveform data source WFMInpre Returns the waveform formatting specification to be applied to the next incoming CURVE command data Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 53 Command Groups 2 54 Table 2 33 Waveform Transfer Commands cont Command Description WFMiInpre BIT Nr Sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform point for the incoming waveform WFMiInpre BN Sets or returns the format of binary data for the incoming waveform WFMInpre BYT Nr Sets or returns the data width for the incoming waveform WFMInpre BYT Or Sets or returns the byte order of waveform points for the incoming waveform WFMinpre ENCdg Sets or retums the type of encoding for incoming waveform data WFMiInpre NR Pt Sets or returns the number of points in the incoming waveform record WFMiInpre PT Sets or returns the point f
161. DE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC while serial poll 0 keep looping Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Service Request Method Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER and the Event Status Enable Register ESER using the DESE and ESE commands You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request Enable Register SRER using the SRE command When the operation is complete the oscilloscope will generate a Service Request The same command sequence using the OPC command for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Enable the status registers DESE 1 ESE 1 SRE 32 Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH1 Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement OPC The program can now do different tasks such as talk to other devices The SRQ when it comes interrupts those tasks and returns control to this task Take amplitude measurement ME
162. DPO4COMP application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe NRI is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger if the trigger condition involves RX Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue lt Qstring gt is the binary data string to be used for the trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe Conditions Group 2 322 Sets or returns the length of the data string for a RS232 trigger if the trigger condition is TXDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires DPO4COMP application module Trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B X RS232C TX DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B x RS232C TX DATa SIZe NRI is the length of the data string in Bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger if the condition involves TX Applies to bus x where x is the bus number
163. E100K RATE125K RATE250K RATE500K 8 RATELM BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate lt NR1 gt is the bit rate The instrument supports bit rates at 10 bps intervals You can enter any positive integer and the instrument will coerce the value to the closest supported bit rate The query always returns the numerical bit rate value bus bl can bitrate rate400k sets the CAN bit rate to 400K bus bl can bitrate might return BUS BL CAN BITRATE RATE800K indicating the bit rate is set to 800K BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the probing method to probe CAN bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Bus BUS B lt x gt CAN PRObe CANH CANL RX TX DIFFerential BUS B x CAN PRObe CANH specifies the single ended CANH signal as specified by the CAN standard CANL specifies the single ended CANL signal as specified by the CAN standard Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 71 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RX specifies the receive signal on the bus side of the CAN transceiver TX specifies the transmit signal DIFFerential specifies the differential CAN signal BUS B lt x gt CAN SAMPLEpoint Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the sampling point during each bit period for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application
164. EFORM might return DISPLAY INTEnSITY WAVEFORM 60 as the intensity of the waveforms Sets or returns the display persistence This affects the display only Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 137 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples NOTE When Persistence is set to Infinite it does not mean that the brightness of any pixel should never decrease The brightness of a pixel is proportionally dependent on the ratio between its intensity which does NOT decrease at Infinite Persistence and the maximum value of intensity of any pixel on the screen If a particular pixel get hit less often than others its brightness will decrease over time It will become less bright relative to the pixels that get hit often Display DISplay PERSistence lt NR3 gt CLEAR AUTO MINImum DISplay PERSistence lt NR3 gt specifies the time of the persistence CLEAR resets the persist time count down and clears the display of acquired points INFInite displays waveform points until a control change resets the acquisition system When persistence is set to infinite it does not mean that the brightness of any pixel should never decrease The brightness of a pixel is proportionally dependent on the ratio between its intensity which does NOT decrease at infinite persistence and the maximum value of intensity of any pixel on the screen Thus if a particular pixel gets hit less often tha
165. ENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 185 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement IMMed DELay DlRection Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines the delay to edge when taking an immediate delay measurement NOTE Use the MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 command to specify the delay to waveform Measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIRection BACKWards FORWards MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIRection MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 BACKWards starts the search at the end of the waveform and looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform FORWards starts the search at the beginning of the waveform and looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS starts searching from the beginning of the waveform record and looks for the first rising or falling edge MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating that searching begins at the end of the waveform record and looks for the last rising or falling edge MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt Group Syntax 2 186 Sets or returns the slope of the edge the oscilloscope uses for the delay from or to waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement Measurement MEASUreme
166. ER A LOGIC INPUT D8 X TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D9 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD DO 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D1 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D10 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D 11 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D12 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D13 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D14 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D15 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D2 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D3 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D4 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D5 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D6 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D7 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D8 1 4 TRIGGER A LOGIC THRESHOLD D9 1 4 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD DO 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D10 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D11 1 4 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual C 29 Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D12 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D13 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D14 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D15 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D2 14 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD
167. ER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 HIGH CH2 LOW CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSTHAN WHEN LESSLIMIT 16 0000E 9 LIMIT 16 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME 16 0000E 9 TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern DELTatime Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the pattern trigger delta time value The time value is used as part of the pattern trigger condition to determine if the duration of a logic pattern meets the specified time constraints Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern DELTatime NR3 TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern DELTatime NR3 is a floating point value with exponent that sets the pattern trigger time value This argument has a range of 39 6 9 39 6 ns to 10 0 0 10 s in increments of 13 2 ns Values that are not an increment of 13 2 ns are rounded to the nearest correct value TRIGGER PATTERN 71 28 8 sets the pattern trigger delta time value to 712 8 ns TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D lt x gt Group Syntax Sets or returns the A logic trigger input for the specified digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number This command species the logic value used when the pattern trigger detects the threshold level Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut D x HIGH LOW xX TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPUt D lt X gt Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 335 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments HIGH specifies a logic high LO
168. ERTICAL POSITION might return MATH1 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3000 00 indicating that the current position of Math 1 is 1 3 divisions below the center graticule MATH 1 VERTical SCAle Group Syntax Sets or returns the vertical scale of the currently selected math type Math MATH 1 VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt MATH 1 VERTical SCAle Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 181 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples CH lt x gt SCAle REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt is the scale per division in the current math vertical units The range is from 1 0E 12 through 500 0E 12 MATH1 VERTICAL SCALE 100E 03 sets the Math scale to 100 mV per division MATH VERTICAL SCALE might return MATH VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 00 indicating that the current scale setting of Math is 1 V per division MATH 1 VERTical UNIts Returns the math waveform vertical measurement unit value Group Math Syntax MATH 1 VERTical UNIts Examples MATH VERTICAL UNITS might return MATH VERTICAL UNITS joules indicating that the math vertical unit label for unknown values is joules MATHVAR Query Only Queries both numerical values you can use within math expressions Group Math Syntax MATHVAR Related Commands Returns Examples 2 182 lt gt MATH 1 DEFine NR3 are the stored numerical values MATHVAR returns the values of all varia
169. FFT or non live math reference waveforms Math MATH 1 HORizontal POSition lt NR3 gt MATH 1 HORizontal POSition NR3 is the of the math waveform that precedes center screen It can vary from 0 0 to 100 0 MATH HORIZONTAL POSITION 10 sets the horizontal position to 10 pretrigger MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle 2 178 Group Sets or returns the math horizontal display scale for FFT or for dual math waveforms that have source waveforms that are reference waveforms The horizontal scale of a dual math waveform with a channel source waveform is set through the HORizontal SCAle command Math Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle NR3 MATH 1 HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt is the math horizontal scale in seconds HORIZONTAL SCALE might return MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE 2 0E 4 indicating that the math horizontal scale is 200 u MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts Group Syntax Examples Returns the math waveform horizontal measurement unit value Math MATH 1 HORizontal UNIts HORIZONTAL UNITS might return MATH HORIZONTAL UNITS indicating that the math horizontal unit label for unknown values is the default question mark unit MATH 1 SPECTral MAG Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the units of the Spectral Magnification function in the math string
170. FMInpre PT is set to Y It is the number of min max pairs if WFMInpre PT is set to ENV WFMINPRE NR PT 10000 specifies that 10000 data points will be expected WFMINPRE NR might return WFMINPRE NR PT 10000 indicating that there are 10000 data points in the expected incoming waveform record Sets or returns the point format of the incoming waveform data Regardless of the argument used the scale offset and so on are interpreted similarly When ENV is used waveform data is interpreted over the min max pair when Y is used it is interpreted over a single point Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 381 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre PT Off Group Syntax Arguments 2 382 Waveform Transfer WFMInpre PT Fmt WFMInpre PT Fmt WFMoOutpre PT Fmt ENV specifies that the waveform is transmitted in envelope mode as maximum and minimum point pairs Only Y values are explicitly transmitted Absolute coordinates are given by Xn XZEro XINcr n PT Off Ynmax YZEro YMUIt ynmax YOFf Ynmin YZEro YMUIt ynmin Y specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data point is transmitted for each point in the waveform record Only Y values are explicitly transmitted Absolute coordinates are given by Xn XZEro XINcr n PT Off Yn YZEro YMUIt yn YOFf WFMINPRE PT F
171. GGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C ADDRESS TYPE USER TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C CONDITION START TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 12C DATA START 0 00E 00 C 22 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 PARALLEL VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B1 R
172. Gger A BUS Group Syntax Examples Queries the SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS settings Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS BA SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA MOSI VALUE XX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns the search condition for a CAN trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH xX TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDi tion SOF FRAMEtype IDentifier DATA IDANDDATA EOF ACKMISS SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt CAN CONDi tion Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 237 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments SOF specifies a search based on the start of frame FRAMEtype specifies a search based on the frame type IDentifier specifies a search based on the frame identifier DATA specifies a search based on the frame data IDANDDATA specifies a search based on the frame identifier and data EOF specifies a search base on the en
173. Gger A RUNT WIDth within 5 tolerance NOTEQual argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with width greater than or less than but not equal to the time period specified in TRIGger A RUNT WIDth within a 5 tolerance TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN THAN sets the runt trigger to occur when the oscilloscope detects a runt in a pulse wider than the specified width TRIGGER A RUNT WHEN might return TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WHEN OCCURS indicating that a runt trigger will occur if the oscilloscope detects a runt of any detectable width TRIGger A RUNT WIDth 2 346 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the width for a runt trigger Trigger TRIGger A RUNT WIDth lt NR3 gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth TRIGger A RUNT WHEn NR3 specifies the minimum width in seconds TRIGGER A RUNT WIDTH 15E 6 sets the minimum width of the pulse runt trigger to 15 us TRIGGER A RUNT WIDTH might return TRIGGER A PULSE RUNT WIDTH 2 0000E 09 indicating that the minimum width of a pulse runt trigger 1s 2 ns Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A SETHold Query Only Returns the clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input data voltage threshold and source and both setup and hold times for setup and hold violation triggering Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A SETHold Examples TRIGGER A SETHOLD m
174. HANNEL might return BUS B1 FLEXRAY CHANNEL indicating that FLEXRAY 14 format 18 channel BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SIGnal 2 74 Sets or returns the FLEXRAY standard Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Bus BUS B x FLEXray SIGnal BDIFFBP BM TXRX BUS B x FLEXray SIGnal BDIFFBP sets the FLEXRAY standard to BDIFFBP BM sets the FLEXRAY standard to BM TXRX sets the FLEXRAY standard to TXRX BUS BL FLEXRAY SIGNAL BM sets the FLEXRAY standard is BM BUS B1 FLEXRAY SIGNAL might return BUS B1 FLEXRAY SIGNAL BDIFFBP indicating the FLEXRAY standard is BDIFFBP BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data source Bus BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SoOurce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9I D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D BUS B lt x gt FLEXray Source CH lt x gt sets the FLEXRAY source to channel x where x is 1 to 4 D lt x gt sets the FLEXRAY source to digital channel x where x is 1 to 16 1 SOURCE CH4 sets the FLEXRAY source to channel 4 BUS B1 FLEXRAY SOURCE might return BUS B1 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 indicating the FLEXRAY source is channel 1 BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess RWINClude Group Sets and returns whether the read write bit is included in the address Bus Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 75 C
175. I RP WFMInpre BN Fmt WFMoOutpre BN RI specifies signed integer data point representation RP specifies positive integer data point representation WFMINPRE BN FMT RP specifies positive integer data point representation WFMINPRE BN FMT might return WFMINPRE BN_FMT RI indicating that the incoming data is currently interpreted as signed integers Sets or returns the data width for the incoming waveform Changing the value of WFMlInpre BYT Nr also changes the value of WFMInpre BIT Nr Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BYT Nr lt NR1 gt WFMInpre BYT Nr WFMiInpre BIT Nr 2 379 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples WFMinpre BYT Or Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre ENCdg Group Syntax 2 380 lt NR1 gt is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1 or 2 WFMINPRE BYT NR 1 sets the number of bytes per incoming waveform data point to 1 which is the default setting WFMINPRE BYT NR might return WFMINPRE BYT NR 2 indicating that there are 2 bytes per incoming waveform data point Sets or returns which byte of binary waveform data is expected first for incoming waveform data when data points require than one byte This specification only has meaning when WFMInpre ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre BYT Nr is 2 Waveform Transfer WFMInpre BYT Or LSB MSB WFMInpre BYT Or WFMInpre ENCdg WFMInpre BYT Nr WFMOutpre BYT Or LSB speci
176. IAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes lt NR1 gt DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes Arguments NRI is the number of self test loops Examples DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES 3 sets the self test loop to run three times DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES might return DIAG LOOP OPTION NTIMES 5 indicating the self test loop is set to run five times DIAg LOOP STOP No Query Form Stops the self test at the end of the current loop Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax DIAg LOOP STOP Examples DIAG LOOP STOP stops the self test at the end of the current loop DIAg RESUIt FLAg Query Only Returns the pass fail status from the last self test sequence execution Use this query to determine which test s has failed Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax DIAg RESUlt FLAg Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 131 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Returns Examples DIAg RESUIt LOG PASS indicates that all of the selected self diagnostic tests have passed FAIL indicates that at least one of the selected self diagnostic tests has failed DIAG RESULT FLAG returns either DIAG RESULT FLAG PASS or FAIL DIAg RESUIt LOG Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Returns the internal results log from the last self test sequence execution The list contains all modules and module interfaces that were tested along with the pass fail status of each Calibration and Diagnostic
177. IER VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 PARALLEL VALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI CONDITION SS SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA MISO VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA MOSI VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL
178. IGGER A LOGIC INPUT D13 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D14 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D15 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D2 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D3 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D4 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D5 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D6 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D7 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D8 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT D9 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT MATH SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT REF 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT REF2 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH2 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT DO SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D10 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D11 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D12 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D13 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D14 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D15 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D2 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D3 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT D4 gt lt 2 lt DK lt 2 lt OK OK DX OK OK DX OK OK lt OK OK OK OK OK lt DX OK PX OK OK PX PX OK OK OK OK 0X
179. IGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGger A PULse SETLevel sets the A trigger level to 50 of the range of the minimum maximum values of the trigger input signal TRIGGER A SETLEVEL sets the A trigger level to 50 of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal TRIGGER A might return a long response with A trigger parameters some of which could be as follows TRIGGER A MODE AUTO EDGE LEVEL 20 0000E 3 LEVEL CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 1 4000 CH2 800 0000E 3 CH3 8 00 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 cH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 20 0000E 9 TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CH1 X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 0000E 9 MO RELIMIT 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 20 000 OE 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 THRESHOLD 0 0000 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLD TIME 4 0000 9 SETTIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS TRANSITION TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN LESSTHAN WIDTH 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN Tektronix 4
180. II or binary format You specify the format with the DATa ENCdg command ASCII Data ASCII data is represented by signed integer values The range of the values depends on the byte width specified One byte wide data ranges from 128 to 127 Two byte wide data ranges from 32768 to 32767 Each data value requires two to seven characters This includes one to five characters to represent the value another character if the value is negative to represent a minus sign and a comma to separate the data points An example ASCII waveform data string may look like this CURVE space 110 109 110 110 109 107 109 107 106 105 103 100 97 90 84 80 NOTE You can use ASCII to obtain a readable and easier to format output than binary However the oscilloscope may require bytes to send the same values with ASCII than with binary reducing transmission speed The use of ASCII for waveform data transfer is inefficient ASCII formatted Waveform WAVFRM and Curve CURVE queries exceeding 1 M points are not supported Binary Data Binary data is represented by signed integer or positive integer values The range of the values depends on the byte width specified When the byte width is one signed integer data ranges from 128 to 127 and positive integer values range from 0 to 255 When the byte width is two the values range from 32768 to 32767 and positive integer values range from 0 to 65 535 Table 2 32 Binary data ra
181. Ic INPut Query Only 2 332 Group Syntax Returns the logic input values for all channels If a clock channel is defined it returns the clock source and edge Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT HIGH CH2 X CH3 X indicating that a logic high is expected on channel 1 while channel 2 and channel three are don t care TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the logical input condition for the channel specified by lt x gt Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH lt x gt HIGH LOW X 3 TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CH x HIGH specifies the logic high LOW specifies the logic low X specifies a don t care state TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH1 might return TRIGGER LOGIC INPUT X indicating that the setting for the A logic trigger input to channel 1 does not matter TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CH2 HIGH sets the A logic trigger input to logic HIGH for channel 2 TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE Group Syntax Arguments Sets the polarity of the clock channel Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCK EDGE RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal
182. K POLARity Sets or returns the SPI SCLK polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI SCLK source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity Sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI MISO source Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 15 Bus Commands cont Commands Command Groups Description BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity Sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI MOSI source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA SIZe Sets or returns the number of bits per word for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt SPI FRAMING Sets or returns the SPI framing type BUS B lt x gt SPI IDLETime Sets or returns the SPI bus idle time in seconds for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS POLARity Sets or returns the SPI SS polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI SELect SS SOUrce Sets or returns the SPI SS source BUS B lt x gt STATE Turns the specified bus on and off BUS B lt x gt TYPE Sets or returns the specified bus type BUS LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the lower threshold for each channel BUS THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the threshold for a channel BUS THReshold D lt x gt Sets or returns the threshold for a digital channel BUS UPPerthreshold CH
183. LD DATA SOURCE CH1 sets channel 1 as the data source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE might return TRIGGER SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the current data source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold 2 350 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld DATa THReshold lt NR3 gt TTL TRIGger A SETHOld DATa THReshold TTL specifies the preset TTL high level of 1 4 V NR3 is the setup and hold data level in V Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset high level of 1 4 V as the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA THRESHOLD 1 2000E 00 indicating that 1 2 V is the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the hold time for setup and hold violation triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld HOLDTime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A SETHOld HOLDTime lt NR3 gt specifies the hold time setting in seconds Positive values for hold time occur after the clock edge Negative values occur before the clock edge TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 3 0E 3 s
184. MT ENV sets the incoming waveform data point format to enveloped WFMINPRE PT FMT might return WFMINPRE PT FMT ENV indicating that the waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum point pairs The set form of this command is ignored The query form always returns a 0 This command is listed for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes Waveform Transfer WFMInpre PT Off lt NR1 gt WFMInpre PT Off Arguments are ignored Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual WFMinpre XINcr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre XUNit Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the horizontal interval between incoming waveform points in units specified by WFMInpre XUNIt Waveform Transfer WFMInpre XINCr lt NR3 gt WFMInpre XINcr WFMInpre XUNit WFMOutpre XINcr NR3 is the horizontal interval representation WFMINPRE XINCR 3E 3 sets the interval between incoming waveform points to 3 ms WFMINPRE XINCR might return WFMINPRE XINCR 1 0000E 3 indicating that if WFMInpre XUNit is set to s there is a I ms interval between incoming waveform points Sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform Supported units are 96 Hz A A A A V A dB A s AA AW AdB As Hz IRE S s V V A V V V W V dB V s VV VW VdB Volts Vs W W A W V W W W dB W s WA WV WW WdB Ws dB dB A
185. Math MATH 1 SPECTral MAG LINEAr DB 1 SPECTral MAG LINEAR sets the SpectralMag units to linear DB sets the SpectralMag units to decibels MATH1L SPECTRAL DB sets the SpectralMag units for Math1 to decibels MATH1 SPECTRAL MAG might return 1 SPECTRAL MAG DB indicating that the SpectralMag units for Mathl are set to decibels Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 179 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH 1 SPECTral WINdow Group Syntax Arguments Examples MATH 1 TYPe 2 180 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the window function for the spectral analyzer input data for the specified math waveform A spectral window determines what the filter shape of the spectral analyzer will be in the frequency domain It can be described by a mathematical function that is multiplied point by point times the input data to the spectral analyzer Math 1 SPECTral WINdow RECTangular HAMming HANning BLAckmanharris 1 SPECTral WINdow RECTangu lar window function is equivalent to multiplying all gate data by one HAMming window function is based on a cosine series HANning window function is based on a cosine series BLAckmanharris window function is based on a cosine series 1 SPECTRAL WINDOW HANNING applies a Hanning window to the spectral analyzer input data MATH1 SPECTRAL WINDOW might return MATH1 SPECTRAL WINDO
186. Measurement MEASUrement IMMed VALUE MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce ESR ALLEv MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE might return MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE 9 9000E 37 If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order then an item is added to the error queue The error can be checked for with the ESR and ALLEv commands MEASUrement INDICators Query Only Returns all measurement indicator parameters Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement INDICators Examples MEASUREMENT INDICATORS might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE MEAS1 NUMHORZ 0 4 HORZ1 7 5E0 HORZ2 3 400000095367 0 23 0 0E0 HORZ4 0 0E0 VERT1 6 351123E 6 VERT2 3 179753E 6 VERT3 6 40943E 6 VERT4 6 403E 6 MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt Query Only Returns the position of the specified horizontal measurement indicator x where x be 1 2 3 or 4 Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement INDICators HORZ x Examples MEASUREMENT INDICATORS HORZ1 might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS HORZ1 2 0E 3 indicating that horizontal indicator has a value of 2mV MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ Query Only Returns the number of horizontal measurement indicators currently being displayed Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 193
187. NDDATA SEARCH x is the search number and B x is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess VALue bin SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt I2C ADDRess VALue bin is the address in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C CONDition Conditions Group 2 254 Sets or returns the search condition for an I2C trigger search SEARCH lt X gt Is the search number and lt gt is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x I2C CONDi tion STARt STOP REPEATStart ACKMISS ADDRess DATA ADDRANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt I2C CONDi tion STARt specifies a search based on a start condition STOP specifies a search based on a stop condition REPEATstart specifies a search based on a repeat of start condition ACKMISS specifies a search based on a missing acknowledgement condition ADDRess specifies a search based on an address DATA specifies a search based on a data condition ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on an address and data condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa DiRection Conditions Group Syntax Arguments
188. NDPacket specifies a search based on the RX End of Packet condition TXSTArt specifies a search base on the TX Start Bit TXDATA specifies a search based on TX Data TXENDPacket specifies a search based on the TX End of Packet condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string for a RS232 trigger search if the trigger condition is RX SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS lt gt 5232 RX DATa SIZe SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe NRI is the length of the data string in Bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger search if the condition involves RX SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x RS232C RX DATa VALue Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 261 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe Conditions Group
189. NSITY BACKLIGHT HIGH DISPLAY INTENSITY GRATICULE 75 DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM 35 DISPLAY PERSIS TENCE 0 00E 00 DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 0 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual C 9 Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value HARDCOPY INKSAVER 1 HARDCOPY LAYOUT LANDSCAPE HARDCOPY PREVIEW 0 HEADER 1 HORIZONTAL DELAY MODE 1 HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME 0 00E 00 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 10000 HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 00E 06 LOCK NONE MATH DEFINE CH1 CH2 MATH HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 MATH HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 00E 06 MATH HORIZONTAL UNITS S MATH LABEL MATH SPECTRAL MAG DB MATH SPECTRAL WINDOW HANNING MATH TYPE DUAL MATH VERTICAL POSITION 0 00E 00 MATH VERTICAL SCALE 1 00E 01 MATH VERTICAL UNITS V MATHVAR VAR1 0 00E 00 MATHVAR VAR2 0 00E 00 MEASUREMENT GATING SCREEN MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE 1 RISE MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE OFF MEASUREMENT MEAS 1 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE 0 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appe
190. NTS COUNt Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 367 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B LEVel Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B EVENTS lt NR1 gt is the number of B trigger events which can range from 1 to 10 000 000 TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 4 specifies that the B trigger will occur four trigger events after the trigger TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT might return TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 2 indicating that two events must occur after the A trigger before the B trigger can occur Sets or returns the level for the B trigger Trigger TRIGger B LEVel TTL lt 3 gt TRIGger B LEVel TRIGger A LEVel TRIGger B TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V NR3 is the B trigger level in volts TRIGGER B LEVEL TTL sets the B trigger level to 1 4 V TRIGGER B LEVEL might return TRIGGER B LEVEL 173 0000E 03 indicating that the B trigger level is currently set at 173 mV TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt Group Syntax 2 368 Sets or returns the B trigger level for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Each Channel can have an independent Level Trigger TRIGger B LEVel CH x ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples TRIGger B LEVel D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Commands Li
191. OM tests the system read only memory Examples DIAG SELECT CPU sets the oscilloscope to run just CPU tests DIAg STATE No Query Form This command starts or stops the oscilloscope self test Depending on the argument self test capabilities are either turned on or off Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 133 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax DIAg STATE EXECute ABORt Arguments X EXECute starts diagnostics ABORt stops diagnostics at the end of the current loop Examples DIAG STATE EXECute starts diagnostics DISplay Query Only Returns the current display settings Group Display Syntax DISplay DISplay CLOCK Sets or returns whether the oscilloscope displays the date and time The query form of this command returns an ON 1 or an OFF 0 Group Display Syntax DISplay CLOCk ON OFF lt NR1 gt DISplay CLOCk Related Commands DATE TIME Arguments enables the display of date and time OFF disables the display of date and time lt NR1 gt 0 disables the display of date and time any other value enables the display of date and time 2 134 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples DISPLAY CLOCK ON enables display of date and time DISPLAY CLOCK might return DISPLAY CLOCK 1 indicating that the display of date and time is currently enabled DISplay DIGital HEIght Sets or returns
192. OPy SEARCHtotrigger TRIGgertosearch SEARCHtotrigger copies the search criteria to the trigger TRIGgertosearch copies the trigger criteria to the search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE Group Syntax Arguments Sets the search state to on or off lt x gt is the search number which is always 1 The query form returns the search state Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON SEARCH SEARCH X STATE OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 sets the search state to off ON or NR1 Z 0 sets the search state to on SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TOTAL Query Only Group Syntax Returns Returns the total number of matches for the search The total number of matches may be than the number of marks placed x is the search number which is always 1 Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TOTAL lt NR1 gt is the total number of matches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Query Only Conditions 2 236 Returns the serial search type x is the search number which is always 1 There are four serial buses B1 through B4 This command requires DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Returns Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS I2C specifies the Inter IC bus SPI specifies the Serial Peripheral Interface bus CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRI
193. Om Returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display Zoom MODel STATE Sets or returns the zoom mode Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 55 Command Groups Table 2 34 Zoom Commands cont Command Description ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt Returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor Returns the zoom factor of a particular zoom box ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the horizontal zoom position for the specified waveform in the specified Zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal zoom scale of the specified waveform in the specified zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the horizontal zoom position for the specified waveform in the specified Zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal zoom scale of the specified waveform in the specified zoom ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt STATE Specifies or returns a trace as zoomed on or off 2 56 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands ACQuire MAGnivu Group Syntax Arguments Returns the following current acquisition parameters B Stop after Acquisition state Mode Number of averages Sampling mode Acquisition ACQuire ACQuire MODe ACQuire NUMACq ACQuire NUMAV
194. Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the delay measurement parameters for the measurement specified by lt x gt which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay MEASUREMENT MEAS1 might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 196 Sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines the delay to edge when taking a delay measurement Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 command to specify the waveform Measurement MEASUrement MEAS x DELay DIRection BACKwards FORWards MEASUrement MEAS x DELay DIRection MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 BACKwards means the search starts at the end of the waveform and looks for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt command to specify the slope of the edge FORWards means the search starts at the beginning of the waveform and looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform Use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt command to specify the slope of the edge MEASUREMENT 53 DIRECTION BACKWARDS starts searching from the end of the waveform record Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION mig
195. Order SETUP x TIME Query Only Group Syntax Examples SRE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples STB Query Only 2 292 Returns the time when the oscilloscope setup was saved for the specified channel XX Save and Recall SETUP x TIME SETUP2 TIME might return SETUP2 TIME 15 24 07 which is the setup time for channel 2 The SRE Service Request Enable command sets or returns the bits in the Service Request Enable Register For information refer to Registers Status and Error SRE lt NR1 gt SRE CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg FACtory STB NR1 is a value in the range from 0 through 255 The binary bits of the SRER are set according to this value Using an out of range value causes an execution error The power on default for SRER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the SRER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle SRE 48 sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000 SRE might return 32 showing that the bits in the SRER have the binary value of 00100000 STB Read Status Byte returns the contents of the Status Byte Register SBR using the Master Summary Status MSS bit For information refer to Registers Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Status and Error STB CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT
196. PE might return TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE RISE indicating that the B edge trigger occurs on the rising slope TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax 2 366 Sets or returns the source for the B trigger Trigger TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce CH lt x gt EXT LINE TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger B EDGE CH x specifies one of the input channels as the B trigger source EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope as the B trigger source LINE specifies the power line as the B trigger source TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the input source for the B trigger TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE might return TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH1 indicating that the current input source for the B trigger is channel 1 TRIGger B EVENTS Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the current B trigger events parameter Trigger TRIGger B EVENTS TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TRIGGER B EVENTS might return TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 2 indicating that 2 events must occur before the B trigger occurs TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt Group Syntax Sets or returns the number of events that must occur before the B trigger when TRIG DELay BY is set to EVENTS Trigger TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt lt NR1 gt TRIGger B EVE
197. PERCent MID 2 211 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID lt x gt 2 212 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 2 211 MEASUrement REFLevel 2 205 MEASUrement SNAPShot 2 212 MEASUrement S TATIstics 2 213 MEASUrement STATIstics MODE 2 213 MEASUrement STATIstics WElghting 2 214 MEASUrement 2 183 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual MEASUrement GATing 2 184 MEASUrement IMMed 2 185 MEASUrement METHod 2 205 MESSage 2 214 MESSage BOX 2 214 MESSage CLEAR 2 215 MESSage SHOW 2 216 MESSage STATE 2 218 Miscellaneous Command Group 2 28 N NEWpass 2 219 0 OPC 2 219 P PASS Word 2 220 PSC 2 221 PUD 2 222 R RCL 2 222 RECAII SETUp 2 223 RECAII WAV Eform 2 223 REF lt x gt DATE 2 224 REF lt x gt HORizontal DELay TIMe 2 224 REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle 2 225 REF lt x gt LABel 2 225 REF lt x gt TIMe 2 226 REF lt x gt VERTical POSition 2 226 REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle 2 227 REF lt x gt 2 224 REM 2 227 RST 2 228 S SAV 2 228 Save and Recall Command Group 2 30 SAVe EVENTtable BUS lt x gt 2 229 SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat 2 230 SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat 2 233 SAVe WAVEform GATIng 2 234 SAVe ASSIgn TY Pe 2 229 SAVe IMAGe 2 230 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Index SAVe IMAGe LAYout 2 231 SAVe SETUp 2 231 SAVe WAV Eform 2 232 Search Commands Group 2 31 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt COPy 2 235 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE 2 236 SEARCH SEA
198. Qual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID QUALi fier LESSThan sets the frame id qualifier to LESSThan MOREThan sets the frame id qualifier to MOREThan Qual sets the frame id qualifier to QUal UNEQual sets the frame id qualifier to UNEQual LESSEQual sets the frame id qualifier to LESSEQual MOREEQual sets the frame id qualifier to MOREEQual INrange sets the frame id qualifier to INrange OUTrange sets the frame id qualifier to OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER OUTRANGE sets the frame id qualifier to out of range SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the frame id qualifier is EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY frame ID low value Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID VALue Qstring is a quoted string representing the binary data string used for FLEXRAY frame ID low value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE 11001101010 sets the value of the frame id is 11001101010 Tektronix 4000 Series Progr
199. RCH lt x gt TOTAL 2 236 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS 2 237 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition 2 237 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 238 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUA Lifier 2 238 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe 2 239 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue 2 240 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype 2 240 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN f IDentifier ADDRessj MODe 2 241 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue 2 241 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition 2 241 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue 2 242 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount QUALifier 2 243 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue 2 243 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue 2 244 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet 2 244 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUA Lifier 2 245 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SIZe 2 246 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue 2 246 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE 2 2
200. RESHOLD D5 1 4 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D6 1 4 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D7 1 4 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D8 1 4 TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD D9 1 4 TRIGGER A TRANSITION DELTATIME 8 00E 09 TRIGGER A TRANSITION POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN SLOWER TRIGGER A TYPE EDGE TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 8 00E 01 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 8 00E 01 TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM FORMAT PROGRESSIVE TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM LINEPERIOD 6 36E 05 TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SYNCINTERVAL 4 72E 06 TRIGGER A VIDEO HOLDOFF FIELD 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 1 TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY POSITIVE TRIGGER A VIDEO STANDARD NTSC TRIGGER A VIDEO SYNC ALLLINES TRIGGER B BY TIME TRIGGER B EDGE COUPLING DC TRIGGER B EDGE SLOPE RISE TRIGGER B EDGE SOURCE CH1 TRIGGER B EVENTS COUNT 1 TRIGGER B LEVEL 0 00E 00 TRIGGER B LEVEL CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER B LEVEL CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER B LEVEL DO 14 TRIGGER B LEVEL D1 14 TRIGGER B LEVEL D10 14 TRIGGER B LEVEL D11 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D12 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D13 1 4 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual C 31 Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value TRIGGER B LEVEL D14 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D15 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D2 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D3 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D4 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D5 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D6 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D7 1 4 TRIGGER B LEVEL D8 1 4 TRIGGER B LE
201. RITY LOW BUS B3 SPI SELECT SOURCE CH2 BUS B3 STATE 0 BUS B3 TYPE PARALLEL BUS B4 CAN BITRATE 500000 BUS B4 CAN PROBE CANH BUS B4 CAN SAMPLEPOINT 50 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual C 5 Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value BUS B4 CAN SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 DISPLAY FORMAT HEXADECIMAL BUS B4 DISPLAY TYPE BUS BUS B4 FLEXRAY BITRATE 10000000 BUS B4 FLEXRAY CHANNEL A BUS B4 FLEXRAY SIGNAL BDIFFBP BUS B4 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 12C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 BUS B4 12C CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 12C DATA SOURCE CH2 BUS B4 LABEL Parallel BUS B4 LIN BITRATE 19200 BUS B4 LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY BUS B4 LIN MAXBYTEDELIM 14 BUS B4 LIN POLARITY NORMAL BUS B4 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B4 LIN SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 LIN STANDARD V2X BUS B4 PARALLEL CLOCK EDGE RISING BUS B4 PARALLEL CLOCK ISCLOCKED NO BUS B4 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 PARALLEL WIDTH 16 BUS B4 POSITION 0 00E 00 BUS B4 RS232C BITRATE 9600 BUS B4 RS232C DATABITS 8 BUS B4 RS232C DELIMITER LF BUS B4 RS232C DISPLAYMODE FRAME BUS B4 RS232C PARITY NONE BUS B4 RS232C POLARITY NORMAL BUS B4 RS232C RX SOURCE OFF BUS B4 RS232C TX SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 SPI BITORDER MSB BUS B4 SPI CLOCK POLARITY RISE BUS B4 SPI CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B4 SPI DATA IN POLARITY HIGH BUS B4 SPI DATA IN SOURCE OFF BUS B4 SPI DATA OUT POLARITY HIGH C 6 Tektronix 4000
202. RMS N Executes the selected measurement operation on the waveform active or reference that follows All these operations must end with a right parenthesis LOG EXP SQRT SINE COSINE TANGENT Executes trigonometric and other functions All these operations must end with a right parenthesis VAR1 VAR2 Adds the user defined variable to the expression Refer to the MATHVAR lt x gt command Executes an addition subtraction multiplication or division operation on the following expression and are also unary use to negate the expression that follows lt gt lt gt amp amp Executes relational and logical operations Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 177 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples Table 2 39 Advanced Math expression elements cont Expression Description Parentheses provide a way to control evaluation order in an expression The comma is used to separate the from and to waveforms in Delay and Phase measurement operations 1 0 E Specifies a numeric value in optional scientific notation MATH1 DEFINE CH1 CH2 adds the Ch 1 waveform and Ch 2 waveform storing the results in Math 1 MATH DEFINE might return MATH1 DEFINE CH2 REF2 as the expression that defines Math 1 MATH 1 HORizontal POSition Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the math horizontal display position for
203. RMat NOPARi ty sets the LIN id format to no parity PARi ty sets the LIN id format to parity BUS B1 LIN IDFORMAT PARITY sets the LIN id format to parity BUS BL LIN IDFORMAT might return BUS BL LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY indicating the LIN id format is no parity BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the LIN polarity Bus BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity NORMal INVerted BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity NORMa specifies normal LIN polarity INVerted specifies inverted LIN polarity BUS B1 LIN POLARITY INVERTED sets the LIN polarity to INVERTED BUS B1 LIN POLARITY might return BUS B1 LIN POLARITY NORMAL indicating the LIN polarity is normal BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint Group 2 78 Sets or returns the sample point in at which to sample during each bit period Bus Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint lt NR1 gt BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint NRI is the sample point in at which to sample during each bit period BUS B1 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 10 sets the sample point is at 10 of the bit period BUS BL LIN SAMPLEPOINT might return BUS B1 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 50 indicating that the sample point is at 50 of the bit period Sets or returns the LIN data source Bus BUS
204. RONIX DPO4034 SN123456789 CF 91 1CT FV v1 00000 indicating the oscilloscope model number serial number configured number and firmware version number Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 169 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order LANGuage LOCk 2 170 Group Syntax Examples Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the user interface display language This command only affects the oscilloscope displayed language Remote commands and their responses are always in English Miscellaneous LANGUage i1ENGL i sh FRENch GERMan ITALian SPANish PORTUguese JAPAnese KOREan RUSSian SIMPlifiedchinese TRADi tionalchinese LANGuage LANGUAGE might return LANGUAGE ENGLISH Enables or disables all front panel buttons and knobs There is no front panel equivalent When the front panel is locked neither theFPAnel PRESS nor the FPAnel TURN commands will work They will not generate an error event either You can work around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands instead of the front panel commands For example to set the trigger level to 5096 you could use TRIGger A SETLevel To force a trigger you could use TRIGger FORCe Miscellaneous Lock ALL NONe LOCk UNLock ALL disables all front panel controls NONe enables all front panel controls This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL command LOCK ALL locks the front panel controls LOCK might
205. RS UNITS SECONDS CURSOR XY RECTANGULAR X POSITION1 0 00E 00 CURSOR XY RECTANGULAR X POSITION2 0 00E 00 CURSOR XY RECTANGULAR Y POSITION1 0 00E 00 CURSOR XY RECTANGULAR Y POSITION2 0 00E 00 DO LABEL DO POSITION 6 00E 02 DO THRESHOLD 1 4 D1 LABEL D1 POSITION 6 00E 02 D1 THRESHOLD 1 4 D10 LABEL D10 POSITION 6 00E 02 D10 THRESHOLD 1 4 D11 LABEL D11 POSITION 6 00E 02 D11 THRESHOLD 1 4 D12 LABEL D12 POSITION 6 00E 02 D12 THRESHOLD 1 4 D13 LABEL D13 POSITION 6 00E 02 D13 THRESHOLD 1 4 D14 LABEL D14 POSITION 6 00E 02 D14 THRESHOLD 1 4 D15 LABEL D15 POSITION 6 00E 02 D15 THRESHOLD 1 4 D2 LABEL D2 POSITION 6 00E 02 C 8 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value D2 THRESHOLD 14 D3 LABEL D3 POSITION 6 00E 02 D3 THRESHOLD 1 4 D4 LABEL D4 POSITION 6 00E 02 D4 THRESHOLD 1 4 D5 LABEL D5 POSITION 6 00E 02 D5 THRESHOLD 1 4 D6 LABEL D6 POSITION 6 00E 02 D6 THRESHOLD 1 4 D7 LABEL D7 POSITION 6 00E 02 D7 THRESHOLD 1 4 D8 LABEL D8 POSITION 6 00E 02 D8 THRESHOLD 1 4 D9 LABEL D9 POSITION 6 00E 02 D9 THRESHOLD 1 4 DATA DESTINATION DATA ENCDG RIBINARY DATA SOURCE CH1 DATA START 1 DATA STOP 10000 DISPLAY CLOCK 1 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE NORMAL DISPLAY DIGITAL HEIGHT MEDIUM DISPLAY FORMAT YT DISPLAY GRATICULE FULL DISPLAY INTE
206. S B2 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C ADDRESS TYPE USER TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C CONDITION START TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC TRIGGER A BUS B2 LIN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 PARALLEL VALUE XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C CONDITION TXSTART TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI CONDITION SS TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2
207. S232C CONDITION TXSTART TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C RX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C RX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 RS232C TX DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI CONDITION SS TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA IN VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 SPI DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD TRIGGER A BUS B2 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual C 23 Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC TRIGGER A BU
208. SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray EOFTYPE STATic DYNAMic ANY SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray EOFTYPE STATic sets the FLEXRAY end of frame type to STATIC DYNAMi c sets the FLEXRAY end of frame type to DYNAMIC ANY sets the FLEXRAY end of frame type to ANY type SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE ANY sets the FLEXRAY end of frame type to any type SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC indicating the FLEXRAY end of frame type is static SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray ERRTYPE Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the error type be used for FLEXRAY trigger Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray ERRTYPE CRCHeader CRCTrai ler SYNCFrame STARTupnosync NULLFRStatic NULLFRDynami SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray ERRTYPE CRCHeader sets the FLEXRAY error type to CRC header CRCTrai ler sets the FLEXRAY error type to CRC trailer SYNCFrame sets the FLEXRAY error type to SYNC frame Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 247 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples STARTupnosync sets the FLEXRAY error type to start up with no sync NULLFRStatic sets the FLEXRAY error type to null frame static NULLFRDynami c sets the FLEXRAY error type to null frame dynamic SEARCH SEARCH1
209. SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID Group Sets or returns the frame id portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger Search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 251 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID Qstring SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID Qstring is a quoted string representing the frame id portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID 10110010101 sets the frame id portion of the binary header string to 10110010101 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the frame id portion of the binary header string 15 don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the indicator bits portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray HEADER INDBi ts Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray HEADER INDBi ts lt QString gt is a quoted string representing the indicator bits portion of the bi
210. SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C ADDRESS MODE ADDR7 SEARCH SEARCHT1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C ADDRESS TYPE USER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C ADDRESS VALUE XXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C CONDITION START SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 I2C DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 12C DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A
211. SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x LIN DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for a LIN search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE Sets or returns the error type used for a LIN Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN search Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a Parallel search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 33 Command Groups Search Commands cont 2 34 Command Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the trigger condition for a B lt x gt RS232C CONDition RS232 trigger SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the length of the data string B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe for a RS232 trigger if the trigger condition is RX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger if the condition involves RX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string to be used for a RS232 Trigger if the Trigger condition is TX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGge
212. SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe NRI is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the source for a Serial bus trigger This command requires a DPO4AUTO or DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 B2 B3 B4 TRIGger A BUS SOUrce B1 specifies the Bus 1 source B2 specifies the Bus 2 source B3 specifies the Bus 3 source B4 specifies the Bus 4 source TRIGger A EDGE Query Only Group Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Returns the trigger source coupling and slope for the A edge trigger Trigger 2 325 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Examples TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A PULse TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGGER A EDGE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 COUPLING DC SLOPE RISE indicating the trigger source coupling and slope for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE COUPIing Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 326 Sets or returns the type of coupling for the A edge trigger Trigger TRIGger A EDGE COUPling DC HFRej LFRej NOISErej TRIGger A EDGE COUPling TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe DC specifies DC trigger coupling which passes all input signals to the trigger circuitry HFRe j specifies high frequency rejection coupling which attenuates signals above 50 kHz before passing
213. SPI DATA OUT VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B2 SPI DATA START 0 00E 00 C 24 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA START 0 00E 00 TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD TRIGGER A BUS B3 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL TRIGGER A BUS B3 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC
214. SPlay GRAticule FULL DOTSONLY OFF extra colon before DOTSonly You could use DISPlay DOTsonly OFF instead DISPlay GRAticule FULL TRG colon before a star command MATH HORizontal SCAle 1 0e 1 HORizontal POSition 5 0 1 levels of the mnemonics are different either remove the second use of HORizontal or place MATH in front of HORizontal POSition Terminating This documentation uses EOM End of Message to represent a message terminator Table 2 4 End of Message Terminator Symbol Meaning EOM Message terminator The end of message terminator must be the END message EOI asserted concurrently with the last data byte The last data byte may be an ASCII line feed LF character This oscilloscope does not support ASCII LF only message termination The oscilloscope always terminates outgoing messages with LF and EOI Constructed Mnemonics Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics For example a channel mnemonic can be CH2 CH3 or CH4 You use these mnemonics in the command just as you do any other mnemonic For example there is a CHI POSition command and there is also a CH2 POSition command In the command descriptions this list of choices is abbreviated as lt gt Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 5 Command Syntax Cursor Position Mnemonics Math Specifier Mnemonics 2 6 Measurement Specifier Mnemonics Channel Mnemonics Reference Waveform Mnem
215. START might return DATA START 214 indicating that data point 214 is the first waveform data point that will be transferred DATA START 10 specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data point 10 Sets or returns the last data point that will be transferred when using the CURVe query This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms from the oscilloscope Changes to the record length value are not automatically reflected in the DATa STOP value As record length is varied the DATa STOP value must be explicitly changed to ensure the entire record is transmitted In other words curve results will not automatically and correctly reflect increases in record length if Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 127 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATE 2 128 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments the distance from DATa S TARt to DATa STOP stays smaller than the increased record length Waveform Transfer DATa STOP lt NR1 gt DATa STOP CURVe DATa DATa STARt WFMInpre NR Pt WFMOutpre NR Pt NR1 is the last data point that will be transferred which ranges from 1 to the record length If lt NR1 gt is greater than the record length then data will be transferred up to the record length If both DATa STARt and DATa STOP are greater than the record length the last data point in the record is returned DATa STARt and DATa
216. Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray DATa QUAL i fier iLESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray DATa QUALi fier LESSThan sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to greater than EQUal sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the FLEXRAY data qualifier to out of range SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALTFTER LESSTHAN sets the data qualifier to LESSTHAN Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 245 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS 1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data qualifier is EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SIZe Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SIZe
217. Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value BUS B4 SPI DATA OUT SOURCE CH2 BUS B4 SPI DATA SIZE 8 BUS B4 SPI FRAMING SS BUS B4 SPI IDLETIME 1 00E 07 BUS B4 SPI SELECT POLARITY LOW BUS B4 SPI SELECT SOURCE CH2 BUS B4 STATE 0 BUS B4 TYPE PARALLEL BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 BUS LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 8 00E 01 BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 8 00E 01 CH1 BANDWIDTH 3 50E 08 CH1 COUPLING DC CH1 DESKEW 0 00E 00 CH1 INVERT 0 CH1 LABEL CH1 OFFSET 0 00E 00 CH1 POSITION 0 00E 00 CH1 PROBE FORCEDRANGE 0 00E 00 CH1 PROBE GAIN 1 CH1 SCALE 1 00E 01 CH1 TERMINATION 1 00E 06 CH1 YUNITS V CH2 BANDWIDTH 3 50E 08 CH2 COUPLING DC CH2 DESKEW 0 00E 00 CH2 INVERT 0 CH2 LABEL CH2 OFFSET 0 00E 00 CH2 POSITION 0 00E 00 CH2 PROBE FORCEDRANGE 0 00E 00 CH2 PROBE GAIN 1 CH2 SCALE 1 00E 01 CH2 TERMINATION 1 00E 06 CH2 YUNITS V CURSOR FUNCTION OFF Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual C 7 Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 0 00E 00 CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 0 00E 00 CURSOR HBARS UNITS BASE CURSOR MODE INDEPENDENT CURSOR VBARS POSITION1 1 20E 05 CURSOR VBARS POSITION2 1 20E 05 CURSOR VBA
218. Sets or returns the trigger condition for 12C trigger TRIGger A BUS B x 12C DATa DIRection Sets or returns the I2C trigger condition valid on a READ WRITE or either TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for 2 trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 30 Trigger Commands cont Command Command Groups Description TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for I2C triggering TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Sets or returns the trigger condition for LIN Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALIfier Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for LIN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE Sets or returns the error type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a Parallel trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition Sets or returns the condition for a RS232C tr
219. Syntax 2 92 Sets the upper threshold for each channel This applies to all search and trigger types that use the channel Bus BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt ECL TTL BUS UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments NR3 specifies the threshold in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V Examples BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 800 0000E 3 sets the upper threshold to 800 mV BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 might return BUS UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 800 0000E 3 indicating that the CH1 upper threshold is set to 800 mV BUSY Query Only Returns the status of the oscilloscope This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program Group Status and Error Syntax BUSY Related Commands WAI Returns lt 1 gt 0 means the oscilloscope is not busy processing a command whose execution time is extensive lt NR1 gt 1 means the oscilloscope is busy processing one of the commands listed in the table below Commands that affect BUSY response Operation Command Single sequence ACQuire STATE ON or acquisition ACQuire STATE RUN or ACQuire S TATE1 when ACQuire STOPAfter is set to SEQuence Hard copy operation HARDCopy STArt Calibration step Refer to the optional oscilloscope Service Manual Examples BUSY mig
220. TE 500000 BUS B3 CAN PROBE CANH BUS B3 CAN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B3 CAN SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 DISPLAY FORMAT HEXADECIMAL BUS B3 DISPLAY TYPE BUS BUS B3 FLEXRAY BITRATE 10000000 BUS B3 FLEXRAY CHANNEL A BUS B3 FLEXRAY SIGNAL BDIFFBP BUS B3 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 12C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 BUS B3 12C CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 12C DATA SOURCE CH2 BUS B3 LABEL Parallel C 4 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value BUS B3 LIN BITRATE 19200 BUS B3 LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY BUS B3 LIN MAXBYTEDELIM 14 BUS B3 LIN POLARITY NORMAL BUS B3 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B3 LIN SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 LIN STANDARD V2X BUS B3 PARALLEL CLOCK EDGE RISING BUS B3 PARALLEL CLOCK ISCLOCKED NO BUS B3 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 PARALLEL WIDTH 16 BUS B3 POSITION 0 00E 00 BUS B3 RS232C BITRATE 9600 BUS B3 RS232C DATABITS 8 BUS B3 RS232C DELIMITER LF BUS B3 RS232C DISPLAYMODE FRAME BUS B3 RS232C PARITY NONE BUS B3 RS232C POLARITY NORMAL BUS B3 RS232C RX SOURCE OFF BUS B3 RS232C TX SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 SPI BITORDER MSB BUS B3 SPI CLOCK POLARITY RISE BUS B3 SPI CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B3 SPEDATA IN POLARITY HIGH BUS B3 SPI DATA IN SOURCE OFF BUS B3 SPI DATA OUT POLARITY HIGH BUS B3 SPI DATA OUT SOURCE CH2 BUS B3 SPI DATA SIZE 8 BUS B3 SPI FRAMING SS BUS B3 SPI IDLETIME 1 00E 07 BUS B3 SPI SELECT POLA
221. THERnet PASSWord Arguments new is a new password enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET PASSWORD ZEN53 replaces the current Ethernet password with the new password ZENS3 ETHERNET PASSWORD might return ETHERNET PASSWORD ZEN53 ETHERnet PING No Query Form Causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP address Group Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet PING EXECute Examples ETHERNET PING EXECUTE causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP address ETHERnet PING STATUS Query Only Returns the results from sending the ETHERnet PING command to ping the gateway IP address Group Ethernet Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 145 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax ETHERNET PING STATUS Returns 15 returned if the computer at the gateway IP address answers NORESPORSE is returned if the computer at the gateway IP address does not answer INPROGRESS is returned if the ping operation is still executing ETHERnet SUBNETMask Sets or returns the remote interface subnet mask value Group X Ethernet Syntax ETHERnet SUBNETMask Qstring ETHERnet SUBNETMask Arguments Qstring is the subnet mask value enclosed in quotes Examples ETHERNET SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 sets the subnet mask value using standard IP address notation format EVENT Query Only Returns an event code from the Event Queue that provides information about the results of the last ESR read EVENT also removes t
222. TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE SYNCFRAME sets the FLEXRAY error type SYNCFRAME SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER indicating the FLEXRAY error type is CRCHEADER SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string used for FLEXRAY frame ID high value Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string representing the binary data string used for FLEXRAY frame ID high value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE 00101100101 sets the frame id high value to 00101100101 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the frame id high value is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALIifier 2 248 Group Syntax Sets or returns the FLEXRAY frame ID qualifier Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID QUALifier Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 11 55 MOREThan EQUal UNE
223. TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER might return TRIGGER A BUS B FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the data qualifier is EQUAL TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Group Trigger 2 306 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the FLEXRAY data string length in bytes TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 8 sets the data string size to 8 bytes TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 indicating the data size is 1 byte TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the low binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger condition if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa VALue Qstring TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa VALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the binary data string for a FLEXRAY trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA TRIGGER A BUS Bl1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE 11001101 sets the FLEXRAY data value for triggering to 11001101 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the FLEXRAY data
224. TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Arguments 1 4 or D0 D15 specifies the input channel number 00 015 are only for MSO models AUX or EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux Input connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope Examples TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 specifies channel 1 as the clock input for setup and hold input TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH4 indicating that channel 4 is the clock source for the setup and hold trigger input TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for the setup and hold trigger Group Trigger 2 348 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A SETHOold CLOCk THReshold lt NR3 gt TTL TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk THReshold TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V NR3 is the clock level in volts TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD TTL specifies the preset TTL value of 1 4 V as the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD CLOCK THRESHOLD 1 2000E 00 indicating that the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger is 1 2 V TRIGger A SETHold DATa Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the voltage threshold and data source for the setup and hold trigger T
225. Ta Returns hbars cursors vertical difference CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the hbar cursor lt x gt vertical position CURSor HBArs UNIts Returns hbar cursor units CURSor HBArs USE Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement scale CURSor MODe Sets or returns whether cursors move in unison or separately CURSor VBArs Sets or returns the position of vertical bar CURSor VBArs ALTERNATE lt x gt cursors Returns the alternate readout for the waveform Vbar cursors CURSor VBArs DELTa Returns the difference between vbar cursors CURSor VBArs HPOS lt x gt Returns the horizontal value of the specified vertical bar ticks CURSor VBArs POSITION lt x gt Sets or returns the vbar cursor lt x gt horizontal position CURSor VBArs UNIts Sets or returns the units for vbar cursors CURSor VBArs USE Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement scale CURSor VBArs VDELTa Returns the vertical difference between the two vertical bar cursor ticks CURSor XY POLar RADIUS DELta Returns the difference between the cursors X radius and the cursor Y radius CURSor XY POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt CURSor XY POLar RADIUS UNIts Returns the polar radius of the specified cursor Returns the polar radius units CURSor XY POLar THETA DELta Returns the XY cursor polar coordinate delta Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 17 Command Groups Table 2 17 Cursor Commands cont Command
226. Tektronix 4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual AA OA Tektronix 071 2133 02 Tektronix 4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Programmer Manual www tektronix com Tektronix 071 2133 02 S Copyright O Tektronix All rights reserved Licensed software products are owned by Tektronix or its subsidiaries or suppliers and are protected by national copyright laws and international treaty provisions Tektronix products are covered by U S and foreign patents issued and pending Information in this publication supersedes that in all previously published material Specifications and price change privileges reserved TEKTRONIX and TEK are registered trademarks of Tektronix Inc Contacting Tektronix Tektronix Inc 14200 SW Karl Braun Drive P O Box 500 Beaverton OR 97077 USA For product information sales service and technical support n North America call 1 800 833 9200 7 Worldwide visit www tektronix com to find contacts in your area Table of Contents Getting Started 1 1 Setting Up Remote 2 2 2 1 1 Command Syntax ce rre ende vert Ea Henk rennene den 2 1 Command and Query Structure 22 2 1 Clearing the oscilloscope 9 2 3 Command ENY NC 2 3 Constructed Mnemonics te
227. URSor XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt 2 120 CURSor XY RATIO UNIts 2 120 CURSor XY RECTangular X DELta 2 120 CURSor XY RECTangular X POSITION lt x gt 2 121 CURSor XY RECTangular X UNIts 2 121 CURSor XY RECTangular Y DELta 2 121 CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt 2 121 CURSor XY RECTangular Y UNIts 2 122 CURSor 2 110 CURSor FUNCtion 2 110 CURSor HBArs 2 111 CURSor HBArs DELTa 2 111 CURSor HBArs UNIts 2 112 CURSor HBArs USE 2 113 CURSor MODe 2 113 CURSor VBArs 2 114 CURSor VBArs DELTa 2 114 CURSor VBArs UNIts 2 116 CURSor VBArs USE 2 117 CURVe 2 122 D Dx 2 139 D lt x gt LABel 2 139 D lt x gt POSition 2 139 D lt x gt THREshold 2 140 DATa 2 123 DATa DESTination 2 124 DATa ENCdg 2 125 DATa SOUrce 2 126 DATa STARt 2 127 DATa STOP 2 127 DATE 2 128 DDT 2 129 DESE 2 129 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes 2 131 DIAg SELect lt function gt 2 133 DIAg LOOP OPTion 2 130 DIAg LOOP STOP 2 131 DIAg RESUIt FLAg 2 131 DIAg RESUIt LOG 2 132 DIAg SELect 2 132 DIAg STATE 2 133 Display Command Group 2 18 DISplay DIGital HEI ght 2 135 DISplay INTENSITy BACK Light 2 136 DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule 2 137 DISplay INTENSITy WAV Eform 2 137 DISplay STYle DOTsonly 2 138 DISplay 2 134 DISplay CLOCk 2 134 DISplay FORMat 2 135 DISplay GRAticule 2 136 DISplay INTENSITy 2 136 DISplay PERSistence 2 137 E ESE 2 140 ESR
228. V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts TRIGger EXTernal Query Only Returns all external trigger parameters Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger EXTernal TRIGger EXTernal PRObe Sets or returns the attenuation factor value of the external probe connector Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger EXTernal PRObe lt NR3 gt TRIGger EXTernal PRObe Arguments NR3 is the attenuation factor of the probe Examples TRIGGER EXTERNAL PROBE might return TRIGGER EXTERNAL PROBE 1 0E1 for a 10X probe 2 372 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the external trigger vertical Y units value Trigger TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts TRIGGER EXTERNAL YUNITS might return TRIGGER EXTERNAL YUNITS y if the vertical unit is volts TRIGger STATE Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples TST Query Only Returns the current state of the triggering system Trigger TRIGger STATE TRIGger A MODe ARMED indicates that the oscilloscope is acquiring pretrigger information AUTO indicates that the oscilloscope is in the automatic mode and acquires data even in the absence of a trigger READY indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and that the oscilloscope is ready to accept a trigger SAVE indicates that the oscilloscope is in save mode and i
229. VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B3 SPI DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B4 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS
230. VEL D9 1 4 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 0 00E 00 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD CH2 0 00E 00 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD DO 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D10 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D11 1 4 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D12 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D13 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D14 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D15 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D2 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D3 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D4 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D5 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D6 14 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D7 1 4 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D8 1 4 TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D9 1 4 TRIGGER B STATE 0 TRIGGER B TIME 8 00E 09 TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE TRIGGER B UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 8 00E 01 TRIGGER B UPPERTHRESHOLD CH2 8 00E 01 TRIGGER EXTERNAL PROBE 1 VERBOSE 1 ZOOM GRATICULE SIZE 80 ZOOM GRATICULE SPLIT EIGHTYTWENTY C 32 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Defaults Command Default value ZOOM MODE 0 ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 ZOOM ZOOM1 HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 00E 06 ZOOM ZOOM1 POSITION 50 ZOOM ZOOM1 SCALE 4 00E 06 ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE 0 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Defaults C 34 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Index A ACQuire MAXSamplerate 2 58 ACQuire 2 57 ACQuire MAGnivu 2 57 ACQuire MODe 2 58 ACQuire NUMACq 2 59 ACQuire NUMAVg 2 59 ACQuire S TATE 2 60 ACQuire STOPAfter 2 61 Acquisition
231. W HAMMING indicating that the window function used to multiply the spectral analyzer input data is the Hamming window Sets or returns the math waveform mode type Math MATH 1 TYPe ADVanced DUAL FFT MATH 1 TYPe ADVanced sets the math waveform mode to advanced math DUAL sets the math waveform mode to dual waveform math FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT math Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MATH TYPE FFT sets the math waveform mode to FFT MATH TYPE FFT MATH DEFINE FFT CH1 sets the math type to FFT and displays an FFT waveform of the channel 1 waveform using the current FFT scale and window settings MATH TYPE ADVANCED MATH DEFINE INTG REF1 CH3 DELAY CH1 CH2 sets the math type to FFT and displays an advanced math waveform that is the integration of the product of REF1 and CH3 plus the result of the delay measurement between channel 1 and 2 MATH 1 VERTical POSition Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the vertical position of the currently selected math type Math MATH 1 VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt MATH 1 VERTical POSition CH lt x gt POSition REF lt x gt VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt is the desired position in divisions from the center graticule MATH1 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3E 00 positions the Math 1 input signal 1 3 divisions higher than a position of 0 MATH1 V
232. W specifies a logic low X specifies a do not care state TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the pattern logic condition on which to trigger the oscilloscope Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn TRUe FALSe LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn TRUE triggers the oscilloscope when the pattern becomes true FALSE triggers the oscilloscope when the pattern becomes false LESSTHAN triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period less than the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME MORETHAN triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period more greater than the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME EQUAL triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period equal to the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME within a 5 tolerance UNEQUAL triggers the oscilloscope when the input pattern is true for a time period greater than or less than not equal to the time period specified in TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME within a 5 tolerance TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSTHAN sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the pattern is true for a time period less than the pattern trigger delta time setting TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Group 2 336 Sets or returns the maximum ti
233. XADECIMAL BUS B2 DISPLAY TYPE BUS BUS B2 FLEXRAY BITRATE 10000000 BUS B2 FLEXRAY CHANNEL A BUS B2 FLEXRAY SIGNAL BDIFFBP BUS B2 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 12C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 BUS B2 I2C CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 I2C DATA SOURCE CH2 BUS B2 LABEL Parallel BUS B2 LIN BITRATE 19200 BUS B2 LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY BUS B2 LIN MAXBYTEDELIM 14 BUS B2 LIN POLARITY NORMAL BUS B2 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B2 LIN SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 LIN STANDARD V2X BUS B2 PARALLEL CLOCK EDGE RISING BUS B2 PARALLEL CLOCK ISCLOCKED NO BUS B2 PARALLEL CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 PARALLEL WIDTH 16 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual C 3 Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value BUS B2 POSITION 0 00E 00 BUS B2 RS232C BITRATE 9600 BUS B2 RS232C DATABITS 8 BUS B2 RS232C DELIMITER LF BUS B2 RS232C DISPLAYMODE FRAME BUS B2 RS232C PARITY NONE BUS B2 RS232C POLARITY NORMAL BUS B2 RS232C RX SOURCE OFF BUS B2 RS232C TX SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 SPI BITORDER MSB BUS B2 SPI CLOCK POLARITY RISE BUS B2 SPI CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B2 SPI DATA IN POLARITY HIGH BUS B2 SPI DATA IN SOURCE OFF BUS B2 SPI DATA OUT POLARITY HIGH BUS B2 SPI DATA OUT SOURCE CH2 BUS B2 SPI DATA SIZE 8 BUS B2 SPI FRAMING SS BUS B2 SPI IDLETIME 1 00E 07 BUS B2 SPI SELECT POLARITY LOW BUS B2 SPI SELECT SOURCE CH2 BUS B2 STATE 0 BUS B2 TYPE PARALLEL BUS B3 CAN BITRA
234. Y trigger condition to data IDANDDATA sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to id and data EOF sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to end of frame Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ERROR sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to error TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF indicating the GLEXRAY condition 15 start of frame TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF indicating the GLEXRAY condition 15 start of frame TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count high value Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CYCLECount HIVALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLECOUNt HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the cycle count high value TRIGGER A BUS Bl1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE 110010 sets the cycle count high value to 110010 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX indicating the cycle count high value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount QUALifier Group Syntax Sets or returns the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CYCLECount QUAL fier iLESSThan MOREThan EQUal
235. a string length in bytes Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 239 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a CAN search if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue bin SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALifier lt bin gt is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 240 Sets or returns the CAN Frame Type to be used if the trigger search condition is Frame Type SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype REMote ERRor OVERLoad SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA specifies a data frame REMote specifies a remote frame ERROr specifies an error frame OVERLoad specifies an overload frame Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Liste
236. adecimal 2 375 USBTMC SERIALnumber 2 375 USBTMC VENDORID DECimal 2 375 USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal 2 376 V VERBose 2 376 Vertical Command Group 2 47 W WAI 2 377 Waveform Transfer Command Group 2 50 WAV Frm 2 377 WFMInpre 2 378 WFMInpre BIT Nr 2 378 WFMInpre BN 2 379 WFMInpre BYT Nr 2 379 WFMInpre BYT Or 2 380 WFMInpre ENCdg 2 380 WFMInpre NR Pt 2 381 WFMInpre PT Fmt 2 381 WFMInpre PT Off 2 382 WFMInpre XINcr 2 383 WFMInpre XUNIit 2 383 WFMInpre XZEro 2 384 WFMInpre Y MUIt 2 384 WFMInpre YOFf 2 385 WFMInpre YUNIit 2 386 WFMInpre YZEro 2 386 Index 10 WFMOutpre FRACTional 2 390 WFMoOutpre 2 387 WFMoOutpre BIT Nr 2 388 WFMOutpre BN 2 388 WFMOutpre BYT Nr 2 389 WFMoOutpre BYT Or 2 389 WFMOutpre ENCdg 2 390 WFMoOnutpre NR Pt 2 391 WFMoOutpre PT Fmt 2 391 WFMoOutpre PT Off 2 392 WFMoOutpre PT ORder 2 392 WFMOutpre WFId 2 393 WFMoOutpre XINcr 2 394 WFMOutpre XUNit 2 394 WFMoOutpre XZEro 2 394 WFMoOutpre Y MUIt 2 395 WFMoOutpre YOFf 2 395 WFMoOutpre YUNIt 2 396 WFMoOutpre YZEro 2 396 Z Zoom Command Group 2 55 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt FACtor 2 398 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal POSition 2 398 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt HORizontal SCAle 2 399 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt POSition 2 399 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle 2 400 ZOOm ZOOMK lt x gt STATE 2 400 ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt 2 398 ZOOm 2 397 ZOOm MODe STATE 2 397 Tektronix 4000 Series
237. alue TRIGger STATE Returns the current state of the triggering system Vertical Command Group Use the commands in the Vertical Command Group to control the vertical setup of all live channel waveforms for acquisition and to display of channel reference and math waveforms Table 2 31 Vertical Commands Command Description AUXin Returns auxiliary input parameters AUXin PRObe Returns all information concerning the probe attached to auxilary input AUXin PRObe AUTOZero Sets the TekVPI probe attached to the auxiliary input to autozero AUXin PRObe COMMAND Sets the state of the specified probe control Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 47 Command Groups 2 48 Table 2 31 Vertical Commands cont Command Description AUXin PRObe DEGAUss Starts a degauss autozero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe DEGAUss STATE Returns the degauss state of the TekVPI current probe attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange Sets or returns the range of the TekVPI probe attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe GAIN Sets or returns the gain factor of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe ID SERnumber Returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe ID TYPE Returns the type of probe that is attached to the auxiliary input AUXin PRObe RESistan
238. ammer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID x NR3 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt NR3 is the mid reference level in volts MEASUrement REFLevel METHod Group Syntax Arguments Examples Specifies or returns the reference level units used for measurement calculations NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the eight periodic measurements To change the parameter for individual measurements use the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt REFLevel commands Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel METHod ABSolute PERCent MEASUrement REFLevel METHod ABSo lute specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute commands This method is useful when precise values are required for example when designing to published interface specifications such as RS 232 C PERCent specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent commands MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD ABSOLUTE specifies that explicit user defined values are used for the reference levels MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT indicating that the reference level units used are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW MEASUreme
239. ammer Manual 2 249 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE 10110010101 indicating the value of the frame id is 10110010101 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the frame type for FLEXRAY Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType NORMal PAYLoad NULL SYNC STARTup SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType NORMa1 sets the FLEXRAY frame type to normal PAYLoad sets the FLEXRAY frame type to payload NULL sets the FLEXRAY frame type to NULL SYNC sets the FLEXRAY frame type to sync STARTup sets the FLEXRAY frame type to start up SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE STARTUP sets the flexray frame type to startup SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A 1 FRAMETYPE NORMAL indicating the flexray frame type 18 normal SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC 2 250 Group Syntax Sets or returns the CRC portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A
240. ammer Manual 2 69 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXin PRObe SIGnal Group Syntax Arguments This command changes the input bypass setting on VPI probes that support input bypass for example the 0001 If sent to a probe that does not support input bypass it is ignored Vertical AUXin PRObe SIGnal BYPass PASS AUXin PRObe SIGnal ByPass sets the probe to Bypass mode PASS sets the probe to Pass mode AUXin PRObe UNIts Query Only Group Syntax Examples BUS Conditions Group Syntax 2 70 Returns a string describing the units of measure of the probe attached to the Aux In input Vertical AUXin PRObe UNIts AUXin PROBE UNITS might return AUXin PROBE UNITS V indicating that the units of measure for the attached probe are volts Sets or returns the parameters for each bus These parameters affect either the Serial Trigger Setup or the Bus Display This command requires a DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Returns Examples Sets or returns the bit rate for CAN bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Bus BUS B lt x gt CAN BITRate NR1 fRATE10K RATE20K RATE33K RATE37K RATE5OK RATE62K RATE83K RATE92K RAT
241. and maximum The query form of this command returns the B trigger parameters This command is similar to selecting B Event Delayed Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current setups Trigger TRIGger B SETLevel TRIGger B TRIGger A SETLevel sets the B trigger level to 50 of MIN and MAX TRIGGER B SETLEVEL sets the B trigger level to 50 of MIN and MAX TRIGGER B might return the following B trigger parameters TRIGGER B STATE 0 TYPE EDGE LEVEL 220 0000E 3 BY TIME EDGE SOURCE CH1 SLOPE RISE COUPLING DC TRIGGER B TIME 16 0000E 9 EVENTS COUNT 2 Selects or returns whether the B trigger occurs after a specified number of events or a specified period of time after the A trigger Trigger TRIGger B BY EVENTS TIMe TRIGger B BY TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TRIGger B TIMe Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order EVENTS sets the B trigger to take place following a set number of trigger events after the A trigger occurs The number of events is specified by TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt TIMe sets the B trigger to occur a set time after the A trigger event The time period is specified by TRIGger B TIMe TRIGGER B BY TIME sets the B trigger to occur at a set time after the A trigger event TRIGGER B BY might return TRIGGER B BY EVENTS indicating that the B trigger takes place following a set number of trigger events after the A trigger occurs
242. and model Group X Miscellaneous Syntax USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal Related Commands USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal USBTMC SERIALnumber USBTMC VENDORID DECimal USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal Examples USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXADECIMAL might return USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXADECIMAL 0x0401 indicating the product ID in hexadecimal is 0x0401 USBTMC SERIALnumber Query Only This query returns the instrument serial number Group Miscellaneous Syntax USBTMC SERIALnumber Related Commands USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal USBTMC VENDORID DECimal USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal Examples USBTMC SERIALNUMBER might return USBTMC SERIALNUMBER PQ30003 indicating the product serial number is PQ30003 USBTMC VENDORID DECimal Query Only This query returns the USBTMC vendor ID The Vendor ID for Tektronix is 0x699 or 1689 decimal Group X Miscellaneous Syntax USBTMC VENDORID DECimal Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 375 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Examples USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal USBTMC SERIALnumber USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal USBTMC VENDORID DECIMAL might return USBTMC VENDORID DECIMAL 1689 indicating the vendor ID in decimal is 1689 USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples VERBose Group Syntax Related Commands 2 376 This query returns the USBTMC v
243. and the three character extension Waveform files should have a csv extension for comma separated spreadsheet format files SAVe IMAGe No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Saves a capture of the screen image into the specified file Supported image formats are PNG Windows Bitmap and TIFF If an extension for a supported file type is added to the file name then the corresponding format will be used If no supported extension 1s added to the file the format to use will be determined by the value obtained from the SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat query Save and Recall SAVe IMAGe file path SAVe ASSIgn TYPe file path is a filename including path where the image will be saved If you do not specify a directory the oscilloscope will store the file in the current working directory File name extensions are not required but are highly recommended The path D foo png will save an image to the file on the Compact Flash card SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat 2 230 Group Syntax Related Commands Sets or returns the file format to use for saving screen images when the file type cannot be determined from the given file name or when screen images are captured by using the front panel Save and Recall SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat PNG BMP TIFf SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat SAVe IMAGe Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments SAVe IMAGe LAYout Group Syntax Arguments Comma
244. ansfer DATa INIT SNAp CURVe DATa STARt DATa STOP DATa ENCdg WFMInpre NR Pt WFMoOutpre NR Pt INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults except for DATa STOP which is set to the current acquisition record length SNAp sets DATa STARt and DATa STOP to match the current waveform cursor positions DATA might return DATA DESTINATION RIBINARY SOURCE 5 1 STOP 500 WIDTH 1 DATA INIT initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults Sets or returns the reference memory location for storing waveform data transferred into the oscilloscope by the CURVe command Waveform Transfer DATa DESTination REF lt x gt DATa DESTination CURVe REF x is the reference location where the waveform will be stored DATA DESTINATION might return DATA DESTINATION REF3 indicating that reference 3 is the currently selected reference memory location for incoming waveform data DATA DESTINATION indicates that incoming waveform data be stored in reference 1 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATa ENCdg Sets or returns the format of outgoing waveform data This command is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BN andWFMOutpre BYT Or Setting the DATa ENGdg value causes the corresponding WFMOutpre values to be updated and conversley NOTE This command and query does no
245. anual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS STATE OFF indicating that no measurement indicators are active MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt Query Only Returns the value of the specified vertical measurement indicator lt x gt from the trigger point where lt x gt can be 1 2 3 or 4 A negative value means that the indicator is positioned earlier in the waveform record than the trigger point Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement INDICators VERT x Examples MEASUREMENT INDICATORS VERT2 might return MEASUREMENT INDICATORS VERT2 3 724507E 6 indicating that the second measurement indicator is positioned 3 72 us before the trigger point MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt Query Only Returns all measurement parameters for the specified active measurement lt x gt Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNt Query Only Returns the number of values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Values may be ignored if they generated an error Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS x COUNt Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS3 COUNT might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 COUNT 3247 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 195 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay Query
246. anual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW NR3 MEASUrement ABSolute LOW MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TY Pe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe lt NR3 gt is the low reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 0 0 sets the low reference level to 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 0 0000 00 indicating that the absolute low reference level is set to 0 0 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the mid reference level and is the 50 reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of period frequency delay and all cyclic measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 NR3 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 1 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod NR3 is the mid reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 207 Command
247. applied to the background otherwise applies to the foreground Bit 0 3 Specifies the color index 0 through 15 to change color as specified below Index 0 Black background Index 1 Yellow Ch 1 Index 2 Cyan Ch 2 Index 3 Magenta Ch 3 Index 4 Green Ch 4 Index 5 Red math Index 6 White reference Index 7 Orange Index 8 Gray Graticule Index 9 White text Index 10 Tek blue Index 11 Bright blue Index 12 Undefined Index 13 Blue Index 14 Undefined Index 15 Dark blue Bit 4 If set the foreground color is set to the default foreground color Bit 3 If set the background color is set to the default background color Bit 2 Undefined Bit 1 Undefined Bit 0 Undefined The ESC escape character followed by the character turns inverse video on or off and can be embedded in the message string Example abcESC defESC ghi specifies the string abcdefghi where the def portion is displayed in inverse video Example abcESC defESC ESC ghi specifies the string abcdefghi where the def portion appears in the channel 3 color magenta and the ghi portion appears in the normal text color except it s in inverse video Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 217 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MESSage STATE 2 218 Group Syntax Related Commands An alternate way to enter characters is octal escape sequences This consists of a backslash followed by numerals in the stan
248. are 0 1 and X TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA VALUE 1011 sets the CAN data value to 1011 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype 2 300 Sets or returns the frame type fora CAN FRAMEType trigger Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command requires DPO4AUTO application module This command is only valid when the TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition is FRAMETYPE Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype DATA REMote ERROr OVERLOad TRIGger A BUS B X CAN FRAMEtype DATA specifies a data frame type REMote specifies a remote frame type ERRor specifies an error frame type specifies an overload frame type TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA sets the CAN trigger frame type to DATA TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifierl ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Use this command to do the following B Trigger on ID Trigger in IDANDDATA This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard specifies the standard addressing mode EXTended specifies the e
249. are available only on MSO models MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE1 1 specifies Math 1 as the measurement 2 source MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE1 might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 SOURCE 1 1 indicating that Mathl is the measurement 2 source MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the reference source to measure to when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurements are specified by lt x gt which ranges from 1 through 4 Tip Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types which require both a target Sourcel and reference Source2 source Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 lt gt lt gt REF x D x MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH lt y gt is the math waveform which is always 1 REF x is a reference waveform where x is the reference channel number D lt x gt is a digital waveform where x is the digital channel number Digital channels are available only on MSO models MEASUREMENT MEAS4 SOURCE2 CHI specifies as the delay to source when making delay measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 might return MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 1 indicating that Math I is the measurement 2 source Tektronix 4000 Series Pr
250. ase HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing Sets or returns the units string for the horizontal main time base HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the horizontal position HORizontal PREViewstate Returns whether or not the acquisition system is in the preview state HORizontal RECOrdlength Sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame Or returns the current horizontal record length HORizontal RESOlution Sets or returns the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Mark Command Group Table 2 22 Horizontal Commands cont Command Command Groups Description HORizontal SAMPLERate Sets or returns the current horizontal sample rate HORizontal SCAle Sets or returns the time base horizontal scale Use the commands in the Mark Command Group to identify areas of the acquired waveform that warrant further investigation Table 2 23 Mark Commands Command Description MARK Move to the next or previous mark on the waveform or returns all learnable settings from the mark commands MARK CREATE Creates a mark on a particular waveform or all waveforms in a column MARK DELEte Deletes a mark on a particular waveform all waveforms in a column or all marks MARK FREE Retums how many marks are free to be used MARK SELected END Returns the end of the selected mark in terms of 0 to
251. aticule style the displayed intensities and to set the characteristics of the waveform display Use these commands to set the style that best displays your waveforms and graticule display properties Note that the mode you choose globally affects all displayed waveforms Table 2 18 Display Commands Command Description DISplay Returns current display settings DISplay CLOCk Sets or returns the display of the date time stamp DISplay DIGital HElght Sets or returns the number of available digital waveform position slots Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 18 Display Commands cont Command Groups Command Description DISplay GRAticule Sets or returns the type of graticule that is displayed DISplay FORMat Sets or returns the display format DISplay INTENSITy Returns all display intensity settings DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight Sets or returns the backlight intensity for the display DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule Sets or returns the graticule intensity for the display DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform Sets or returns the intensity of the waveforms DISplay PERSistence Sets or returns display persistence setting DISplay STYle DOTsonly Sets a dots only display MESSage BOX Sets or returns the size and position of the message window MESSage CLEAR Removes the message text from the message window MESSage SHOW Clears the contents of the message window MESSa
252. aveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT MEAS1 VALUE The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time It may not finish before the oscilloscope takes an amplitude measurement see the following figure This can result in an incorrect amplitude value ACQUIRE STATE ON Acquiring Waveform Data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE Processing Time Figure 3 7 Command Processing Without Using Synchronization To ensure the oscilloscope completes waveform acquisition before taking the measurement on the acquired data you can synchronize the program ACQUIRE STATE ON Acquiring Waveform Data MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE re OO Processing Time Figure 3 8 Processing Sequence With Synchronization You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program WAI BUSY OPC and OPC Using the WAI Command The WAI command forces completion of previous commands that generate an OPC message No commands after the WAI are processed before the OPC message s are generated 3 8 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events The same command sequence using the WAI command for synchronization looks like this Set up conditional acquisition
253. ax Examples MEASUrement REFLevel MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL might return these reference level settings MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 0000 LOW 0 0000 MID1 0 0000 MID2 0 0000 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 0000 LOW 10 0000 MID1 50 0000 MID2 50 0000 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the high reference level and is the upper reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH NR3 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe lt NR3 gt is the high reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 1 71 sets the high reference level to 1 71 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 1 7100E 00 indicating that the absolute high reference level is set to 1 71 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW 2 206 Sets or returns the low reference level and is the lower reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer M
254. ayed text within the message box You can send tab by transmitting a tab character X or x09 followed characters representing the most significant eight bits followed by significant eight bits of a 16 bit number The number specifies the position relative to the left margin of the message area For example to tab send TAB or x09 NUL decimal 0 and CR decimal 13 For example using hexadecimal escape sequences MESSAGE SHOW x09 x01 x17Hello when sent as a command would cause the Hello to be displayed starting at pixel position 279 relative to the left margin set by the MESSAGE BOX command If you want to display characters starting at position 279 then 279 0x0117 split the hexadecimal number into two characters 0x01 and 0x17 and send x09 x01 x17 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Special characters which control decoration are two character sequences where the first character is an escape 0 1 and the second character is as described below Bit 7 0 Bit 6 If set inverse video is toggled from current state and the following text is displayed in the new inverse state until the state is toggled again Remaining bits are ignored Bit 5 If set the color index in the four LSB s bits 0 through 3 is applied to the foreground or background color depending on the fg bg bit bit 4 Bit 4 If set color change is
255. ber SERnumber SET SETHold SETLevel SETTime SETUP SETUp SHOW SIGnal SIMPlifiedchinese SIZe SLEEP SLEWRate SLOWer SLOpe 5 11 SNAPShot SNAP SOF SOUrce SOURCE2 SOUrce2 SPANish SPC SPECTral SPI SPREADSheet SPace SRIbinary SRPbinary SS STANDard STANdard START STARTof frame STARTUDp STARTupnosync START STARtbyte STATE STATE STATIStics STATUS STATe STATIC STATUS STDdev STOP STOPAfter STRing STYle B 3 Appendix B Reserved Words STandard SUBNETMask SYNC SYNCField SYNCFrame SYNCInterval TEKSecure TEMPerature TERmination TESTnumber THDELta THETA THREshold THReshold TIFF TIME TIMe TOTal TOTaluptime TRACk TRADi tionalchinese TRANsition B 4 TRIGger TRIGgertosearch TRUe TTL TURN TWEnty Twofi fty TX TXDATA TXENDPacket TXRX TXSTArt TYPe Than UNDO UNEQual UNIts UNLock UPPerthreshold USBTMC USE USER vix V2X VALue VAR VBArs VDELTa VENDORID VERBose VERT VERTical VIDEO VOLts WAKEup WAVEform WAVFrm WEIghting WFId WFMInpre WFMOutpre WHEn WIDth WINdow Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual WRITE WRITEFile X XDELta XFF XINCr XUNit XY XZEro Y YDELta YES YMUTt YOFf YT YUNItS YUNit YUNits YZEro ZOOM zoom Appendix C Factory Defaults Default Setup The following table lists the default values for each command NOTE Find the most up to date default values for your instrument and software by performing a TekSecure c
256. bles stored in locations through 2 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual lt gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns one of two different numerical values you can use within math expressions These values can range from 10 0e 18 to 1 0e 15 the default values 0 0 x specifies the location 1 or 2 in which you can store values Stored math variables can be referenced within math expressions as VAR1 and VAR2 For example the following command defines MATHI as the product of Channel 1 and math variable 1 MATHI DEFINE CHI VARI Math MATHVAR VAR x NR3 MATHVAR VAR lt X gt MATHVAR VAR lt x gt MATH 1 DEFine lt NR3 gt specifies the numerical value to be stored in location x 1 through 2 gt MATHVAR VAR2 2 43E 5 stores the value 2 43e 5 in the second math variable location MATHVAR VAR2 might return MATHVAR VAR2 24 3000E 6 for the expression stored in location 2 MEASUrement Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns all measurement parameters Measurement MEASUrement MEASUREMENT might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD UNITS S SOURCE1 1 5 2 2 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGEL RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE 1 TYPE FREQUENCY UNITS 2
257. by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer WFMOUutpre XINCr DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre XUNit WFMOUTPRE XINCR might return WFMOUTPRE XINCR 10 0000E 6 indicating that the horizontal sampling interval is 10 us point WFMOutpre XUNit Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the horizontal units for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre XUNit DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE XUNIT might return WFMOUTPRE XUNIT HZ indicating that the horizontal units for the waveform are in Hertz WFMOutpre XZEro Query Only 2 394 Returns the time coordinate of the first point in the outgoing waveform Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This value is units of WFMOutpre XUNit The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre XZEro DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre XUNit WFMOUTPRE XZERO might return WFMOUTPRE XZERO 5 6300E 9 indicating that the trigger occurred 5 63 ns before the first sample in the waveform record WFMOutpre YMUIt Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the vertical scale factor per digit
258. cal Order Syntax TRIGger A PULSEWIDth Examples TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN LESSTHAN WIDTH 8 0000E 9 TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the width trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity NEGative POSitive TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Arguments NEGative specifies a negative pulse POSitive specifies a positive pulse Examples TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the pulse polarity to negative TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH POLARITY might return TRIGGER A WIDTH POLARITY POSITIVE indicating a positive pulse TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the pulse width trigger Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 LINE EXT TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Arguments 1 4 specifies an analog input channel as the A edge trigger source EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope LINE specifies AC line voltage 2 342 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE CH1 sets channel I as the pulse width source TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH SOURCE might return TRIGGER PULSEWIDTH SOURCE 1 indicating that channel 1 is the pulse width source TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Sets or returns whether to trigger on a pulse that mee
259. ce Returns the resistance of the probe that is attached to the Auxiliary input AUXin PRObe SIGnal Sets or returns the input bypass setting on VPI probes that support input bypass AUXin PRObe UNIts Returns the units of measure of the probe that is attached to the auxiliary input CH lt x gt Returns vertical parameters for the specified channel CH lt x gt BANdwidth Sets or returns the bandwidth of the specified channel CH lt x gt COUPIing Sets or returns the coupling setting for the specified channel CH lt x gt DESKew Sets or returns the deskew time for the specified channel CH lt x gt IMPedance Sets or returns channel lt x gt input impedance CH lt x gt INVert Sets or returns the invert function for the specified channel CH lt x gt LABel Sets or returns the waveform label for channel lt x gt CH lt x gt OF FSet Sets or returns the channel offset CH lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the channel vertical position CH lt x gt PRObe Returns the gain resistance units and ID of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero Sets the TekVPI probe attached to the specified channel input to autozero CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND Sets the state of the specified probe control CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss Starts a degauss autozero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the specified channel input Tektronix 4000 Series Program
260. ch source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source MSO Models lt wfm gt be any of the channel math or reference waveforms specified for the DPO models Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the data threshold setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHOld DATa THReshold lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHO1d DATa THReshold TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V lt NR3 gt is the clock level in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the hold time setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHOld HOLDTime lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime lt NR3 gt specifies the hold time setting in seconds Positive values for hold time occur after the clock edge Negative values occur before the clock edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the setup time setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number
261. cilloscope triggers whenever it detects a pulse of a certain width or height Logic triggering lets you logically combine the signals on one or channels The oscilloscope then triggers when it detects a certain combination of signal levels Video triggering enables you to trigger on the most common Standard Definition video standards Table 2 30 Trigger Commands Command Description TRIGger Forces a trigger event to occur TRIGger A Sets A trigger level to 50 or returns current A trigger parameters TRIGger A BUS Sets or returns the serial trigger type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Sets or returns the CAN condition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Sets or returns the CAN trigger condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 30 Trigger Commands cont Command Command Groups Description TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIifier Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SlZe TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for CAN trigger Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for CAN trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Sets or returns the CAN trigger frame type TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt
262. compatible PCs SRPbinary is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte 1s transferred first This format is useful when transferring data to PCs Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 125 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples DATa SOUrce 2 126 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Table 2 36 DATa and WFMOutpre Parameter Settings DATa ENCdg WFMOutpre Settings Setting ENCdg BN Fmt BYT Or NR ASCii ASC N A N A 1 2 FAStest BIN RI MSB 1 2 RIBinary BIN RI MSB 1 2 RPBinary BIN RP MSB 1 2 SRIbinary BIN RI LSB 12 SRPbinary BIN RP LSB 1 2 DATA ENCDG might return DATa ENCDG SRPBINARY for the format of the outgoing waveform data DATA ENCDG RPBinary sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first Sets or returns the location of the waveform data transferred from the oscilloscope by the CURVe query Waveform Transfer DATa SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH REF1 REF2 REF3 REF4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D DATa SOUrce CURVe CH1 CH4 specifies which analog channel data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller channels 1 through 4 MATH specifies that the Math waveform data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller REF1 REF4 specifies which Reference waveform data will be transferred from the oscilloscop
263. compensation cycle CALibrate INTERNal STARt No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Starts the internal signal path calibration SPC of the oscilloscope You can use the CALibrate INTERNal STATus query to return the current status of the internal signal path calibration of the oscilloscope Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate INTERNal STARt CALibrate RESults SPC CALIBRATE INTERNAL START initiates the internal signal path calibration of the oscilloscope CALibrate INTERNal STATus Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Returns the current status of the oscilloscope internal signal path calibration for the last SPC operation Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate INTERNal STATus CAL This query will return one of the following B INIT indicates the oscilloscope has not had internal signal path calibration run B PASS indicates the signal path calibration completed successfully B FAIL indicates the signal path calibration did not complete successfully B RUNNING indicates the signal path calibration is currently running Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 95 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples CALIBRATE INTERNAL STATUS might return CALIBRATE INTERNAL STATUS INIT indicating that the current status of the internal signal path calibration is that it has not been run CALibrate RESults Query Only Returns the status of internal an
264. d push Enabled on the side bezel menu After connection the host will list the oscilloscope as a USB device with the following parameters See Table 1 1 Table 1 1 USB Device Parameters Parameter Value Manufacturer ID 0x0699 decimal 1689 Product ID 0x0401 decimal 1025 Serial number Serial number Manufacturer description Tektronix Interface description USBTMC USB488 To use GPIB start by connecting an appropriate USB cable to the USB 2 0 high speed device port on the rear panel of your oscilloscope Connect the other end to the TEK USB 488 Adapter host port Then connect a GPIB cable from the TEK USB 488 Adapter to your PC Supply power to the Adapter in either of these two ways 1 Use the optional 5 Vpc power adapter connected to the 5 Vpc power input on the Adapter 2 Use an appropriate USB cable connected to a powered USB host port on your PC and the Device port on the TEK USB 488 Adapter Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Getting Started The oscilloscope has a USB 2 0 High speed device port to control the oscilloscope through USBTMC or GPIB with a TEK USB 488 Adapter The USBTMC protocol allows USB devices to communicate using IEEEA88 style messages This lets you run your GPIB software applications on USB hardware Before setting up the oscilloscope for remote communication using the electronic physical GPIB interface y
265. d factory calibrations without performing any calibration operations The results returned do not include the calibration status of attached probes The CALibrate RESults query is intended to support GO NoGO testing of the oscilloscope calibration readiness all returned results should indicate PASS status if the oscilloscope is fit for duty It is quite common however to use uncalibrated probes particularly when the oscilloscope inputs are connected into a test system with coaxial cables Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate RESults Related Commands CAL CALibrate RESults FACtory Query Only Returns the status of internal and factory calibration without performing any calibration operations Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax X CALibrate RESults FACtory CALibrate RESults SPC Query Only Returns the status of the SPC operation This query does not initiate a SPC Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax CALibrate RESults SPC Related Commands CAL 2 96 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Returns Examples CH lt x gt Query Only Group Syntax CH lt x gt BANdwidth Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order INIT indicates that SPC has never successfully completed PASS indicates that the last SPC operation passed FAIL indicates that the last SPC operation failed RUNNING indicates that the SPC operation is running CALIBRATE
266. d headers only one mnemonic If a command header has multiple mnemonics a colon character always separates them from each other Argument This is a quantity quality restriction or limit associated with the header Some commands have no arguments while others have multiple arguments A space separates arguments from the header A comma separates arguments from each other Comma A single comma is used between arguments of multiple argument commands Optionally there may be white space characters before and after the comma Space A white space character is used between a command header and the related argument Optionally a white space may consist of multiple white space characters Commands cause the oscilloscope to perform a specific function or change one of the settings Commands have the structure Header Space Argument Comma lt Argument gt A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a hierarchical or tree structure The first mnemonic is the base or root of the tree and each subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off the previous one Commands at a higher level in the tree may affect those at a lower level The leading colon always returns you to the base of the command tree Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax Queries Queries cause the oscilloscope to return status or setting information Queries have
267. d in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode for a trigger search to a standard or extended format SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard EXTended SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess MODe STandard specifies an 11 bit identifier field EXTended specifies a 29 bit identifier field SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for a CAN trigger search if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue bin SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x IDentifier ADDRess VALUE bin is the address in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition Group Sets or returns the trigger condition for FLEXRAY Search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 241 Commands Liste
268. d in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples SEARCH SEARCH xX TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CONDi tion SOF FRAMETypeid CYCLEcount HEADer DATA IDANDDATA EOF ERROR SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CONDi tion SOF sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to start of frame FRAMETypei sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to a frame type id sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to cycle count HEADer sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to header DATA sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to data IDANDDATA sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to ID and data EOF sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to EOF ERROR sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to an error SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION ERROR sets the FLEXRAY condition to ERROR SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF indicating the FLEXRAY condition is start of frame SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue 2 242 Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count high value Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue lt QString gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the cycle coun
269. d is only applicable when ratio cursors are on Cursor CURSOr HBArs USE CURrent FIVEdivs CURSor HBArs UNIts CURrent sets the H Bar measurement scale so that 0 is the current position ofthe lowest H Bar cursor and 100 is the current position of the highest H Bar cursor FIVEdivs sets H Bar measurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions is 100 where 0 is 2 5 divisions and 100 is 42 5 divisions from the center horizontal graticule CURSOR HBARS USE FIVEDIVS sets the Bar measurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions equals 100 Sets or returns whether the two cursors move linked together in unison or separately This applies to the Waveform cursors display mode This command is only applicable when waveform cursors are displayed Cursor CURSor MODe TRACk INDependent CURSor MODe TRACK ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together For cursor 1 adjustments this ties the movement of the two cursors together however cursor 2 continues to move independently of cursor 1 INDependent allows independent adjustment of the two cursors Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 113 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples CURSOR MODE TRACK specifies that the cursor positions move in unison CURSOR MODE might return CURSOR MODE TRACK indicating that the two cursors move in unison CURSor VBArs Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the current settings
270. d of frame ACKMISS specifies a search based on the missing ACK field SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the CAN search to be valid for Read Write or Either condition if the criteria is IDentifier SEARCH lt X gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This only applies if the search condition is IDentifier This command requires DPO4AUTO application module Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition READ specifies the read condition WRITE specifies the write condition NOCARE specifies either a read or write condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIifier 2 238 Conditions Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier for a search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and B lt x gt is the bus number This only applies if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS lt gt CAN DATa QUAL i fier iLESSThan Than EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual
271. dard C language printf fashion Another way to enter characters is xnn where the nn is the hexadecimal value of the character to display An advantage of these methods is that any controller program can be used Another advantage is it s easy to access characters with the high bit set that is those characters with a decimal value greater than 127 An alternate way to enter certain characters is with a backslash followed by a single character following standard Unix as described in the table below n Newline carriage return and line feed Backslash is required to get a backslash character t Horizontal tab the next 2 characters specify the pixel column to tab to as explained earlier If a backslash is followed by an undefined special character the backslash is ignored and the character following it is accepted as is NOTE The use of any escape codes other than those described above may produce unpredictable results MESSage SHOW Hello World displays Hello world in the upper left corner of the box you can define the box size with the MESSAGE BOX command MESSage SHOW Hello World hello displays Hello world hello in the upper left corner of the box and the word world is displayed in inverse video In this example stands for the escape character The escape character may appear differently for you depending on your controller program Controls the
272. data to or from the oscilloscope takes time ASCII waveform transfer is very inefficient Waveform Transfer CURVE lt Block gt lt asc curve gt DIGtal CURVe Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands DATa DESTination DATa SOUrce DATa STARt DATa STOP WFMInpre WFMInpre BYT Nr WFMOutpre HEADer Arguments Block is the waveform data in binary format The waveform is formatted as lt x gt lt yyy gt lt data gt lt newline gt where x is the number of y bytes For example if lt yyy gt 500 then lt gt 3 lt gt 18 the number of bytes to transfer If width is 1 then all bytes on the bus are single data points If width is 2 then all bytes on the bus are 2 bytes wide Use the WFMInpre BYT Nr command to set the width for waveforms transferred into the oscilloscope Use WFMOutpre BYT Nr to set the width for waveforms transferred out from the oscilloscope data is the curve data lt newline gt is a single byte new line character at the end of the data asc curve is the waveform data in ASCII format The format for ASCII data is lt NR1 gt lt NR1 gt where each lt NR1 gt represents a data point DIGital Sends the data to the specified reference waveform slot as specified by the DATA DESTINATION command If the data encoding is a binary format then depending upon the setting of HEADER the binary block header is prepended
273. dge trigger TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the source for the A edge trigger TRIGger A HOLDoff Returns the A trigger holdoff parameters TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe Sets or returns the A trigger holdoff time TRIGger A LE Vel Sets or returns the trigger level for the A trigger TRIGger A LE Vel AUXin Sets or returns the trigger level for the AUXIN port TRIGger A LE Vel CH lt x gt Specifies or returns the trigger level for the specified trigger channel TRIGger A LE Vel D lt x gt Sets or returns the trigger level for the specified digital channel TRIGger A LOGIc Returns all A trigger logic settings TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss Sets or returns the type of A trigger logic TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Sets or returns the logical combination of the input channels for the A logic trigger TRIGger A LOGIc INPut Returns the logic input values for all channels Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 30 Trigger Commands cont Command Command Groups Description TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt Specifies or returns the logic setting for the specified channel TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce Sets the polarity of the clock channel Sets or returns the channel to use as the clock source TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt Sets or returns the logic pattern for a trigger on digital channel lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PAT
274. directory FILESystem DIR Returns a list of directory contents FILESystem FORMat Formats a named drive FILESystem FREESpace Returns the number of bytes of free space on the current drive FILESystem MKDir Creates a new directory FILESystem READFile Writes the contents of the specified file to the specified interface FILESystem REName Assigns a new name to an existing file FILESystem RMDir Deletes a named directory FILESystem WRITEFile Writes the specified block data to the oscilloscope current working directory Hard Copy Command Group Use the commands in the Hard Copy Command Group to make hard copies Table 2 21 Hard Copy Commands Command Description HARDCopy Sends a copy of the screen display to the selected printer HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter Sets or returns the currently active printer HARDCopy INKSaver Changes hard copy output to print color traces and graticule on a white background HARDCopy LAYout Sets or returns the page orientation for hard HARDCopy PREVIEW Previews the current screen contents with the InkSaver palette applied HARDCopy PRINTer ADD Adds a network printer to the list of available printers HARDCopy PRINTer DELete Removes a network printer from the list of available printers HARDCopy PRINTer LIST Returns the list of currently attached printers HARDCopy PRINTer REName Renames a network printer in the list of available printers Tektronix 4000 Series Programme
275. display of the message window on the screen Display MESSage STATE OFF ON lt NR1 gt MESSage STATE MESSage BOX Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MESSage SHOW MESSage CLEAR OFF or lt NR1 gt O removes the message window from the screen ON or lt 1 gt 0 displays the message window and its contents on the screen NEWpass No Query Form OPC Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples This command changes the password that enables access to password protected data The PASSWord command must be successfully executed before using this command or an execution error will be generated Miscellaneous NEWpass Qstring PUD PASSWord Qstring is the new password which can contain up to 16 characters NEWPASS mypassword creates a new password mypassword for accessing your protected data Generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register SESR when all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete The OPC query places the ASCII character 1 into the output queue when all such OPC commands are complete The OPC response is not available to read until all pending operations finish See page 3 1 Status and Events The OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program See page 3 7 Synchronization Methods Tektronix 40
276. ds or lags the reference waveform between two waveforms The measurement is made between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in degrees where 360 represents one waveform cycle 2 peak to peak finds the absolute difference between the maximum minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models POVershoot is the positive overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Positive Overshoot Maximum High Amplitude x100 PPULSECount is the count of positive pulses PWIdth positive width is the distance time between the middle reference default 5096 amplitude points of a positive pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse the waveform or gated region RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform The rise time is the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a low reference value default is 10 to a high reference value default 1s 90 This measurement is available only on DPO models RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE FREQUENCY defines the immediate measurement to be a frequency measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE might return MEASUREMENT
277. dth WIDth lt NR3 gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth TRIGger A PULSE Width WHEn lt NR3 gt specifies the pulse width in seconds TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 5 0E 6 sets the pulse width to 5 us TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WIDTH 2 0000E 9 indicating that the pulse width is set to 2 ns TRIGger A RUNT Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the current A runt trigger parameters Trigger TRIGger A RUNT TRIGGER A RUNT might return TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH1 POLARITY POSITIVE WHEN OCCURS WIDTH 4 0000E 9 TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Group Syntax Arguments 2 344 Sets or returns the polarity for the runt trigger Trigger TRIGger A RUNT POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive TRIGger A RUNT POLarity POSi tive indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling edge recrosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high threshold Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NEGative indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising edge recrosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low threshold EITher triggers on a runt of either polarity TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY NEGATIVE specifies that the polarity of the pulse runt trigger 1s negative TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY might return TRIGGER A RUNT POLARITY POSITIVE indicat
278. e analogous to changing the vertical position of the waveform YMUIt YOFf and YZEro are used to convert waveform record values to YUNit values using the following formula where dl is the data level curve in dlisa data point in CURVe value in units curve in dl YOFf in dl YMUIt YZEro in units NOTE For a given waveform record YMUIt YOFf and YZEro have to be a consistent set otherwise vertical cursor readouts and vertical measurements may give incorrect results Waveform Transfer WFMInpre YOFf lt NR3 gt WFMInpre YOFf WFMInpre BYT_Nr WFMInpre YMUIt WFMOutpre YOFf Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 385 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples WFMinpre YUNit Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre YZEro 2 386 lt NR3 gt is the vertical offset in digitizing levels WFMINPRE YOFF 50 specifies that the zero reference point for the incoming waveform is 50 digitizing levels 2 divisions for 8 bit data above the center of the data range WFMINPRE YOFF might return WFMINPRE YOFF 25 indicating the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels Sets or returns the vertical units of the incoming waveform Supported units are Hz A A A A V A W A dB A s AA AW AdB As B Hz IRE S s V V A V V V W V dB V s VV VW VdB Volts Vs W W A W V W W W dB W s WA WV WW WdB Ws dB dB A dB V
279. e and MAV bit Status Byte Register bit 4 are also cleared The MAV bit indicates that information is in the output queue The device clear DCL GPIB control message will clear the output queue and thus MAV CLS does not clear the output queue or MAV Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 109 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Examples CURSor Group Syntax Examples CURSor FUNCtion Group Syntax 2 110 CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an OPC This will happen if a single sequence acquisition operation is still being processed when the CLS command is executed Status and Error CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB CLS clears the oscilloscope status data structures Returns all of the current cursor settings Cursor CURSor CURSOR might return the following as the current cursor settings CURSOR FUNCTION SCREEN HBARS POSITION1 0 0000 POSITION2 0 0000 UNITS BASE CURSOR MODE INDEPENDENT VBARS 1 19 0006E 6 POSITION2 18 9994E 6 UNITS SECONDS Sets or returns the cursor type Cursors are attached to the selected waveform in Waveform mode and are attached to the display area in Screen mode Cursor CURSOr FUNCtion OFF SCREEN WAVEform CURSOr FUNCtion Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OFF removes the cursors
280. e data from bus lt x gt to a specified file and location SAVe IMAGe Saves a capture of the screen image into the specified file Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 28 Save and Recall Commands cont Command Description SAVe IMAGe FILEFormat SAVe IMAGe LAYout Sets or retums the file format to use for saving screen images when the file type cannot be determined from the given file name or when screen images are captured by using the front panel Sets or returns the layout to use for saved Screen images SAVe SETUp Saves the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location or file SAVe WAVEform Saves a waveform to one of four reference memory locations or a file SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat Sets or returns the format for saved waveforms SAVe WAVEform GATIng Specifies whether save waveform operations should save the entire waveform or a specified portion of the waveform SETUP lt x gt DATE SETUP lt x gt LABEL Returns the date when the specified oscilloscope setup was saved Sets or returns the specified oscilloscope setup label SETUP lt x gt TIME Returns the time when the specified oscilloscope setup was saved Search Command Group Use the commands in the Search Commands Group to seek out information in waveform records Search Commands Command Description SEARCH Returns all search related settings SEARCH SEARCH lt
281. e delay to source when making delay measurements MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 might return MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 1 indicating that Mathl is the immediate measurement source MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt For SOURcel Sets or returns the source for all single channel measurements For delay or phase measurements sets or returns the waveform to measure from 2 188 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order For SOUrce2 Sets or returns the waveform to measure to when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce x 2 3 4 lt gt MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt Arguments 1 4 or MATH is the source waveform D lt X gt is a digital waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer where x is the digital channel number Digital channels are available only on MSO models MEASUrement IMMed TYPe Sets or returns the immediate measurement type Digital channel measurements do not have a user settable midRef threshold If you specify a digital channel measurement that is not available on MSO models measurement error 2200 measurement system error occurs and 9 9e37 is returned Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed TYPe 11 AREa BURst CARea CMEan CRMs DELay FALL FREQUENCY HIGH LOW MAX mum MEAN MINImum NDUty
282. e event handling system operates Registers Overview The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional groups Status Registers contain information about the status of the oscilloscope They include the Standard Event Status Register SESR Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue They include the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Service Request Enable Register SRER Status Registers Standard Event Status Register SESR and the Status Byte Register SBR record certain types of events that may occur while the oscilloscope is in use IEEE Std 488 2 1987 defines these registers Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event such as an execution error or message available When an event of a given type occurs the oscilloscope sets the bit that represents that type of event to a value of one You can disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero See Enable Registers Reading the status registers tells you what types of events have occurred The Standard Event Status Register SESR The SESR records eight types of events that can occur within the oscilloscope Use the ESR query to read the SESR register Reading the register clears the bits of the register so that the register can accumulate information about new events NOTE TekVIS
283. e only one value which applies to all measurements Table 2 25 Measurement Commands Command Description MEASUrement Returns all measurement parameters MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot Removes the measurement snapshot display MEASUrement GATing Sets or returns the measurement gating MEASUrement IMMed Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters MEASUrement IMMed DELay Returns information about the immediate delay measurement Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 25 Command Groups 2 26 Table 2 25 Measurement Commands cont Command Description MEASUrement IMMed DELay DIRection Sets or returns the search direction to use for immediate delay measurements MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt Sets or returns the slope of the edge used for immediate delay from and to waveform measurements MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce Sets or returns the from source for all single channel immediate measurements MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Sets or returns the source to measure to for phase or delay immediate measurements MEASUrement IMMed TYPe Sets or returns the type of the immediate measurement MEASUrement IMMed UNIts Returns the units of the immediate measurement MEASUrement IMMed VALue Returns the value of the immediate measurement MEASUrement INDICators Returns all measurement indicator parameters MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt
284. e point is negative This measurement 18 available only on DPO models CMEan cycle mean measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models CRMs cycle rms measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models DELay measures the time between the middle reference default 5096 amplitude point of the source waveform and the destination waveform This measurement is available only on DPO models FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value default 15 90 to a low reference value default is 10 This measurement is available only on DPO models FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Frequency is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz Hz where 1 Hz 1 cycle per second HIGH measures the High reference 100 level sometimes called Topline of a waveform This measurement is available only on DPO models LOW measures the Low reference 096 level sometimes called Baseline of a waveform This measurement is available only on DPO models MAX imum finds the maximum amplitude This value is the most positive peak voltage found It is measured over the entire waveform or gated regio
285. e specified channel lt x gt CH3 OFFSet 2 0E 3 sets the offset for channel 3 to 2 mV CH4 OFFSet might return CH4 OFFSET 1 0000E 03 indicating that the offset for channel 4 is set to 1 mV Sets or returns the vertical position of channel lt x gt where x is the channel number The position value is applied to the signal before it is digitized Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to move up Decreasing the position value causes the waveform to move down The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which input signal values minus the present offset setting for that channel are displayed For example if the position for Channel 3 is set to 2 0 and the offset is set to 3 0 then input signals equal to 3 0 units are displayed 2 0 divisions above the center of the screen at 1 V div Vertical CH x POSition lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt POSition CH lt x gt OFFSet REF lt x gt VERTical POSition MATH 1 VERTical POSition lt NR3 gt is the position value for channel lt x gt in divisions from the center graticule The range is 8 to 8 divisions Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 101 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples CH2 POSition 1 3 positions the Channel 2 input signal 1 3 divisions above the center graticule CH1 POSition might return POSITION 1 3000 indicating that the current position of Channel 1 is 1 3 divisions below the center gra
286. e to the controller waveforms 1 through 4 DO D15 specifies which digital channel data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller channels 0 through 15 DIGital specifies that the Digital waveform data will be transferred from the oscilloscope to the controller Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples DATa STARt Group Syntax Related Commands DATa STOP Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DATA SOURCE might return DATA SOURCE REF3 indicating that the source for the waveform data which is transferred using a CURVe query is reference 3 DATA SOURCE CH1 specifies that waveform will be transferred in the next CURVe query Sets or returns the starting data point for incoming or outgoing waveform transfer This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to and from the oscilloscope Waveform Transfer DATa STARt lt NR1 gt DATa STARt CURVe DATa DATa STOP WFMInpre NR Pt WFMOutpre NR_ Pt NR1 is the first data point that will be transferred which ranges from 1 to the record length Data will be transferred from lt NR1 gt to DATa STOP or the record length whichever is less If NR1 is greater than the record length the last data point in the record is transferred DATa STARt and DATa STOP are order independent When DATa STOP is greater than DATa STARt the values will be swapped internally for the CURVE query DATA
287. e trigger level in volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Each channel can have an independent level Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt lt NR3 gt TTL SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel CH x NR3 specifies the trigger level in volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH 1 Group Syntax Arguments 2 266 Sets or returns the math waveform level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark x is the search number The value of MATH is 1 for all oscilloscopes Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LEVel MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LEVET MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the specified reference waveform level for an edge trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel REF lt x gt
288. e x is the measurement channel Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID x lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent lt gt lt NR3 gt is the mid reference level in percent MEASUrement SNAPShot No Query Form 2 212 Displays the measurement snapshot list on the oscilloscope screen The list contains the immediate values for all available measurements of the active signal Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Measurement MEASUrement SNAPShot MEASUrement STATIstics No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Clears all of the statistics accumulated for all periodic measurements MEASI through MEAS4 The query form returns statistic settings Measurement MEASUrement STATIstics RESET MEASUrement STATIstics RESET clears the measurements MEASUrement STATIstics MODE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Controls the operation and display of management statistics Measurement MEASUrement STATIStics MODE OFF ON MEASUrement STATIstics MODE MEASUrement STATIstics OFF turns all measurements off This is the default value ON turns on statistics and displays all statistics for each measurement MEASUREMENT STATISTICS OFF turns statistic measurements off MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE might return MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE ON indicating that measurement statistics are
289. e zero reference point for the incoming waveform is 1 5 V below the center of the data range given that WFMInpre YUNit is set to V WFMINPRE YZERO might return WFMINPRE YZEro 7 5000E 6 indicating that the zero reference for the incoming waveform is 7 5 uV below the center of the data range given that WFMInpre YUNit is set to V WFMOutpre Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns waveform transmission and formatting parameters for the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce command If the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command is not displayed the oscilloscope returns only the waveform transmission parameters BYT Nr BIT Nr ENCdg BN Fmt BYT Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre WFMOUTPRE might return the waveform formatting data as WFMOUTPRE BYT NR 2 BIT NR 16 ENCDG ASCII BN FMT RI BYT OR MSB WFID Chl DC coupling 100 0mv div 4 000us div 10000 points Sample mode NR PT 10000 PT FMT Y XUNIT s XINCR Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 387 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre BIT Nr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre BN Fmt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 388 4 0000E 9 XZERO 20 0000E 6 PT OFF 0 YUNIT V YMULT 15 6250E 6 YOFF 6 4000E 3 YZERO 0 0000 Sets and returns the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms contain as specified by the DATa SOUrce command Changing the value of WFMoOu
290. ean value accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MEAN might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MEAN 514 71E 09 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the minimum value for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS x MINImum MEASUREMENT MEAS1 MINIMUM might return MEASUREMENT 51 1 75 09 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 Group Syntax Arguments 2 198 Sets or returns the source for all single source measurements and specifies the source to measure from when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS x SOURCE 1 CH x MATH y REF x D lt X gt MEASUrement MEAS x SOURCE 1 CH x is an input channel waveform where x 1s the channel number MATH lt y gt is a math waveform where y is 1 REF x is a reference waveform where x is the reference channel number Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order D x is a digital waveform where x is the digital channel number Digital channels
291. el PERCent HIGH Sets or returns the top reference percent level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW Sets or returns the low reference percent level for rise time MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID Sets or returns the mid reference percent level for waveform measurements MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 Sets or returns the mid reference percent level for second waveform measurements MEASUrement SNAPShot Displays the measurement snapshot list MEASUrement STAT Istics MODE Turns measurement statistics on or off MEASUrement STAT Istics Clears or returns all of the statistics accumulated for all period measurements MEAS1 through MEAS4 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 27 Command Groups Table 2 25 Measurement Commands cont Command Description MEASUrement STATIstics WElghting Controls the responsiveness of the mean and standard deviation to waveform changes MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt Sets or returns the source for the current single channel measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt Sets or returns the source for the specified measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt Sets or returns the mid reference level for the specified channel in absolute volts MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID lt x gt Sets or returns the mid reference level for the specified channel in percent Miscellaneous Command Group 2 2
292. ence value default is 90 This measurement is available only on DPO models RMS amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE FREQUENCY defines measurement 2 as a measurement of the frequency of a waveform MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE RMS indicating that measurement is defined to measure the RMS value of a waveform MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the units associated with the specified measurement The measurement slots are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS x UNIts MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe MEASUREMENT MEAS1 UNITS might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 UNIts indicating units for measurement 1 are set to percent MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue Query Only 2 204 Group Returns a calculate value for the measurement specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 NOTE This is the same value as displayed on screen If measurement statistics are enabled a new value is calculated with every waveform addition this value is updated approximately every 1 3 second If you are acquiring a long acquisition record the oscilloscope may take longer to update Measurement Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syn
293. endor ID The Vendor ID for Tektronix is 0x699 or 1689 decimal Miscellaneous USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal USBTMC SERIALnumber USBTMC VENDORID DECimal USBTMC VENDORID HEXADECIMAL might return USBTMC VENDORID HEXADECIMAL 0x0699 indicating the vendor ID in hexadecimal is 0x0699 Sets or returns the Verbose state that controls the length of keywords on query responses Keywords can be both headers and arguments NOTE This command does not affect IEEE Std 488 2 1987 Common Commands those starting with an asterisk This command does affect the verbose state of both the USBTMC and VXI 11 interfaces Refer to the Introduction for information Miscellaneous VERBose OFF ON lt NR1 gt HEADer LRN SET Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples WAI No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OFF sets the Verbose state to false which returns minimum length keywords for applicable setting queries ON sets the Verbose state to true which returns full length keywords for applicable setting queries lt NR1 gt 0 returns minimum length keywords for applicable setting queries any other value returns full length keywords VERBOSE ON enables the Verbose state VERBOSE might return VERB 0 indicating that the Verbose state is disabled Prevents the oscil
294. er A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType NORMa PAYLoad NULL SYNC STARTup TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType NORMa specifies the normal frame type PAYLoad specifies the payload frame type NULL specifies the null frame type SYNC specifies the sync frame type Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order specifies the startup frame type TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE PAYLOAD sets the frame type to payload TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY FRAMETYPE NORMAL indicating the frame type is set to normal TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the CRC portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER CRC lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CRC lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the CRC portion of the binary header string TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CRC 11001100101 sets the CRC portion of the binary header string to 11001100101 TRIGGER 1 might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY HEADER CRC XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the CRC portion of the binary header string is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount Group Syntax Arguments Sets or retur
295. er is set to 1 the next most significant bit to 1 the next bit to 0 etc The power on default for DESER is all bits set if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the DESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle NOTE Setting the DESER and ESER to the same value allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the ESE command to set the ESER DESE 209 sets the DESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits DESE might return DESE 186 showing that the DESER contains the binary value 10111010 Sets the self test loop option Calibration and Diagnostic DIAg LOOP OPTion ALWAYS FAIL ONFAIL ONCE NTIMES ALWAYS continues looping until the self tests diagnostics are stopped via the front panel or by an oscilloscope command FAIL causes looping until the first self test diagnostic failure or until self tests diagnostics are stopped ONFAIL causes looping on a specific test group as long as a FAIL status is returned from the test ONCE executes self test diagnostics test sequence once NTIMES runs n number of loops Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples DIAG LOOP OPTION ONCE runs one loop of self tests DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes Sets the self test loop option to run N times Group Calibration and Diagnostic Syntax D
296. ere to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and CH lt x gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut CH x HIGH LOW SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut CH x HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D lt x gt 2 270 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the logic criteria for a logic pattern search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and D lt x gt is the digital channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut D x HIGH LOW SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut D x HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a logic pattern trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPUt MATH HIGH LOW X SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPUt MATH HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifi
297. ere x is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C ADDRess Qstring is up to 7 10 611 depending on the address mode that specifies the address The only allowed characters in the Qstring are 0 1 and X Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS VALUE 1011 sets the I2C address value to 1011 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C CONDition Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the trigger condition for an DC trigger Applies to bus x where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x I2C CONDition STARt STOP REPEATStart ACKMISS ADDRess DATA ADDRANDDATA TRIGger A BUS B x I2C CONDi tion STARt specifies a search based on start condition STOP specifies a search based on stop condition REPEATstart specifies a search based on repeat of start condition ACKMISS specifies a search based on missing acknowledgement condition ADDRess specifies a search based on address DATA specifies a search based on data ADDRANDDATA specifies a search based on address and data TRIGGER A BUS B1 I2C CONDITION START specifies start as the I C trigger condition TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection Conditio
298. es a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF x Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for a pattern trigger search to determine where to place a mark SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut REF x HIGH LOW x SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern INPut REF lt x gt HIGH specifies a high logic level LOW specifies a low logic level X specifies a don t care condition SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Group Sets or returns the condition for generating a logic pattern trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 271 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn TRUe FALSE LESSThan Than EQUal UNEQua1 SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn TRUe places a mark when the pattern becomes true FALSe places a mark when the pattern becomes false LESSThan places a mark if the specific pattern is true less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit command Than places a mark if the specific pattern is true longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x
299. es a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 0 5 sets the lower threshold to 0 5 volts TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 might return TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 1 3000 indicating the lower threshold is set to 1 3 volts Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 339 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX Group Syntax Arguments TRIGger A MODe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the lower threshold for the Auxiliary Input Used for the following trigger types Runt Slew Rate Trigger TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold level in volts Sets or returns the A trigger mode Trigger TRIGger A MODe AUTO NORMal TRIGger A MODe TRIGger A LEVel AUTO generates a trigger if one is not detected within a specified time period waits for a valid trigger event TRIGGER NORMAL specifies that a valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is generated TRIGGER A MODE might return TRIGGER A MODE NORMAL indicating that a valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is generated TRIGger A PULse Query Only 2 340 Returns the A pulse trigger parameters Tektronix 4000 Series Program
300. escription ACQuire Acquire button AUTOset Autoset button BMENU lt x gt Screen bottom menu buttons where lt x gt 1 for the left most bottom menu button and lt x gt 7 for the right most bottom menu button B lt x gt Bus select buttons where x 1 through 4 lt gt Channel select button where lt gt 1 for channel 1 lt gt 2 for channel 2 and so on CURsor Cursors button D15D0 D0 D15 button DEFaultsetup Default Setup button FINe Fine button FORCetrig Force Trig button HARDcopy Hardcopy button INTensity Intensity button MAGnify Magnify zoom button not the zoom pan knob MARk Mark Set Clear button MATh M button MENUOff Menu Off button MEASurement Measure button NEXt Next arrow button PAUse Play pause button PREv Previous arrow button REF R button RMENU lt x gt Screen side menu buttons where lt x gt 1 for the top most side menu button and lt x gt 5 for the bottom most side menu button RUnstop Run Stop button SAVEBUtton Save button SAVERecall Save Recall Menu button SEArch Search button Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 155 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples Table 2 37 FPAnel PRESS arguments cont Argument Description SELect Select button SETTO50 Set to 50 button SINGleseq Single button TESt Test button TRIGger Trigger Menu button UTILity Utility button FPANEL PRESS AUTOSET executes the oscilloscope Autoset func
301. etical Order lt NR1 gt a 0 turns off the B trigger any other value activates the B trigger TRIGGER B STATE ON sets the B trigger to active making it capable of causing trigger events TRIGGER B STATE might return TRIGGER B STATE Oindicating that the B trigger is inactive and that only the A trigger causes trigger events Sets or returns B trigger delay time The B Trigger time applies only if TRIGger B BY is set to TIMe Trigger TRIGger B TIMe lt NR3 gt TRIGger B TIMe TRIGger B BY TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt NR3 is the B trigger delay time in seconds TRIGGER B TIME 4E 6 sets the B trigger delay time to 4 us TRIGGER B TIME might return TRIGGER B TIME 16 0000E 9 indicating that the B trigger time is set to 16 ns Sets or returns the type of B trigger The only supported B trigger type is EDGE Trigger TRIGger B TYPe EDGE TRIGger B TYPe TRIGger A TYPe EDGE sets the B trigger type to edge Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 37 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE sets the B trigger type to edge TRIGGER B TYPE might return TRIGGER B TYPE EDGE TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets the upper threshold for the channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH x lt NR3 gt TTL TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Arguments specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4
302. ets the hold time for the setup and hold trigger to 3 ms TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the current hold time for the setup and hold trigger is 2 ns TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld SETTime lt NR3 gt TRIGger A SETHOld SETTime NR3 specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME 3 0E 6 specifies that the current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 3 us Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 35 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A SETHOLD SETTIME might return TRIGGER A LOGIC SETHOLD SETTIME 2 0000E 09 indicating that the current setup time for setup and hold trigger 15 2 ns TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or queries the threshold for the channel specified by x Affects all trigger types using the channel Trigger TRIGger A SETHOld THReshold CH x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A SETHOld THReshold CH x NR3 specifies the threshold voltage in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CH1 1 5 sets the channel 1 threshold to 1 5 volts TRIGGER A SETHOLD THRESHOLD CHL might return TRIGGER
303. ets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is slower than the time set by TRIGger A TRAnsition RISEFal1 DELTatime TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN FASTER Sets or returns the type of A trigger The five types of triggers are of Edge Logic Pulse Serial and Video Logic and Pulse triggers contain classes Logic triggers consist of State Pattern and SetHold classes Pulse triggers consist of Runt Width and Transition logic classes Once you have set the trigger type you may also need to identify the associated trigger class For details on selecting Logic and Pulse trigger classes see TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss and TRIGger A PULse CLAss respectively Trigger TRIGger A TYPe EDGe LOGic PULSe BUS VIDeo TRIGger A TYPe Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 355 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss TRIGger A PULse CLAss EDGe is a normal trigger A trigger event occurs when a signal passes through a specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the TRIGger A EDGE commands LOGic specifies that a trigger occurs when specified conditions are met and is controlled by the TRIGger A LOGIc commands PULSe specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified pulse is found and is controlled by the TRIGger A PULse commands BUS specifies that a trigger occurs when a
304. eturns in response to a query This is also the preferred format when sending the command to the oscilloscope though any of the formats will be accepted This documentation represents these arguments as described below Table 2 10 Numeric Arguments Symbol Meaning lt NR1 gt Signed integer value lt NR2 gt Floating point value without an exponent lt NR3 gt Floating point value with an exponent lt bin gt Digital data in binary format Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting by either rounding or truncating when an invalid number is input unless otherwise noted in the command description Quoted String Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string which is simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote or double quote The following is an example of a quoted string This is a quoted string This documentation represents these arguments as follows Table 2 11 Quoted String Argument Symbol Meaning lt QString gt Quoted string of ASCII text Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 7 Command Syntax 2 8 Block A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7 bit ASCII character set Follow these rules when you use quoted strings 1 Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string For example this is a valid string 2 You mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow t
305. f the acquisition interval is generated from the many data samples Acquisition ACQuire MODe SAMple PEAKdetect HIRes AVErage ENVelope ACQui re MODe ACQuire NUMAVg CURVe SAMp le specifies that the displayed data point value is the first sampled value that 1s taken during the acquisition interval In sample mode all waveform data has 8 bits of precision You can request 16 bit data with a CURVe query but the lower order 8 bits of data will be zero SAMple is the default mode PEAKdetect specifies the display of high low range of the samples taken from a single waveform acquisition The high low range is displayed as a vertical column that extends from the highest to the lowest value sampled during the acquisition interval PEAKdetect mode can reveal the presence of aliasing or narrow spikes HIRes specifies Hi Res mode where the displayed data point value is the average of all the samples taken during the acquisition interval This is a form Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order of averaging where the average comes from a single waveform acquisition The number of samples taken during the acquisition interval determines the number of data values that compose the average AVErage specifies averaging mode in which the resulting waveform shows an average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions The oscilloscope processes the number of waveforms you speci
306. face bus CAN specifies the Controller Area Network bus PARallel specifies the Parallel bus NOTE Parallel bus commands work with MSO4000 Series oscilloscopes only TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Sets or returns the CAN trigger condition for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 297 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B X CAN CONDi tion SOF FRAMEtype IDenti fier IDANDDATA EOF ACKMISS TRIGger A BUS B X CAN CONDi tion SOF enables triggering on the start of frame FRAMEtype enables triggering on the type of frame IDentifier enables triggering on a matching identifier DATA enables triggering on matching data IDANDDATA enables triggering on a matching identifier and matching data EOF enables triggering on the end of frame ACKMISS enables triggering on a missing acknowledge TRIGGER A BUS 1 CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS BI CAN CONDITION EOF indicating an end of file condition TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION DATA enables triggering on matching CAN data TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection 2 298 Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the CAN trigger data direction to be valid on a Read Write or Either condition for bus x where x is the bus numbe
307. fer WFMOutpre BYT Nr lt NR1 gt WFMOutpre BYT Nr DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BIT Nr lt NR1 gt is the number of bytes per data point and can be I or 2 WFMOUTPRE BYT NR 1 sets the number of bytes per outgoing waveform data point to 1 which is the default setting WFMOUTPRE BYT NR might return WFMOUTPRE BYT NR 2 indicating that there are 2 bytes per outgoing waveform data point Sets or returns which byte of binary waveform data is transmitted first during a waveform data transfer when data points require than one byte This specification only has meaning when WFMOutpre ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMOutpre BYT Nr is 2 Changing WFMOutpre BYT Or also changes DATa ENCdg if DATa ENCdg is not ASCIi Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre BYT Or LSB MSB WFMOutpre BYT Or Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 389 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre ENCdg Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BYT_Nr LSB specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR MSB sets the most significant outgoing byte of waveform data to be transmitted first WFMOUTPRE BYT_OR might return WFMOUTPRE BYT OR LSB indicating that the least significant data byte will be transmitted first Sets and queries the type of encodin
308. fied An empty string can be used for blank arguments Group Hard Copy Syntax HARDCopy PRINTer ADD lt name gt lt server gt lt address gt Arguments lt name gt is the name of the network printer queue server is the host name of the print LPR server lt address gt is the IP address of the print server HARDCopy PRINTer DELete No Query Form Removes a network printer from the list of available printers The printer name is case sensitive Group Hard Copy Syntax HARDCopy PRINTer DELete lt name gt Arguments lt name gt is the name of the printer to be deleted HARDCopy PRINTer LIST Query Only Returns a list of currently attached printers Group Hard Copy 2 160 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax HARDCOpy PRINTer LIST HARDCopy PRINTer REName No Query Form Renames a network printer on the list of available printers replacing the currently stored settings with the settings specified in this command Four arguments must be present but the arguments may be empty strings if the value for a field is to be deleted Group Hard Copy Syntax HARDCopy PRINTer REName lt name gt new name new server new address Arguments name is the name of the printer to be deleted new name is the new name for this printer new server is the new print server for this printer new address is the new IP address for the server
309. fies that the least significant byte will be expected first MSB specifies that the most significant byte will be expected first WFMINPRE BYT OR MSB sets the most significant incoming byte of incoming waveform data to be expected first WFMINPRE BYT OR might return WFMINPRE BYT OR LSB indicating that the least significant incoming CURVe data byte will be expected first Sets or returns the type of encoding for incoming waveform data Waveform Transfer WFMInpre ENCdg ASCii BINary WFMInpre ENCdg Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre NR Pt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMinpre PT Fmt Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMoOutpre ENCdg ASCi i specifies that the incoming data is in ASCII format BINary specifies that the incoming data is in a binary format whose further interpretation requires knowledge of BYT NR BIT NR BN FMT and BYT OR WFMINPRE ENCDG ASC sets the format of incoming waveform data to ASCII format WFMINPRE ENCDG might return WFMINPRE ENCDG BIN indicating that the incoming waveform data is in binary format Sets or returns the number of data points that are in the incoming waveform record Waveform Transfer WFMInpre NR Pt lt NR1 gt WFMInNpre NR Pt CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAV Eform SAVe WAV Eform FILEFormat WFMOutpre NR Pt lt NR1 gt is the number of data points if W
310. frame and grid only DISPLAY GRATICULE FRAme sets the graticule type to display the frame only DISPLAY GRATICULE might return DISPLAY GRATICULE FULL indicating that all graticule elements are selected Query Only Returns the display intensity settings Display DISplay INTENSITy DISPLAY INTENSITY might return DISPLAY INTENSITY WAVEFORM 30 GRATICULE 75 BACKLIGHT HIGH DiSplay INTENSITy BACKLight Group Syntax 2 136 Sets and returns the waveform backlight intensity settings Display DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight LOW MEDium HIGH DISplay INTENSITy BACKLight Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order DISPLAY INTENSITY BACKLIGHT might return DISPLAY INTEnSITY BACKLIGHT HIGH DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets and returns the display graticule intensity settings Display DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule lt NR1 gt DISplay INTENSITy GRAticule NR1 is the graticule intensity and ranges from 0 to 100 percent DISPLAY INTENSITY GRATICULE might return DISPLAY INTEnSITY GRATICULE 30 DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform Group Syntax Arguments Examples DISplay PERSistence Sets and returns the display waveform intensity settings Display DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform lt NR1 gt DISplay INTENSITy WAVEform NRI is the waveform intensity and ranges from 1 to 100 percent DISPLAY INTENSITY WAV
311. from 500 through 400K data points For additional information about valid data point ranges select Specifications from the Help menu and choose the Horizontal amp Acquisition tab HORizontal SAMPLERate Group Syntax Arguments HORizontal SCAle Group Syntax 2 168 Sets or returns the current horizontal sample rate Horizontal HORizontal SAMPLERate lt NR3 gt HORi zontal SAMPLERate lt NR3 gt is the sample rate in seconds Sets or returns the time base horizontal scale Horizontal HORizontal SCAle NR3 HORi zontal SCAle Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples ID Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples IDN Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR3 gt specifies the range from 400 ps to 1000 s depending on the record length HORIZONTAL SCALE 2E 6 sets the main scale to 2us per division HORIZONTAL SCALE might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2 0000E 06 indicating that the main scale is currently set to 2 us per division Returns identifying information about the oscilloscope and related firmware Miscellaneous ID IDN ID might return TEK DP04034 CF 91 1CT FV v1 0000 This indicates the oscilloscope model number configured format and firmware version number Returns the oscilloscope identification code Miscellaneous IDN ID IDN might return TEKT
312. from the Event Queue Events that follow an ESR read are put in the Event Queue but are not available until ESR is used again Event Handling Sequence The figure below shows how to use the status and event handling system In the explanation that follows numbers in parentheses refer to numbers in the figure Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 5 Status and Events Device Event Status Enable Register DESER Read using DESE Write using DESE Standard Event Status Register SESR Read using ESR Cannot be written Event Status Enable Register ESER Read using ESE Write using ESE Status Byte Register SBR Read using STB Cannot be written Service Request Enable Register SRER Read using SRE Write using SRE PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC 16 5 4 13 12 1 Jo PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Event Event Event 7 16 5 4 13 2 1 Jo PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Bye ESB MV ESB MV Figure 3 6 Status and Event Handling Process 3 6 Event Queue Output Queue When an event occurs a signal is sent to the DESER 1 If that type of event is enabled in the DESER that is if the bit for tha
313. from the display but does not change the cursor type SCREEN specifies both horizontal and vertical bar cursors which measure the selected waveform in horizontal and vertical units Use these cursors to measure anywhere in the waveform display area WAVEform specifies paired cursors in YT display format for measuring waveform amplitude and time In XY and XYZ format these cursors indicate the amplitude positions of an XY pair Chl vs Ch2 voltage where Chl is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis relative to the trigger CURSOR FUNCTION WAVEFORM selects the paired cursors for measuring waveform amplitude and time CURSOR FUNCTION might return CURSOr FUNCtion SCREEN indicating that the screen cursors are currently selected CURSor HBArs Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the current settings for the horizontal bar cursors Cursor CURSOr HBArs CURSOR HBARS might return the horizontal bar setting as CURSOR HBARS POSITION1 320 0000E 03 POSITION2 320 0000E 03 UNITS BASE CURSor HBArs DELTa Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Returns the vertical difference between the two horizontal bar cursors Cursor CURSOr HBArs DELTa CURSor HBArs UNIts A floating point value with an exponent Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 111 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples CURSOR HBARS DELTA might return CURSOR HBARS DELTA 5 0800E 00 indicating that the d
314. fy into the acquired waveform creating a running exponential average of the input signal The number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the average waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire NUMAVg command ENVelope specifies envelope mode where the resulting waveform shows the PEAKdetect range of data points from every waveform acquisition ACQUIRE MODE ENVELOPE sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that Is an envelope of many individual waveform acquisitions ACQUIRE MODE might return ACQuire MODe AVERAGE indicating that the displayed waveform is the average of the specified number of waveform acquisitions ACQuire NUMACq Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns ACQuire NUMAVg Returns the number of waveform acquisitions that have occurred since starting acquisition with the ACQuire STATE RUN command This value is reset to zero when any acquisition horizontal or vertical arguments that affect the waveform are changed The maximum number of acquisitions that can be counted is 232 1 Acquisition ACQui re NUMACq ACQuire S TATE ACQui re NUMACq might return ACQUIRE NUMACQ 350 indicating that 350 acquisitions have occurred since executing an ACQuire STATE RUN command Sets or returns the number of waveform acquisitions that make up an averaged waveform Use the ACQuire MODe command to enable the Average mode Sending this command is equivalent to turning a multipurpose knob
315. g ACQuire S TOPA fter Sets or returns the MagniVu feature which provides up to 32 times signal detail for fast viewing of short events This feature is not recommended for slow data formats such as RS232 NOTE MagniVu channel sampling is available on MSO oscilloscopes only MSO ACQuire MAGnivu lt NR1 gt OFF ON ACQuire MAGni vu lt NR1 gt 0 disables the MagniVu feature any other value turns this feature on ON enables the MagniVu feature OFF disables the MagniVu feature Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 57 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ACQuire MAXSamplerate Query Only Group Syntax Examples ACQuire MODe 2 58 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns the maximum real time sample rate which varies from model to model Acquisition ACQui re MAXSamplerate ACQUIRE MAXSAMPLERATE might return 2 5000E 9 in a DPO4034 indicating the maximum real time sample rate is 2 5GS s Sets or returns the acquisition mode of the oscilloscope for all live waveforms Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition intervals Each acquisition interval represents a time duration set by the horizontal scale time per division The oscilloscope sampling system always samples at the maximum rate so the acquisition interval may include than one sample The acquisition mode which you set using this ACQuire MODe command determines how the final value o
316. g for outgoing waveforms Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre ENCdg 5 11 WFMOutpre ENCdg DATa ENCdg WFMOutpre BYT Nr WFMOutpre BYT Or WFMOutpre BIT Nr WFMOutpre BN Fmt ASCii specifies that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII format Waveforms will be sent as NR1 numbers BINary specifies that outgoing data 1s to be in a binary format whose further specification is determined by WFMOutpre BYT Nr WFMOutpre BIT Nr WFMoOutpre BN Fmt and WFMOutpre BYT WFMOUTPRE ENCDG might return WFMOUTPRE ENCDG BIN indicating that outgoing waveform data will be sent in binary format WFMOUTPRE ENCDG ASC specifies that the outgoing waveform data will be sent in ASCII format WFMOutpre FRACTional Query Only 2 390 The set form of this command is ignored The query form always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displayed If the waveform Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments WFMOutpre NR Pt Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order is not displayed the query form generates an error and returns event code 2244 This command is for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre FRACTional DATa SOUrce Arguments are ignored Query Only Returns the number of points for the DATa SOUrce waveform that will be transmitted in response to a CURVe
317. g the identifier value is XXXXXX TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a Parallel trigger Applies to bus x where is the bus number Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B x PARallel VALue Qstring TRIGger A BUS B x PARallel vALue Arguments QString is the binary data string TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition Sets or returns the condition for a RS232C trigger where x 15 the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition RXSTArt RXDATA TXSTArt TXDATA TXENDPacket TRIGger A BUS B x RS232C CONDi tion Arguments RXSTArt specifies a search based on the RX Start Bit RXDATA specifies a search based on RX Data RXENDPacket specifies a search based on the RX End of Packet condition TXSTArt specifies a search base on the TX Start Bit TXDATA specifies a search based on TX Data TXENDPacket specifies a search based on the TX End of Packet condition Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 321 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string in Bytes for a RS232 Trigger if the trigger condition is RXDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires
318. ge STATE Controls the display of the message window Ethernet Command Group Use the commands in the Ethernet Command Group to set up the Ethernet remote interface Table 2 19 Ethernet Commands Command Description ETHERnet DHCPbootp Sets or returns the network initialization search for a DHCP BOOTP server ETHERnetDNS IPADDress Sets or returns the network Domain Name Server Dns IP address ETHERnet DOMAINname Sets or returns the network domain name ETHERnet ENET ADDress Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Sets or returns the remote interface gateway IP address ETHERnetHTTPPort Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP port value ETHERnet IPADDress ETHERnet NAME Sets or returns the IP address assigned to the oscilloscope Sets or returns the network name assigned to the oscilloscope Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 19 Command Groups Table 2 19 Ethernet Commands cont Command Description ETHERnet PASSWord Sets or returns the Ethernet access password ETHERnet PING Causes the oscilloscope to ping the gateway IP address ETHERnet PING STATUS Returns the results from pinging the gateway IP address ETHERnet SUBNETMask Sets or returns the remote interface subnet mask value File System Command Group 2 20 Use the commands in the File System Command Group to help you use Co
319. gger TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 EXT LINE AUX TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe TRIGger A EDGE COUPling CH1 CH4 specifies an analog input channel as the A edge trigger source 00 015 specifies a digital channel as the source if available on your oscilloscope EXT specifies an external trigger using the Aux In connector located on the front panel of the oscilloscope LINE specifies the AC line as the trigger source Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 327 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples AUX specifies the Auxiliary Input as the trigger source if available on your oscilloscope TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CHI sets channel 1 as the edge trigger source TRIGGER EDGE SOURCE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SOURCE CH1 indicating that channel 1 is the A edge trigger source TRIGger A HOLDoff Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns the A trigger holdoff parameters These parameters specify the time period during which the trigger circuitry is not looking to generate a trigger event Trigger TRIGger A HOLDoff TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe TRIGGER A HOLDOFF might return TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 900 0000E 09 BY DEFAULT indicating that the A edge trigger holdoff time by default is 900 ns TRIGger A HOLDoff TIMe Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 328 Sets or
320. ginning colon For example you can concatenate the commands ACQuire MODe ENVelope and ACQuire NUMAVg 8 into a single command ACQuire MODe ENVelope NUMAVg 8 The longer version works equally well ACQuire MODe ENVelope ACQuire NUMAVg 8 3 Never precede a star command with a colon ACQuire STATE 1 Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was not there so the commands ACQuire MODe ENVelope OPC NUMAVg 8 will set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions for averaging to 8 4 When you concatenate queries the responses to all the queries are concatenated into a single response message For example if the display graticule is set to Full and the display style is set to dotsonly the concatenated query DISplay GRAticule STYle DOTsonly will return the following If the header is on DISPLAY GRATICULE FULL DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 1 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax If the header is off FULL 1 5 Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same message For example ACQuire MODe SAMple NUMAVg STATE is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample The message then queries the number of acquisitions for averaging and the acquisition state Concatenated commands and queries are executed in the order received Here are some invalid concatenations DISPlay STYle NORMal ACQuire NUMAVg 8 no colon before ACQuire DI
321. guments Examples FILESystem CWD lt new working directory path gt lt new working directory path gt is a quoted string that defines the current working a directory name can be up to 128 characters FILESYSTEM TekScope images sets the current working directory to images FILESYSTEM CWD might return FILESYSTEM CWD D TekScope Waveforms indicating that the current working directory is set to Waveforms FILESystem DELEte No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 150 This command deletes a named file If you specify a directory name it will delete the directory and all of its contents the same as the RMDir command You can also specify the filename as to delete all of the files in the current or specified directory File System FILESystem DELEte file path FILESystem CWD FILESystem RMDir lt file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name The argument will delete all files and subdirectories within the current working directory FILESYSTEM DELETE NOT_MINE SET deletes the file named NOT MINE SET from the current working directory Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FILESystem DIR Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Returns Examples Returns a li
322. he previous rule For example this is an acceptable string 3 You can include a quote character within a string by repeating the quote For example here is a mark 4 Strings can have upper or lower case characters 5 If you use a GPIB network you cannot terminate a quoted string with the END message before the closing delimiter 6 Acarriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does not terminate the string The return is treated as another character in the string 7 The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is 1000 characters Here are some invalid strings Invalid string argument quotes are not of the same type B test lt EOI gt termination character is embedded in the string Several oscilloscope commands use a block argument form as defined in the table below Table 2 12 Block Argument Symbol Meaning lt NZDig gt A nonzero digit character in the range of 1 9 lt Dig gt A digit character in the range of 0 9 lt DChar gt A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00 through FF 0 through 255 decimal lt Block gt A block of data bytes defined as lt Block gt lt NZDig gt lt Dig gt lt Dig gt lt DChar gt 0 lt DChar gt lt terminator gt lt NZDig gt specifies the number of lt Dig gt elements that follow Taken together the lt NZDig gt and lt Dig gt elements form a decimal integer that specifies how many
323. he TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat command TRIGGER A VIDEO STANDARD NTSC sets the oscilloscope to trigger on NTSC standard video signals TRIGGER A VIDEO STANDARD might return TRIGger A VIDeo STANDARD HDTV indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on an HDTV format TRiGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the video field or line that the trigger detects Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD ODD EVEN ALLFields ALLLines NUMERic TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD ODD argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on interlaced video odd fields EVEN argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on interlaced video even fields ALLFields argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on all fields ALLLines argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on all video lines NUMERi c argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on the video signal line specified by the TRIGger A VIDeo LINE command Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 363 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGger B Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B BY Group Syntax Related Commands 2 364 TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD EVEN sets the video trigger so that it will trigger on even fields TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD might return TRIGGER A VIDEO FIELD ALLFIELDS indicating that the A video will trigger on all video fields Sets the B trigger level to 50 of minimum
324. he calibration values the WFMInpre query and the WFMOutpre query This query allows you to record or learn the current oscilloscope settings You can use these commands to return the oscilloscope to the state it was in when you made the SET query The SET query always returns command headers regardless of the setting of the HEADer command This is because the returned commands are intended to be sent back to the oscilloscope as a command string The VERBose command can still be used to specify whether the returned headers should be abbreviated or full length This command is identical to the LRN command Miscellaneous SET HEADer LRN VERBose SET returns a long response part of which could be as follows SET ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP STATE 1 MODE SAMPLE NUMENV INFINITE NUMAVG 16 SAMPLINGMODE RT HEADER 1 LOCK NONE LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERBOSE 1 ALIAS STATE 0 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE NORMAL DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 0 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 0 0000 CLOCK 1 GRATICULE FULL INTEnSITY WAVEFORM 30 GRATICULE 75 BACKLIGHT HIGH HARDCOPY INKSAVER OFF LAYOUT LANDSCAPE PREVIEW 0 SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT BMP SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL SAVE ASSIGN TYPE SETUP TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE LEVEL 20 0000E 3 LEVEL CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 cH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 1 4000 CH2 800 0000E 3 CH3 800 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 TRIGGER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 cH4 0 00
325. he returned value from the Event Queue Group Status and Error Syntax EVENT Related Commands Examples 2 146 ALLEv CLS DESE ESE ESR EVMsg SRE STB EVENT might return EVENT 110 showing that there was an error in a command header See page 3 12 Messages Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual EVMsg Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples EVQty Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Removes a single event code from the Event Queue that 1s associated with the results of the last ESR read and returns the event code along with an explanatory message For information see Event Handling Status and Error EVMsg ALLEv CLS DESE ESE ESR EVENT SRE STB The event code and message in the following format Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt QString gt lt Event Code gt lt Comma gt lt QsString gt lt QString gt lt Message gt lt Command gt where lt Command gt is the command that caused the error and may be returned when a command error is detected by the oscilloscope As much of the command will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60 character limit of the lt Message gt and lt Command gt string combined The command string is right justified EVMSG might return EVMSG 110 Command header error Returns the number of event codes in the Event Queue This is useful when
326. he search source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the condition for generating a pulse width search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WHEn LESSthan than EQual UNEQual SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A PULSEWi dth wHEn LESSThan places a mark if the pulse width is less than the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth command Than places a mark if the pulse width is true longer than the specified time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth command EQUal places a mark if the pulse width is equal to the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth command within tolerance of 5 UNEQual places a mark if the pulse width is unequal to the time the time set by the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth command within a tolerance of 5 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth 2 276 Group Syntax Sets or returns the pulse width setting for a pulse width trigger search to determine where to place a mark x is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWi dth WIDth Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Man
327. he specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the channel waveform upper threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all channel searches that uses an upper threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and lt gt is the channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH x TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH x TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH Sets or returns the math waveform upper threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all math waveform searches that uses an upper threshold lt x gt is the search number Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 285 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A UPPerthreshold MATH TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments SELect Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 286 Sets or returns the reference waveform upper threshold to determine where to place a mark This setting is ap
328. he vertical units for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer YUNi t DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE YUNIT might return WFMOUTPRE YUNIT dB indicating that the vertical units for the waveform are measured in decibels WFMOutpre YZEro Query Only Group 2 396 Returns the vertical offset in units specified by WFMOutpre YUNit for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on See the description of WFMInpre Y ZEro to see how this offset is used to convert waveform sample values to volts Waveform Transfer Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax wFMOutpre YZEro Related Commands DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre YUNit Examples WFMOUTPRE YZERO might return WFMOUTPRE YZERO 100 0000E 3 indicating that vertical offset is set to 100 mV ZOOm Query Only Returns the current vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display Group Zoom Syntax zoom Examples ZOOM might return ZOOM MODE 1 GRATICULE SIZE 80 SPLIT EIGHTYTWENTY ZOOM 200 1 STATE 1 SCALE 400 0000 12 5 46 8986 FACTOR 50 0000E 3 HORIZONTAL POSITION 46 8986 SCALE 40 0 0000E 12
329. here x is either I or 2 2 118 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar THETA POSITION lt x gt CURSor XY POLar THETA UNIts Query Only Returns the cursor coordinate units Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar THETA UNItS CURSor XY PRODUCT DELta Query Only Returns the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position The AX x AY value is calculated as X2 X1 x Y2 Y1 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY PRODUCT DELta CURSor XY PRODUCT POSITION lt x gt Query Only Returns the position of the X or Y cursor used to calculate the X Y cursor measurement Position 1 x Y1 Position 2 X2 x Y2 The cursor is specified by x which can be 1 or 2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY PRODUCT POSITION lt x gt CURSor XY PRODUCT UNIts Query Only Returns the XY cursor product units Group Cursor Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 119 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax CURSor XY PRODUCT UNIts CURSor XY RATIO DELta Query Only Returns the ratio of the difference between the cursors X position and cursor Y position AY AX The ratio is calculated as Y2 Y1 X2 X1 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY RATIO DELta CURSor XY RATIO POSITION lt x gt Query Only Returns the X horizontal or Y vertical position for the specified cursor which can be 1 X or
330. hold Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 30 Trigger Commands cont Command Command Groups Description TRIGger A SETHold DATa Returns the voltage threshold and data source for the setup hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and hold trigger TRIGger A SETHold HOLDTime Sets or returns the hold time for the setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A SETHold SETTime Sets or returns the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or queries the threshold for the channel TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets the upper threshold for the channel selected TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall Returns the delta time polarity and both upper and lower threshold limits for the transition time trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Sets or returns the delta time used in calculating the transition value TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Sets or returns the polarity for the A pulse transition trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Sets or returns the source for transition trigger TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Sets or
331. hold level in volts TRIGger B LOWerthreshold D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger B STATE Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 370 Sets or queries the lower threshold for the digital channel selected Each channel can have an independent level Used in runt and slew rate as the lower threshold Used for all other trigger types as the single level threshold MSO TRIGger B LOWerthreshold D x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger B LOWerthreshold D x lt NR3 gt specifies the threshold in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 might return TRIGGER B LOWERTHRESHOLD D1 1 4000 indicating the threshold is set to 1 4 volts Sets or returns the state of B trigger activity If the B trigger state is on the B trigger is part of the triggering sequence If the B trigger state is off then only the A trigger causes the trigger event Trigger TRIGger B STATE ON OFF lt NR1 gt TRIGger B STATE TRIGger A MODe ON specifies that the B trigger is active and in causes trigger events conjunction with the A trigger OFF specifies that only the A trigger causes trigger events Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples TRIGger B TIMe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger B TYPe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphab
332. ht return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION BACKWARDS indicating that the current search direction is backwards MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the slope of the edge used for the delay from or to waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement The waveform is specified by MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt FALL RISe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt x specifies which waveform to use where x 1 is the from waveform and x 2 is the to waveform FALL specifies the falling edge RISe specifies the rising edge MEASUREMENT MEAS1 DELAY EDGE1 RISE specifies that the from waveform rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement MEASUREMENT 51 DELAY EDGE1 returns either RISE or FALL MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MAXimum Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the maximum value found for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 Measurement MEASUrement MEAS x MAXimum MEASUREMENT MEAS3 MAXIMUM might return MEASUREMENT MEAS3 MAXIMUM 4 18 9 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 197 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the m
333. ht return BUSY 1 indicating that the oscilloscope is currently busy Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 93 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CAL Query Only Group Syntax Returns Examples Performs an internal self calibration and returns the oscilloscope calibration status NOTE Disconnect or otherwise remove all input signals prior to starting self calibration The self calibration can take several minutes to complete No other commands are executed until calibration is complete Calibration and Diagnostic CAL lt NR1 gt 1 indicates the calibration did not complete successfully NRI 0 indicates the calibration completed without errors CAL starts the internal signal path calibration and might return 0 to indicate that the calibration was successful CALibrate FACtory STATus Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the factory calibration status value saved in nonvolatile memory Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate FACtory STATus CALIBRATE FACTORY STATUS might return CALIBRATE FACTORY STATUS PASS indicating that factory calibration passed CALibrate INTERNal No Query Form Group Syntax 2 94 This command starts a signal path compensation Calibration and Diagnostic CALibrate INTERNal Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order None CALIBRATE INTERNAL starts a serial path
334. i tion lt NR3 gt is the horizontal position as a percent of the upper window Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 399 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt SCAle Sets or returns the horizontal scale of the zoom box lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax 200 200 lt gt 5 lt NR3 gt ZOOm ZOOM x SCAle Arguments NR3 is the horizontal scale of the zoom box ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt STATE Sets or returns the specified zoom on or off where x is the integer 1 representing the single zoom window lt x gt can only be 1 Group Zoom Syntax 200 200 lt gt 5 ON OFF lt NR1 gt ZOOm ZOOM lt x gt STATE Arguments turns Zoom on OFF turns Zoom 1 off lt NR1 gt 0 disables the specified zoom any other value enables the specified zoom Examples Z00M ZOOMI STATE ON turns Zoom on 2 400 ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE might return ZOOM ZOOM1 STATE 1 indicating that Zooml is on Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events The oscilloscope provides a status and event reporting system for the Ethernet GPIB with the TEK USB 488 Adapter and USB interfaces This system informs you of certain significant events that occur within the oscilloscope The oscilloscope status handling system consists of five 8 bit registers and two queues for each interface The remaining Status subtopics describe these registers and components They also explain how th
335. ic NULLFRDynami c sets the FLEXRAY error type for a trigger to NULLFRDynamic TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE SYNCFRAME sets the FLEXRAY trigger type is SY NCFRAME TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER indicating the FLEXRAY trigger type is CRCHeader Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY frame ID high value Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID HIVALue lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the binary frame id high value TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE 11001100101 sets the frame id high value to 11001100101 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the frame id high value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID QUALIifier Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the FLEXRAY frame ID qualifier Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID QUALi fier iLESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID QUALi fier LESSThan sets the frame id qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the frame id qualifier to grea
336. ical Order MESSage SHOW 2 216 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Clears the contents of the message window and displays the new message in the window Display MESSage SHOW lt QString gt MESSage SHOW MESSage BOX MESSage CLEAR MESSage S TATE Qstring is the message and can include any of the characters shown in the Character Set Appendix A The maximum length of the message is 1000 characters the instrument ignores longer strings The message box size is set to fit the message You can also set the message area height and width using the MESSage BOX command The length of the message that fits in the message area depends on the contents of the message because the width of characters varies If the message exceeds the limits of the message box either horizontally or vertically the portion of the message that exceeds the limits will not be displayed The message string itself is not altered The entire message can be returned as a query response regardless of what is displayed in the message box The message is left justified and is displayed on a single line starting with the top most line in the window A new line character can be embedded in the string to position the message on multiple lines You can also use white space and tab characters to position the message within a line Text which does not fit within the message box is truncated Defining a message box text string erases any previously displ
337. icate when certain oscilloscope operations have completed and by setting the Event Status Enable Register ESER to report OPC in the Event Status Bit ESB of the Status Byte Register SBR and setting the Service Request Enable Register SRER to generate service request upon a positive transition of the ESB a service request SRQ interrupt can be generated when certain operations complete as described in this section The following oscilloscope operations can generate an OPC m ACQuire STATE non zero 1 gt ON only when in single sequence acquisition mode m CALibrate FACtory STARt CALibrate FACtory CONTinue CALibrate FACtory PREVious m HARDCopy HARDCopy START m DIAg STATE EXECute m SAVe IMAGe lt file as quoted string gt SAVe SETUp file as quoted string gt B RECAII SETUp file as quoted string gt m SAVe WAVEform lt file as quoted string gt B RECAII WAVEform lt file as quoted string gt m CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss EXECute AUXin PRObe DEGAUss EXECute m TEKSecure Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 3 7 Status and Events For example a typical application might involve acquiring a single sequence waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform You could use the following command sequence to do this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Acquire w
338. ifference between the two cursors is 5 08 CURSor HBArs POSITION lt x gt Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples CURSor HBArs UNIts Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 112 Sets or returns the horizontal bar cursor position relative to ground which is expressed in vertical units usually volts The cursor is specified by x which can be 1 or 2 Cursor CURSor HBArs POSITION lt X gt lt NR3 gt CURSOr HBArs POSITION lt x gt CURSor FUNCtion lt NR3 gt specifies the cursor position relative to ground CURSOR 1 25 0E 3 positions Cursor 1 of the horizontal cursors at 25 mV CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 might return CURSOR HBARS POSITION2 64 0000E 03 indicating that Cursor 2 of the horizontal bar cursors is at 64 mV Sets or returns the units for the horizontal bar cursors Cursor CURSOr HBArs UNIts BASE PERcent CURSor HBArs UNIts BASE selects the vertical units for the selected waveform PERcent selects ratio cursors CURSOR HBARS UNITS might return CURSOR HBARS UNITS BASE indicating that the units for the horizontal bar cursors are base Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor HBArs USE No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples CURSor MODe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets the horizontal bar cursor measurement scale This comman
339. igger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in Bytes for a RX RS232 Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string fora RX RS232 trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt R5232C TX DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string for a TX RS232 trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for a RS232 trigger if the trigger condition involves TX TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for SPI triggering TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa IN MISO VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for SPI trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 41 Command Groups 2 42 Table 2 30 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa OUT MOSI VALue Sets or returns the binary data string used for the SPI trigger TRIGger A BUS B x SPI DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SPI trigger TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Sets or returns the source for a bus trigger TRIGger A EDGE Returns the source coupling and source for the edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE COUPIing Sets or returns the type of coupling for the A edge trigger TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the slope for the A e
340. igger Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1l SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFall SoUrce CH1 CH4 specifies one of the input channels TRIGGER A TRAnSITION SOURCE CH4 sets channel 4 as the source for the transition trigger TRIGGER A TRAnSITION SOURCE might return TRIGGER A TRANSITION SOURCE 2 indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A transition trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A TYPe Group Syntax Sets or returns whether to check for a transitioning signal that is faster or slower than the specified delta time Trigger TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 wHEn SLOwer FASTer EQual UNEQua TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 wHEn FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is faster than the time set by TRIGger A TRAnsition RISEFal1 DELTatime SLOwer sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is slower than the time set by TRIGger A TRAnsition RISEFal1 DELTatime EQua sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is equal to the time set by TRIGger A TRAnsition RISEFallj DELTatime UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the signal transition time is not equal to the time set by TRIGger A TRAnsition RISEFal1 DELTatime TRIGGER A TRANSITION WHEN SLOWER s
341. ight return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE CH1 EDGE RISE THRESHOLD 100 0000E 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE CH2 THRESHOLD 80 0000E 3 TRIGGER A SETHOLD HOLDTIME 20 0000E 9 SETTIME 8 0000E 9 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk Query Only Returns the clock edge polarity voltage threshold and source input for setup and hold triggering Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk Examples TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK SOURCE EXT EDGE FALL THRESHOLD 1 4000 TRIGger A SETHold CLOCK EDGE Sets or returns the clock edge polarity for setup and hold triggering Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk EDGE FALL RISe TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk EDGE Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 347 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments FALL specifies polarity as the clock falling edge RISe specifies polarity as the clock rising edge Examples TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE specifies the polarity as the clock rising edge TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD CLOCK EDGE RISE indicating that polarity 18 specified as the clock rising edge TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce Sets or returns the clock source for the setup and hold triggering Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 AUX EXT TRIGger A SETHOld CLOCk SOUrce Related Commands
342. include the capability to substitute parameters into alias bodies To use Alias commands first define the alias then turn on the alias state Alias Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 61 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples ALIas lt NR1 gt ALIas ALlas DEFine ALIas STATE OFF turns alias expansion off If a defined alias is sent when ALlas is off a command error 110 will be generated ON turns alias expansion on When a defined alias is received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed lt NR1 gt 0 disables alias mode any other value enables alias mode ALIAS ON turns the alias feature on When a defined alias is received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed ALIAS might return ALIAS 1 indicating that the alias feature is on ALlas CATalog Query Only Group Syntax Examples ALlas DEFine 2 62 Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels separated by commas If no aliases are defined the query returns the string Alias ALIas CATalog ALIAS CATALOG might return the string ALIAS CATALOG SETUP1 TESTMENUL DEFAULT showing that there are three aliases named SETUP1 TESTMENUI and DEFAULT Assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label These messages are then substituted for the alias whenever it is received as a c
343. ing is a quoted string that is the binary high value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS BL FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE 11001010 sets the high value 11001010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS BL FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the high value is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet 2 244 Group Sets or returns the offset of the data string in bytes to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray DATa OFFSet lt NR1 gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFFSet NR1 is the FLEXRAY data offset in bytes A byte offset of 1 signifies don t care and no byte offset is used The instrument will trigger or match any byte value that fits SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER 10 sets the FLEXRAY data offset to 10 bytes SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 DATA OFFSET might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 0 indicating the offset is set to 0 bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUALIifier Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data qualifier
344. ing that the Horizontal Delay Mode is off and that the horizontal position command operates like the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel HORizontal DELay TIMe Group Syntax Sets or returns the horizontal delay time The amount of time the acquisition is delayed depends on sample rate and record length Horizontal HORizontal DELay TIMe NR3 HORizontal DELay TIMe Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 163 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments is the delay in seconds Examples HORizontal DELay TIME 0 3 sets the delay of acquisition data so that the resulting waveform is centered 300 ms after the trigger occurs HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAGnivu Query Only Returns the record length of the Magni Vu digital acquisition Group Horizontal Syntax X HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAGnivu HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAIN Query Only Returns the record length of the main digital acquisition Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAIN HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAGnivu Query Only Returns the sample rate of the MagniVu digital acquisition Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAGni vu HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAIN Query Only Returns the sample rate of the main digital acquisition Group Horizontal Syntax HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAIN 2 164 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command
345. ing that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is positive TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the source for the A runt trigger Trigger TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4j TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies the input channel number depending on the model of the oscilloscope TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE sets channel 4 as the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE might return TRIGGER A RUNT SOURCE CH2 indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A pulse trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn Group Syntax Related Commands Sets or returns the type of pulse width the trigger checks for when it detects a runt Trigger TRIGger A RUNT WHEn LESSthan than EQual UNEQual OCCURS TRIGger A RUNT WHEn TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 345 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples OCCURS argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable width occurs LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if the a runt pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command than argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger 1f the a runt pulse is detected with width than the time set by the TRIGger A RUNT WIDth command EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a runt pulse is detected with width equal to the time period specified in TRI
346. iod to 50 5 us TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM LINEPERIOD might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM LINEPERIOD 63 5600E 6 indicating the video line period is set to 63 56 LS TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTom SCAN Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 358 Sets or returns the horizontal line scan rate of the A video trigger Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm SCAN RATEL5K 20 RATE25K RATE35K 5 TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm SCAN 15 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 15 kHz through 20 kHz This is the standard broadcast rate 20 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 20 kHz through 25 kHz RATE25 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 25 kHz through 35 kHz RATE35 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 35 kHz through 50 kHz Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 50 sets the range of the video line scan rate to 50 kHz through 65 kHz TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN 15 sets the scan rate of the A trigger custom video to Rate 1 which is 15 kHz to 20 kHz standard broadcast rate TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN might return TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SCAN RATE20 indicating that the video line rate for the A trigger custom video is set to Rate20 which is 20 kHz to 25 kHz TRIGger A VIDeo CUST
347. is message is part of the message string and is separated from the main message by a semicolon Each message is the result of an event Each type of event sets a specific bit in the SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER Thus each message is associated with a specific SESR bit In the message tables the associated SESR bit is specified in the table title with exceptions noted with the error message text The following table shows the messages when the system has no events or status to report These have no associated SESR bit Table 3 3 No Event Messages Code Message 0 No events to report queue empty 1 No events to report new events pending ESR The following table shows the command error messages generated by improper syntax Check that the command is properly formed and that it follows the rules in the section on command Syntax Table 3 4 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 Code Message 100 Command error 101 Invalid character Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 4 Command Error Messages CME Bit 5 cont Code Message 102 Syntax error 103 Invalid separator 104 Data type error 105 GET not allowed 108 Parameter not allowed 109 Missing parameter 110 Command header error 112 Program mnemonic too long 113 Undefined header 120 Numeric data error 121 Invalid character in numeric
348. it will lose responses to earlier queries CAUTION When a controller sends a query an lt gt and a second query the oscilloscope normally clears the first response and outputs the second while reporting a Query Error QYE bit in the ESER to indicate the lost response A fast controller however may receive a part or all of the first response as well To avoid this situation the controller should always read the response immediately after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL Device Clear before sending the second query Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Event Queue Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 33 events If than 32 events stack up in the Event Queue the 32nd event 15 replaced by event code 350 Queue Overflow Read the Event Queue with the EVENT query which returns only the event number with the EVMSG query which returns the event number and a text description of the event or with the ALLEV query which returns all the event numbers along with a description of the event Reading an event removes it from the queue Before reading an event from the Event Queue you must use the ESR query to read the summary of the event from the SESR This makes the events summarized by the ESR read available to the EVENT and EVMSG queries and empties the SESR Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous ESR reads but not read
349. izing level in units specified by WFMoOutpre YUNIt for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error is generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on See the description of WFMInpre Y MUIt to see how this scale factor 15 used to convert waveform sample values to volts Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YMU1t DATa SOUrce WFMInpre Y MUIt WFMOUTPRE YMULT might return WFMOUTPRE YMULT 4 0000E 3 indicating that the vertical scale for the corresponding waveform is 100 mV div for 8 bit waveform data WFMOutpre YOFf Query Only Returns the vertical position in digitizing levels for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 395 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Examples See the description of WFMInpre YOFf to see how this position is used to convert waveform sample values to volts Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre YOFf DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BYT Nr WFMOUTPRE YOFF might return WFMOUTPRE YOFF 50 0000E 0 indicating that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing levels 2 divisions below center screen for 8 bit waveform data WFMOutpre YUNit Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Returns t
350. l bus waveforms and digital channels for MSO models to individual files named D test folder testl lt wfm gt isf for example test1_CH1 isf SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Specifies or returns the file format for saved waveforms Waveform header and timing information is included in the resulting file of non internal formats The oscilloscope saves DPO waveforms as a 500 x 200 matrix with the first row corresponding to the most recently acquired data The values specified by DATa STARt and DATa STOP determine the range of waveform data to output In the event that DATa STOP value is greater than the current record length the current record length determines the last output value Save and Recall SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat INTERNal SPREADSheet SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat CURVe DATa DATa STARt DATa STOP SAVe WAVEform WFMlInpre NR Pt WFMOutpre NR_ Pt specifies that waveforms are saved in an internal format using a isf filename extension These files can be recalled as reference waveforms When this argument is specified the settings specified via the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands have no meaning as the entire waveform is saved SPREADSheet specifies that waveform data is saved in a format that contains comma delimited values These waveform data files are named using the csv filename extension Saving waveforms in CSV format enables spreadsheet
351. ld to determine where to place a mark Search lt x gt is the search number which is always 1 REF lt x gt is the reference waveform number MSO oscilloscopes only Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHOold THReshold REF x lt NR3 gt SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHOold THReshold REF lt x gt NR3 is the lower threshold in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the transition time setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt 1s the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj DELTatime NR3 SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1l DELTatime NR3 specifies the transition time in seconds SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the polarity setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj POLarity EITher NEGative POSitive SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 POLarity POSitive specifies that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower most negative to higher most positive level for transition
352. loscope from executing further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the oscilloscope with your application program See page 3 7 Synchronization Methods Status and Error WAI BUSY OPC WAI prevents the oscilloscope from executing any further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete WAVFrm Query Only Group Syntax Returns WFMOutpre and CURVe data for the waveform as specified by the DATA SOUrce command This command is equivalent to sending both WFMoOutpre and CURVe with the additional provision that the response to WAVFrm is guaranteed to provide a synchronized preamble and curve The source waveform as specified by DATA SOURCE must be active or the query will not return any data and will generate an error indicator Waveform Transfer WAVFrm Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 377 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands Examples CURVe DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre WAVFRM might return the waveform data as WFMOUTPRE BYT NR 1 BIT NR 8 ENCDG ASCII BN FMT RI BYT OR MSB WFID Chl DC coupling 100 0mv div 4 000us div 10000 points Sample mode NR 20 FMT Y XUNIT s XINCR 4 0000E 9 XZERO 20 0000E 6 PT OFF 0 YUNIT V YMULT 4 0000E 3 YOFF 0 0000 YZERO 0 0000 CURVE 2 1 4 2 4 3 0 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 3 5 6 6 7 3
353. lt gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPUt CLOCK EDGE FALL RISe SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCK EDGE RISe specifies a rising edge FALL specifies a falling edge SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce 2 268 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the clock source definition for a logic trigger search lt x gt is the search number If a clock source is defined then the logic search is determined by the state of the other inputs at the clock transition If no clock source is defined then the logic search is determined only by the state of the inputs Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 REF NONe SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut CLOCk SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies a channel input as the clock source where x 1 2 3 or 4 MATH specifies the math waveform as the clock source REF specifies the reference waveform as the clock source NONe specifies no clock source Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the waveform logic criteria for a trigger search SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and D lt x gt is the digital channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIC INPut D
354. lt DChar gt elements follow Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax Block Argument a ALIas DEFINE SETUp1 231AUTOSet EXECute SELect REF1 ON Block Header Specifies Data Length Specifies Number of Length Digits that Follow Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 9 Command Syntax 2 10 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups This manual lists the Tektronix 4000 Series IEEE488 2 commands in two ways First it presents them by functional groups Then it lists them alphabetically The functional group list starts below The alphabetical list provides detail on each command See page 2 57 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Acquisition Command Group Use the commands in the Acquisition Command Group to set up the modes and functions that control how the oscilloscope acquires signals input to the channels and processes them into waveforms Using the commands in this group you can do the following Start and stop acquisitions Control whether each waveform is simply acquired averaged or enveloped over successive acquisitions of that waveform Set the controls or conditions that start and stop acquisitions Control acquisition of channel waveforms Set acquisition parameters Table 2 13 Acquisition Commands Command Description ACQuire Returns acquisition parameters ACQuire MAGnivu Sets or returns the MagniVu feature ACQuire MAXSamplerate Re
355. lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF lt x gt Sets or returns the Boolean logic criteria for the logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Sets or returns the condition for generating a logic pattern search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the channel threshold level for an logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold MATH Sets or returns the math waveform threshold level for logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt Sets or returns the reference waveform threshold level for logic search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the lower waveform threshold level for all channel waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold MATH Sets or returns the lower waveform threshold level for all math waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF lt x gt Sets or retur
356. me that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger Trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn LESSLimit NR3 TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn LESSLimit lt NR3 gt specifies the maximum amount of time to hold the pattern true TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 10 0 00 sets the maximum time that the selected pattern may hold true and generate an A logic pattern trigger to 10 s TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN LESSLIMIT 8 0000E 9 indicating that the selected pattern may hold true for up to 8 ns and still generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC PATtern WHEn MORELimit lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit lt NR3 gt specifies the minimum amount of time to hold the pattern true TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 10 0E 00 sets the minimum time that the selected pattern may hold true and generate an A logic pattern trigger to 10 s TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT might return TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN MORELIMIT 8 0000E 9 indicating that the selected pattern must hold
357. measurement error 2200 measurement system error occurs and 9 9e37 is returned Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe 11 AREa BURst CARea CMEan CRMs DELay FALL FREQUENCY HIGH LOW MAX imum MEAN MINImum NDUty NEDGECount NOVershoot NPULSECount NWIdth PDUty PEDGECount PERIod PK2Pk POVershoot PPULSECount PwIdth RISe RMS MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 201 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 2 202 Arguments AMPT i tude measures the amplitude of the selected waveform In other words it measures the high value less the low value measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Amplitude High Low AREa measures the voltage over time The area is over the entire waveform or gated region and is measured in volt seconds The area measured above the ground is positive while the area below ground is negative This measurement is available only on DPO models BURst measures the duration of a burst The measurement is made over the entire waveform or gated region CARea cycle area measures the voltage over time In other words it measures in volt seconds the area over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region The area measured above the common reference point is positive while the area below the common referenc
358. mer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger A PULse TRIGger A EDGE TRIGger A LOGIc TRIGGER A PULSE might return TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS TRANSITION TRIGger A PULse CLAss Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the type of pulse on which to trigger Trigger TRIGger A PULSe CLAss RUNt WIDth TRAnsition TRIGger A PULSe CLASS TRIGger A RUNT TRIGger A PULSEWIDth TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall TRIGger A TY Pe RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first WIDth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either inside or outside the specified time limits TRAnsition triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two threshold crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS WIDTH specifies a width pulse for the A trigger TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS might return TRIGGER A PULSE CLASS WIDTH indicating that a pulse was found that is of the specified polarity and width TRIGger A PULSEWIDth Query Only Group Returns the width parameters for the pulse width trigger Trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 341 Commands Listed in Alphabeti
359. mer Manual Table 2 31 Vertical Commands cont Command Command Groups Description CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE Returns the state of the probe degauss CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange Sets or returns the range on a TekVPI probe attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN Sets or returns the gain factor of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe 1D Returns the type and serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber Returns the serial number of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe ID TYPE Returns the type of probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe RESistance Returns the resistance of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt PRObe SIGnal CH lt x gt PRObe UNIts Sets or returns the input bypass setting of channel lt x gt TekVPI probe Returns the units of measure of the probe that is attached to the specified channel CH lt x gt SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale of the specified channel CH lt x gt TERmination Sets or returns channel input termination CH lt x gt VOLts Sets or returns the vertical sensitivity for channel lt x gt CH lt x gt YUNits Sets or returns the units for the specified channel to a custom string Doe Returns parameters for digital channel
360. mer Manual 3 9 Status and Events Using the Command Take amplitude measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED VALUE This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the WAI command The BUSY query helps you avoid time outs caused by writing too many commands to the input buffer The controller is still tied up though and the repeated BUSY query will result in bus traffic If the corresponding status registers are enabled the OPC command sets the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register SESR when an operation is complete You achieve synchronization by using this command with either a serial poll or service request handler Serial Poll Method Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER and the Event Status Enable Register ESER using the DESE and ESE commands When the operation is complete the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register SESR will be enabled and the Event Status Bit ESB in the Status Byte Register will be enabled The same command sequence using the OPC command for synchronization with serial polling looks like this Set up conditional acquisition ACQUIRE STATE OFF SELECT CH1 HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 1000 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE STOPAFTER SEQUENCE Enable the status registers DESE 1 ESE 1 SRE 0 Acquire waveform data ACQUIRE STATE ON Set up the measurement parameters MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE AMPLITU
361. might return CH2 TERMINATION 50 0E 0 indicating that channel 2 is set to 50 impedance Sets or returns the vertical sensitivity for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt VOLts lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt VOLts lt NR3 gt is the vertical sensitivity in volts Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual CH lt x gt YUNits Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the units for the channel specified by x where x is the channel number String arguments are case insensitive and any unsupported units will generate an error Supported units are 96 Hz A A A A V A W A dB A s AA AW AdB As B Hz IRE S s V V A V V V W V dB V s VV VW VdB Volts Vs W W A W V W W W dB W s WA WV WW WdB Ws dB dB A dB V dB W dB dB dBA dBV dBW dBdB day degrees div hr min ohms percent s Vertical CH x YUNits lt QString gt CH x YUNits QString is a string of text surrounded by quotes specifying the supported units CLEARMenu No Query Form Group Syntax CLS No Query Form Clears the current menu from the display This command is equivalent to pressing the front panel Menu off Miscellaneous CLEARMenu Clears the following m Event Queue Standard Event Status Register m Status Byte Register except the bit If the CLS command immediately follows an lt EOI gt the Output Queu
362. mmer Manual 2 293 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TIME 2 294 Examples Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TEKSECURE initializes both waveform and setup memories This is a program example of how to generate an SRQ when TEKSECURE completes Bit 0 of the DESE Device Event Status Enable Register enables OPC to be reported to the SESR Standard Event Status Register DESE 255 Bit O of the ESER Event Status Enable Register enables OPC to be summarized in the ESB Event Status Bit of the SBR Status Byte Register ESE 255 Bit 5 of the SRE Service Request Enable Register enables the generation of SRQ when the ESB bit of the SBR becomes TRUE SRE 32 TEKSECURE OPC When the TEKSECURE operation has completed the OPC bit of the SESR will be TRUE and SRQ will have been generated Sets or returns the time that the oscilloscope displays Miscellaneous TIME Qstring TIME DATE Qstring is a time in the form hh mm ss where hh refers to a two digit hour number mm refers to a two digit minute number from 00 to 59 and ss refers to a two digit second number from 00 to 59 TIME 14 00 00 sets the time to exactly 2 00 p m TIME might return TIME 14 05 17 indicating the current time is set to 2 05 p m and 17 seconds Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TOTaluptime Query Only This command retur
363. module Bus BUS B x CAN SAMPLEpoint lt NR1 gt BUS B x CAN SAMPLEpoint lt 1 gt is the sample point in percent Values are limited to 25 30 70 75 BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments 2 72 Sets or returns the CAN bus data source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Bus BUS B lt x gt CAN SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS lt gt CAN SOUrce CH1 CH4 is the analog channel to use as the data source 00 015 is the digital channel to use as the data source Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the display format for the numerical information in the bus waveform lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt BINary HEXadecimal ASCII BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt BUS B lt x gt TYPE BINary specifies a binary data display HEXadecimal specifies a hexadecimal data display ASCII specifies an ASCII format for RS232 only MIXed specifies a mixed format for LIN and FlexRay only BUS B lt x gt DISplay TYPe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or retur
364. mp Formats LANGuage Sets or returns the user interface display language LOCk Sets or returns the front panel lock state LRN Returns a listing of oscilloscope settings MESSage Sets or queries message parameters NEWpass Changes the password for user protected data PASSWord Enables the PUD and NEWpass set commands REM Specifies a comment which is ignored by the oscilloscope SET Returns a listing of oscilloscope settings TEKSecure Initializes both waveform and setup memories TIME Sets or returns the time displayed by the oscilloscope TOTaluptime Returns the total number of hours that the oscilloscope has been turned on since the nonvolatile memory was last programmed TRG Performs the group execute trigger GET TST Tests the interface and returns the status UNLock Unlocks front panel VERBose Sets or returns the verbose state USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal Returns the USBTMC product ID USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal Returns the USBTMC product ID USBTMC SERIALnumber Returns the instrument serial number USBTMC VENDORID DECimal Returns the USBTMC vendor ID USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal Returns the USBTMC vendor ID Use the commands in the MSO Command Group to control digital waveforms Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 29 Command Groups Table 2 27 Mixed Signals Oscilloscope Commands Command Description ACQuire MAGnivu Sets or returns the MagniVu feature to provide inc
365. mpactFlash and USB media You can use the commands to do the following List the contents of a directory Create and delete directories Create read rename or delete a file Format media When using these commands keep the following points in mind File arguments are always enclosed within double quotes D MYDIR TEK00001 SET m File names follow the non case sensitive MSDOS format DRIVE PATH filename Path separators may be either forward slashes or back slashes NOTE Using back slash as a path separator may produce some unexpected results depending on how your application treats escaped characters Many applications recognize the sequence of back slash followed by an alphabetic character as an escaped character and as such interpret that alphabetic character as a control character For example the sequence n may be interpreted as a newline character t may be interpreted as a tab character To ensure that this interpretation does not occur you can use double back slashes For example D testfile txt Table 2 20 File System Commands Command Description FILESystem Returns the file system state Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 20 File System Commands cont Command Description FILESystem CWD Sets or returns the current working directory for FILESystem commands FILESystem DELEte Deletes a named file or
366. mples AUTOSET EXECUTE vertical horizontal and trigger controls of the oscilloscope to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform Returns all auxiliary input parameters Vertical AUXin Returns all information concerning the probe attached to auxilary input Vertical AUXin PRObe AUXin PRObe AUXIN PROBE might return AUXIN PROBE ID TYPE No Probe Detected SERNUMBER AUXIN PROBE UNITS RESISTANCE 1 0000E 6 giving information about the probe attached to the AUX In input AUXin PRObe AUTOZero No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples 2 66 Sets the Tek VPI probe attached to the Aux In input to autozero The oscilloscope will ignore this command if the Auxiliary input does not have a Tek VPI probe connected to it Vertical AUXin PRObe AUTOZero EXECute EXECute sets the probe to autozero AUXin PROBE AUTOZERO EXECUTE Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXin PRObe COMMAND No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the state of the probe control specified with the first argument to the state specified with the second argument The commands and states are unique to the attached probe type Only certain VPI probes support this command See the probe documentation for how to set these string arguments Vertical AUXin PRObe COMMAND lt QString gt lt QString gt Qstring are quoted strings specifying the
367. ms measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models DELay measures the time between the middle reference default 5096 amplitude point of the source waveform and the destination waveform FALL measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in the waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value default is 90 to a low reference value default is 1096 This measurement is available only on DPO models FREQuency measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Frequency is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz Hz where 1 2 1 cycle per second HIGH measures the High reference 10095 level sometimes called Topline of a waveform This measurement is available only on DPO models LOW measures the Low reference 0 level sometimes called Baseline of a waveform This measurement is available only on DPO models MAX imum finds the maximum amplitude This value is the most positive peak voltage found It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models MINImum finds the minimum amplitude This value is typically the most negative peak voltage It is measured ove
368. n This measurement is available only on DPO models MEAN amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MINImum finds the minimum amplitude This value is typically the most negative peak voltage It is measured over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models NDUty negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Negative Duty Cycle Negative Width Period x 100 NEDGECount is the count of negative edges NOVershoot negative overshoot finds the negative overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Negative Overshoot Low Minimum Amplitude x 100 NPULSECount is the count of negative pulses NwIdth negative width measurement is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a negative pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region PDUty positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage It is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Positive Dut
369. n others its brightness will decrease over time It will become less bright relative to the pixels that get hit often AUTO specifies that the oscilloscope automatically determines the best waveform persistence based on the value of waveform intensity DISPLAY INTEnsITY WAVEFORM MINImum specifies that the waveform persistence is set to the minimum value of 0 0E0 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 3 specifies that the waveform points are displayed fading for 3 seconds before they completely disappear DISplay STYle DOTsonly 2 138 Group Syntax Turns on or off the dots only mode for the waveform display Display DISplay STYle DOTsonly ON OFF lt NR1 gt DISplay STYle DOTsonly Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments D lt x gt Group Syntax D lt x gt LABel Group Syntax Arguments Examples D lt x gt POSition Group Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ON or lt NR1 gt Z 0 turns on the dots only display OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the dots only display Sets or returns parameters for digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number MSO D lt x gt Sets or returns the waveform label for digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number MSO D lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt D lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt is an alphanumeric string of text enclosed in quotes that contains the text label information for the digi
370. nary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS 10100 sets the indicator bits of the header to 10100 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS indicating the indicator bits of the header are don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAYLength 2 252 Sets or returns the payload length portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER PAYLength Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAYLength lt QString gt is a quoted string representing the payload length portion of the binary header string used for FLEXRAY trigger SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS BL FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH 1001101 sets the payload length portion of the binary header string to 1001101 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX indicating the payload length portion of the binary header string is don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C ADDRess MODe Conditions
371. ncompressed while PNG is compressed HARDCOPY initiates a screen copy to the active printer HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter HARDCopy INKSaver 2 158 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the currently active printer When a hard copy operation is performed the output will be sent to this printer One of two methods of specifying the printer can be used specifying an index value obtained from looking at the list of attached printers or by specifying the printer name Hard Copy HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter lt NR1 gt lt name gt HARDCopy ACTIVeprinter NR1 is the index of the desired printer as returned from HARDCopy PRINTer LIST name is the name of the printer as specified in the printer list This name is case sensitive and must be entered exactly as shown in the list Changes hard copy output to print traces and graticule on a white background while retaining waveform color information except for channel 1 which prints as dark blue because yellow does not show up well and is difficult to see on a white background This option can significantly reduce print time and quantities of ink required compared with WYSIWYG dark background images Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Examples HARDCopy LAYout Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Hard Copy HARDCopy INKSaver ON or lt NR1 gt 9 0 sets the ink saver mode on OFF o
372. nd operating the oscilloscope Getting Started with Open Choice Solutions Manual Options for getting data from your oscilloscope into any one of several available analysis tools Tektronix 4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes Technical Reference Oscilloscope specifications and a performance verification procedure TekVISA Programmer Manual Description of TekVISA the Tektronix implementation of the VISA Application Programming Interface API Tek VISA is industry compliant software for writing interoperable oscilloscope drivers in a variety of Application Development Environments ADEs Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax You can control the operations and functions of the oscilloscope through the Ethernet port or the USB 2 0 device port using commands and queries The related topics listed below describe the syntax of these commands and queries The topics also describe the conventions that the oscilloscope uses to process them See the Command Groups topic in the table of contents for a listing of the commands by command group or use the index to locate a specific command Backus Naur Form This documentation describes the commands and queries using Backus Naur Notation Form BNF notation Refer to the following table for the symbols that are used Table 2 1 Symbols for Backus Naur Form Symbol Meaning lt gt Defined element Is defined as Exclusive OR Group one element is req
373. ndard or extended format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue Sets or returns the binary address string to be used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition Sets or returns the trigger condition for FLEXRAY SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount HIVALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count high value SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount QUALIifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY cycle count low value SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa HIVALue Sets or returns the high binary data string SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa OFF Set Sets or returns the offset of the data string in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa QUALIifier Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data qualifier SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa SlZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray DATa VALue Sets or returns the low binary data string SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS
374. ndix C Factory Defaults Command Default value MEASUREMENT MEAS1 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS2 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS2 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS3 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS3 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS3 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS4 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS4 DELAY EDGE 1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS4 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS4 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS4 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS5 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEASS5 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEASS5 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS5 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS5 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS5 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEASS TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS6 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS6 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS6 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS6 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS6 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS6 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS6 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS7 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Defa
375. nds Listed in Alphabetical Order PNG saves the file in Portable Network Graphics format BMP saves the file in Microsoft Windows bitmap format TIFf saves the file in Tagged Image File Format Sets or returns the layout to use for saved screen images Save and Recall IMAGe LAYout LANdscape PORTRait SAVe LAYout LANdscape specifies that screen images are saved in landscape format PORTRai t specifies that screen images are saved in portrait format SAVe SETUp No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location You can later use the RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved state Save and Recall SAVe SETUp lt file path gt lt NR1 gt RCL RECAII SETUp SAV file path is the target location for storing the setup file file path is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form lt drive gt lt dir gt lt filename gt lt extension gt and one or lt dir gt s are optional If you do not specify them the oscilloscope will store the file in the current working directory filename stands for a filename Use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but are highly recommended For setups use the extension SET lt NR1 gt specifies a location for saving the current front panel setup The front
376. nges Byte width Signed integer range Positive integer range 1 128 to 127 0 to 255 2 32 768 to 32 767 0 to 65 535 The defined binary formats also specify the order in which the bytes are transferred The four binary formats are RIBinary RPBinary SRIbinary and SRPbinary RIBinary is signed integer where the most significant byte is transferred first and RPBinary is positive integer where the most significant byte is transferred first SRIbinary and SRPbinary correspond to RIBinary and RPBinary respectively but use a swapped byte order where the least significant byte is transferred first The byte order is ignored when DATa WIDth 15 set to 1 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 51 Command Groups Waveform Data and Record Lengths Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation Waveform Preamble Scaling Waveform Data Transferring Waveform Data from the Oscilloscope 2 52 You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record You can transfer a portion of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record You can use the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands to specify the first and last data points of the waveform record When transferring data into the oscilloscope you must first specify the record length of the destination waveform record You do this with the WFMInpre NR Pt command Next specify the first data point within the waveform record For example when you set DATa STARt to 1 data points will be
377. ns Group Sets or returns the I C trigger type to be valid on a Read Write or Either condition Read or write is indicated by the R W bit in the DC protocol Applies to bus x where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 315 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa DIRection READ specifies read as the data direction WRITE specifies write as the data direction NOCARE specifies either as the data direction TRIGGER A BUS Bl I2C DATA DIRECTION WRITE specifies write as the PC data direction TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt 12C DATa SIZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for an I2C trigger if the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt I2C DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa SIZe NRI is the length of the data string in bytes 08 lt gt 12 Conditions Group 2 316 Sets or returns the binary data string used for I2C triggering if the trigger condition is DATA or ADDRANDDATA Applies to bus x where x is the bus numbe
378. ns the cycle count portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt FLEXray HEADER CYCLEcount lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the cycle count portion of the binary header string Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 311 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT 110010 sets the cycle count to 110010 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY HEADER CYCLECOUNT XXXXXX indicating the cycle count 1s don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the frame id portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER FRAMEID Qstring is quoted string that is the frame id portion of the binary header string TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID 11001100101 sets the frame id portion of the binary header string to 11001100101 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER FRAMEID XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the frame id portion of the binary header string are don t cares TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits Group Syntax A
379. ns the display type for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number You can set up the bus to display the protocol information the logic waveforms that comprise the bus or both This command requires a DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt DISplay TYPe BUS BOTh BUS B lt x gt DISplay TYPe BUS displays the bus waveforms only BOTh displays both the bus and logic waveforms Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 73 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt FLEXray BITRate Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the bit rate for FLEXRAY Bus BUS B lt x gt FLEXray BITRate lt NR1 gt BUS B x FLEXray BITRate lt NR1 gt specifies the FLEXRAY bit rate You can enter any positive integer and the instrument will coerce the value to the closest supported bit rate BUS B1 FLEXRAY BITRATE 9600 sets the FLEXRAY bit rate to 9600 bits per second BUS Bl FLEXRAY BITRATE might return BUS B1 FLEXRAY BITRATE 10000000 indicating the FLEXRAY bit rate 1s 10 000 000 bits per second BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CHannel Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the FLEXRAY ID format Bus BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CHannel A B BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CHannel A sets the FLEXRAY id format to channel A B sets the FLEXRAY id format to channel B BUS BL FLEXRAY CHANNEL B sets the FLEXRAY id format to channel B BUS B1 FLEXRAY C
380. ns the lower waveform threshold level for all reference waveform searches SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the polarity for a pulse search PULSEWidth POLarity SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the source waveform for a PULSEWidth SOUrce pulse search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the condition for generating PULSEWidth WHEn a pulse width search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 35 Command Groups Search Commands cont 2 36 Command Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the pulse width setting for a PULSEWidth WIDth pulse width search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Sets or returns the polarity setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Sets or returns the source setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WHEn sets or returns the condition setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT WIDth Sets or returns the width setting for a runt search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the clock slope setting for a SETHold CLOCK EDGE setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the clock source setting for SETHold CLOCK SOUrce an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the clock threshold setting for SETHold CLOCK THReshold an setup hold
381. ns the total number of hours that the oscilloscope has been powered on since the nonvolatile memory was last programmed usually since the initial manufacturing process Group Miscellaneous Syntax TOTaluptime TRG No Query Form Performs a group execute trigger on commands defined by DDT Group X Miscellaneous Syntax TRG Related Commands Examples TRG immediately executes all commands that have been defined by DDT TRIGger No Query Form Forces a trigger event to occur Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger FORCe TRIGger Arguments FORCE creates a trigger event If TRIGger STATE is set to READy the acquisition will complete Otherwise this command will be ignored Examples TRIGGER FORCE forces a trigger event to occur Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 295 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A 2 296 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets the A trigger level automatically to 50 of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal The query returns current trigger parameters The trigger level is the voltage threshold through which the trigger source signal must pass to generate a trigger event This command works for the following cases Edge Trigger when source is Not Line Logic Trigger when Clock Source is not Off or Logic Pattern is Don t Care and Pulse Width Trigger Trigger TRIGger A SETLevel TRIGger A TR
382. nt IMMed DELay EDGE x FALL RISe MEASUrement IMMed DELay EDGE lt x gt Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Related Commands MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Arguments x specifies which waveform to use where x I is the from waveform and x 2 is the to waveform FALL specifies the falling edge RISe specifies the rising edge Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 RISE specifies that the from waveform rising edge be used for the immediate delay measurement MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY EDGE1 returns either RISE FALL MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce 1 Sets or returns the source for all single source immediate measurements and specifies the source to measure from when taking an immediate delay measurement or phase measurement NOTE If you do not specify a numerical suffix the source is assumed to be SOURCE I Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce 1 CH lt x gt MATH lt y gt REF lt x gt D lt x gt MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce Related Commands MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Arguments CH x is an input channel waveform The x variable can be expressed as integer where x is the channel number MATH lt y gt is a math waveform The y variable can be expressed as an integer of 1 lt gt is a reference waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer where x is the reference channel
383. nt REFLevel PERCent HIGH Sets or returns the percent where 10096 is equal to HIGH used to calculate the high reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 209 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples NOTE This command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH lt NR3 gt MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel METHod MEASUrement IMMed TYPe MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe lt NR3 gt is the high reference level ranging from 0 to 100 The default high reference level is 90 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 95 sets the high reference level to 95 of HIGH MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 9096 of HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW Group Syntax Related Commands 2 210 Sets or returns the percent where 10096 is equal to HIGH used to calculate the low reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Percent This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter
384. nt snapshot display Measurement MEASUrement CLEARSNapshot CLEARMenu Specifies or returns the measurement gating setting Measurement MEASUrement GATing OFF SCREen CURSor MEASUrement GATing Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OFF turns off measurement gating full record SCREen turns on gating using the left and right edges of the screen CURSor limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors even if they are off screen MEASUREMENT GATING CURSOR turns on measurement gating using the cursors as limits MEASUREMENT GATING might return MEASUREMENT GATING CURSOR indicating that measurements are limited to the portion of the waveform between the vertical bar cursors MEASUrement IMMed Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters Measurement MEASUrement IMMed MEASUREMENT IMMED might return MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS EDGE1 RISE EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT IMMED TYPE PERIOD UNITS s SOURCEL CH1 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUrement IMMed DELay Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns information about the immediate delay measurement This command is equivalent to viewing the delay measurement settings on the measurement readout Measurement MEASUrement IMMed DELay MEASUREMENT IMMED DELAY might return MEASUREM
385. number D lt X gt is a digital waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer where x is the digital channel number Digital channels are available only on MSO models Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 187 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE 1 1 specifies Math1 as the immediate measurement source MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE might return MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE CH3 indicating that channel 3 is the immediate measurement source MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Sets or returns the source to measure to for phase or delay immediate measurements Tip Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types which require both a target Sourcel and reference Source2 source Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 CH x MATH y REF x D x MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 Related Commands MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce Arguments CH lt x gt is an input channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH lt y gt is a math waveform The y variable can be expressed as an integer of 1 lt gt is a reference waveform where x is the reference channel number D lt X gt is a digital waveform The x variable can be expressed as an integer where x is the digital channel number Digital channels are available only on MSO models Examples MEASUREMENT IMMED SOURCE2 REF3 sets the waveform in reference memory location 3 as th
386. o trigger on setup and hold violations between a data source and a clock source Use one channel input as the clock signal and a second channel input as the data input The clocking and data levels are used to determine if a clock or data transition has occurred Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 331 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS might return TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS LOGIC TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS LOGIC sets the trigger logic class to LOGIc which causes the oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of channels 1 2 3 and 4 are met TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the logical combination of the input channels for the A pattern and A state logic triggers Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion AND NANd NOR OR TRIGger A LOGIC FUNCtion TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt AND specifies to trigger if all conditions are true specifies to trigger if any of the conditions is false NOR specifies to trigger if all conditions are false OR specifies to trigger if any of the conditions is true TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION might return TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION NAND which indicates that the oscilloscope will trigger if the AND logic conditions are false TRIGGER A LOGIC FUNCTION AND sets the logical combination of channels to be true when all conditions are true TRIGger A LOG
387. of scale if units are set to 96 CURSor VBArs VDELTa Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Returns Examples Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Returns the vertical difference between the two vertical bar cursor ticks Cursor CURSor VBArs VDELTa CURSor HBArs UNIts lt NR3 gt indicates the horizontal difference between the two vertical bar cursors CURSOR VBARS VDELTA might return CURSOR VBARS VDELTA 1 064E 0 indicating that the vertical difference between the vertical bar cursors ticks is 1 064 units 2 117 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor XY POLar RADIUS DELta Query Only Returns the difference between the cursors X radius and the cursor Y radius AY AX The ratio is calculated as cursor 2 Y cursor 1 Y cursor 2 X cursor 1 X Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr XY POLar RADIUS DELta CURSor XY POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt Query Only Returns the polar radius for the specified cursor where x can be either or 2 Group Cursor Syntax CURSor XY POLar RADIUS POSITION lt x gt CURSor XY POLar RADIUS UNIts Query Only Returns the polar radius units Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr POLar RADIUS UNIts CURSor XY POLar THETA DELta Query Only Returns the XY cursor polar angle delta Group Cursor Syntax CURSOr POLar THETA DELta CURSor XY POLar THETA POSITION lt x gt Query Only Returns the cursor X or cursor Y polar coordinate w
388. ogrammer Manual 2 199 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments For SOURcel Sets or returns the source for all single channel measurements For delay or phase measurements sets or returns the waveform to measure from For SOUrce2 Sets or returns the waveform to measure to when taking a delay measurement or phase measurement Measurement MEASUrement MEAS x SOUrce x CH lt x gt MATH D lt x gt MEASUrement MEAS x SOUrce lt x gt CH x is an input channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH is the math waveform REF x is a reference waveform where x is the reference channel number D lt x gt is a digital waveform where x is the digital channel number Digital channels are available only on MSO models MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE 2 200 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns whether the specified measurement slot is computed and displayed The measurement slot is specified by x which ranges from 1 through 4 For a measurement to display you must have selected a source waveform and defined the measurement you want to take and display You select the measurement using the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 command You define the measurement type using the MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe command Measurement MEASUrement MEAS lt X gt STATE OFF ON lt NR1 gt MEASUrement MEAS l
389. old to determine where to place a mark This setting is applied to all reference searches that use a lower threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF x TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A LOWerthreshold REF x TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the polarity for a pulse trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity NEGative POSitive SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth POLarity POSITIVe places a mark only when the polarity of the pulse is positive NEGative places a mark only when the polarity of the pulse is negative SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce Group Syntax Sets or returns the source waveform for a pulse trigger search to determine where to place a mark x is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 REF Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 275 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A PULSEWidth SOUrce CH lt x gt specifies one input channel as the edge source where x 1 2 3 or4 MATH specifies the math waveform as t
390. om SYNCInterval Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or queries the sync interval for the standard under test This 1s only required for BiLevel Custom Use this command only when the video format is set to custom This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm SYNCInterval lt NR3 gt TRIGger A VIDeo CUSTOm SYNCInterval lt NR3 gt is the sync interval TRIGGER A VIDEO CUSTOM SYNCINTERVAL 4 0E 6 sets the sync interval is set to 4 0 us TRIGGER VIDEO CUSTOM SYNCINTERVAL might return VIDEO CUSTOM SYNCINTERVAL 4 7200E 6 indicating the sync interval is set to 4 72 us TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Conditions Group Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Sets or returns the HDTV video signal format on which to trigger This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger 2 359 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat HD1080P24 HD720P60 HD480P60 HD1080150 HD1080P25 HD1080160 HD1080PSF24 TRIGger A VIDeo HDtv FORMat Table 2 41 Available HDTV formats HDTV format Description 1080150 1125 Lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel interlaced 60 fps 1080160 1125 lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel interlaced 50 fps 1080p24 1125 lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel progressive 24 fps 1080p25 1125 lines 1080 active 1920
391. ommand saving the instrument setup and looking at the instrument or setup file Table C 1 Default values Command Default value ACQUIRE MAGNIVU 0 ACQUIRE MODE SAMPLE ACQUIRE NUMAVG 16 ACQUIRE NUMENV INFINITE ACQUIRE SAMPLINGMODE RT ACQUIRE STATE 1 ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP ALIAS STATE 0 AUXIN PROBE FORCEDRANGE 0 00E 00 AUXIN PROBE GAIN 1 BUS B1 CAN BITRATE 500000 BUS B1 CAN PROBE CANH BUS B1 CAN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B1 CAN SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 DISPLAY FORMAT HEXADECIMAL BUS B1 DISPLAY TYPE BUS BUS B1 FLEXRAY BITRATE 10000000 BUS B1 FLEXRAY CHANNEL A BUS B1 FLEXRAY SIGNAL BDIFFBP BUS B1 FLEXRAY SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 12C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 BUS B1 12C CLOCK SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 12C DATA SOURCE CH2 BUS B1 LABEL Parallel BUS B1 LIN BITRATE 19200 BUS B1 LIN IDFORMAT NOPARITY BUS B1 LIN MAXBYTEDELIM 14 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual C 1 Appendix C Factory Defaults Table C 1 Default values cont Command Default value BUS B1 LIN POLARITY NORMAL BUS B1 LIN SAMPLEPOINT 50 BUS B1 LIN SOURCE CH1 BUS B1 LIN STANDARD V2X BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT0 SOURCE DO BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT1 SOURCE D1 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT10 SOURCE D10 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT11 SOURCE D11 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT12 SOURCE D12 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT13 SOURCE D13 BUS B1 PARALLEL BIT14 SOURCE D14 BUS B1 P
392. ommand or query provided that ALIas S TATE has been turned on The query form of this command returns the definitions of a selected alias NOTE Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an error To give new alias the name of an existing alias the existing alias must first be deleted Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Alias ALIas DEFine lt QString gt lt gt lt QString gt lt Block gt ALIas DEFine lt QString gt ALlas STATE The first lt QString gt is the alias label This label cannot be a command name Labels must start with a letter and can contain only letters numbers and underscores other characters are not allowed The label must be less than or equal to 12 characters The second Qstring or Block is a complete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 256 characters ALIAS DEFINE ST1 RECALL SETUP 5 AUTOSET EXECUTE SELECT CH1 ON defines an alias named STI that sets up the oscilloscope ALIAS DEFINE STI returns ALIAS DEFINE 5 1 246 RECALL SETUP 5 AUTOSET EXECUTE SELECT CH1 ALlas DELEte No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Removes a specified alia
393. ommand requires DPO4EMBD application module Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa VALue bin SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt I2C DATa VALue bin is the data in binary format SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition Group Syntax Arguments 2 256 Sets or returns the search condition for a LIN search Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition SYNCField IDenti fier IDANDDATA WAKEup SLEEP ERROR SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition SYNCField specifies to search on the sync field IDentifier specifies to search on the identifier DATA specifies to search on the data IDANDDATA specifies to search on the identifier and the data WAKEup specifies to search on wake up Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SLEEP specifies to search on sleep ERROR specifies to search on errors SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS 1 CONDITION might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD indicating a search on the sync field SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN searches if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGge
394. ommands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples BUS B x I2C ADDRess RWINClude lt NR1 gt OFF ON BUS B x I2C ADDRess RWINClude lt NR1 gt 0 does not include the read write bit in the addess any other value includes the read write bit in the address OFF does not include the read write bit in the address ON includes the read write bit in the address BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE ON includes the read write bit in the address BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE might return BUS B1 I2C ADDRESS RWINCLUDE 0 indicating the read write bit is not included in the address BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the I2C SCLK source for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt 1I12C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce CH1 CH2 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B x I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies the analog channel to use as the 2 SCLK source 00 015 specifies the digital channel to use as the 2 SCLK source BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce Conditions Group 2 76 Sets or returns I2C SDATA source for bus x where x is the bus number This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Bus Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical O
395. omplete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 80 characters The format of this argument is always returned as a query Qstring is a complete sequence of program messages The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands The sequence must be less than or equal to 80 characters DDT OACQUIRE STATE RUN specifies that the acquisition system will be started each time a command is sent Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register DESER The DESER is the mask that determines whether events are reported to the Standard Event Status Register SESR and entered into the Event Queue For a detailed discussion of the use of these registers see Registers Status and Error Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 129 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DIAg LOOP OPTion 2 130 Group Syntax Arguments DESE lt NR1 gt DESE CLS ESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB lt NR1 gt sets the binary bits of the DESER according to this value which ranges from 1 through 255 For example DESE 209 sets the DESER to the binary value 11010001 that is the most significant bit in the regist
396. on input SELECT CONTROL CH2 resets acquisition displays on channel 2 and causes the selected waveform to be the implied object of waveform commands SELECT CONTROL might return SELECT CONTROL MATH indicating that math is the implied object of waveform commands Turns on the display of the digital channel x and resets the acquisition lt x gt is the channel number The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Vertical SELect D x lt NR1 gt OFF ON SELect D x ON turns on the display of the specified waveform This waveform also becomes the selected waveform OFF turns off the display of the specified waveform lt NR1 gt 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform any other value turns on the display of the specified waveform SELECT D2 ON turns the digital channel 2 waveform display on and selects digital channel 2 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual SELect MATH 1 Group Syntax Arguments Examples SELect REF lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SELECT D2 might return SELECT D2 1 indicating that digital channel 2 is being displayed Turns on and off the display of the math waveform The query returns whether the math waveform is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Vertical SELect MATH 1 0N OFF lt NR1 gt SELect MATH 1
397. on status clear flag is set to true Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 221 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PUD Sets or returns a string of Protected User Data This data is protected by the PASSWord command You can modify it only by first entering the correct password This password is not necessary to query the data Group X Status and Error Syntax lt Block gt lt QString gt PUD Related Commands PASSWord Arguments Block is a block containing up to 300 ASCII characters lt QString gt is a string containing up to 300 ASCII characters Examples PUD 229This oscilloscope belongs to me stores the string This oscilloscope belongs to me in the user protected data area PUD might return 221PROPERTY OF COMPANY X RCL No Query Form This command restores the state of the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory The settings are stored using the SAV command Group Save and Recall Syntax lt NR1 gt Related Commands FACtory LRN RECAII SETUp RST SAV SAVe SETUp Arguments NRI is a value in the range from 1 to 10 which specifies a saved setup storage location Examples RCL 3 restores the oscilloscope from a copy of the settings stored in memory location 3 2 222 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order RECAII SETUp No Query Form Restores the state of the oscilloscope from a copy of the
398. on system is in the preview state Horizontal HORi zontal PREVi ewstate NR1 I if the acquisition system is in the preview state lt NR1 gt 0 if the acquisition system is not in the preview state HORizontal RECOrdlength Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record length Horizontal HORizontal RECOrdlength lt NR1 gt HORizontal RECOrdlength lt NR1 gt represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths which are 1000 10000 100000 1000000 or 10000000 HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH 10000 specifies that 10000 data points will be acquired for each record Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 167 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORIZONTAL RECORDLENGTH might return HORIZONTAL RECOrdlength 1000 indicating that the horizontal record length is equal to 1000 data points HORizontal RESOlution Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the horizontal record length to the number of data points in each frame The sample rate is automatically adjusted at the same time to maintain a constant time per division The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record length Horizontal HORizontal RESOlution NR1 HORi zontal RESOlution NRI represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths which range
399. onics When cursors are displayed commands may specify which cursor of the pair to use Table 2 5 Channel Mnemonics Symbol Meaning lt gt channel specifier x is 1 through 4 Table 2 6 Cursor Mnemonics Symbol Meaning CURSOR lt x gt A cursor selector x is either 1 or 2 POSITION lt x gt A cursor selector x is either 1 or 2 HPOS lt x gt A cursor selector lt x gt is either 1 or 2 Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header Table 2 7 Math Specifier Mnemonics Symbol Meaning Math lt x gt A math waveform specifier lt x gt is 1 Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the header Up to eight automated measurements may be displayed Table 2 8 Measurement Specifier Mnemonics Symbol Meaning MEAS lt x gt A measurement specifier lt x gt is 1 through 4 Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header Table 2 9 Reference Waveform Mnemonics Symbol Meaning REF lt x gt A reference waveform specifier lt x gt is 1 2 3 or 4 for 4 channel oscilloscopes and 1 or 2 for 2 channel oscilloscopes Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Syntax Argument Types Numeric Many oscilloscope commands require numeric arguments The syntax shows the format that the oscilloscope r
400. ope operation These errors may indicate that the oscilloscope needs repair Table 3 6 Device Error Messages DDE Bit 3 Code Message 310 System error 311 Memory error 312 PUD memory lost 314 Save recall memory lost The following table lists the system event messages These messages are generated whenever certain system conditions occur Table 3 7 System Event Messages Code Message 400 Query event 401 Power on PON bit 7 set 402 Operation complete OPC bit 0 set 403 User request URQ bit 6 set 404 Power fail DDE bit 3 set 405 Request control 410 Query INTERRUPTED QYE bit 2 set 420 Query UNTERMINATED QYE bit 2 set 430 Query DEADLOCKED QYE bit 2 set 440 Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response QYE bit 2 set 468 Knob Keypad value changed 472 Application variable changed The following table lists warning messages that do not interrupt the flow of command execution They also notify you of a possible unexpected results Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 8 Execution Warning Messages EXE Bit 4 Code Message 528 Parameter out of range 532 Curve data too long Curve truncated 533 Curve error Preamble values are inconsistent 540 Measurement warning Uncertain edge 541 Measurement warning Low signal amplitude 542 Measurement warning Unstable histogram 543
401. or 287 Print server not found 2200 Measurement error Measurement system error 2201 Measurement error Zero period 2202 Measurement error No period second waveform 2203 Measurement error No period second waveform 2204 Measurement error Low amplitude second waveform 2205 Measurement error Low amplitude second waveform 2206 Measurement error Invalid gate 2207 Measurement error Measurement overflow 2208 Measurement error No backwards Mid Ref crossing 2209 Measurement error No second Mid Ref crossing 2210 Measurement error No Mid Ref crossing second waveform 2211 Measurement error No backwards Mid Ref crossing 2212 Measurement error No negative crossing 2213 Measurement error No positive crossing 2214 Measurement error No crossing target waveform Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 5 Execution Error Messages EXE Bit 4 cont Code Message 2215 Measurement error No crossing second waveform 2216 Measurement error No crossing target waveform 2217 Measurement error Constant waveform 2219 Measurement error No valid edge No arm sample 2220 Measurement error No valid edge No arm cross 2221 Measurement error No valid edge No trigger cross 2222 Measurement error No valid edge No second cross 2223 Measurement error Waveform mismatch 2224 Measurement error WAIT calculating
402. orm FILESystem CWD FILESystem Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 223 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments REF x specifies a location in internal reference memory Reference memory location values range from 1 through 4 file path specifies a location for an oscilloscope setup file file path gt is a quoted string that defines the file name and path Input the file path using the form drive dir filename extension and one or lt dir gt s optional If you do not specify them the oscilloscope will read the file from the default directory see FILESystem CWD filename stands for a filename the use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported Filename extensions are not required but highly recommended Examples RECALL WAVEFORM 00000 15 recalls the waveform stored in the file named TEK00000 ISF from the current directory for waveforms to the reference location 1 REF lt x gt Query Only Returns reference waveform data for the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt REF lt x gt DATE Query Only Returns the date that reference waveform data for channel lt x gt was copied into the internal reference memory where x is the reference channel number Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt DATE REF lt x gt HORizontal DELay TIMe Sets or returns the horizontal delay
403. ormat of incoming waveform data WFMiInpre PT Off This query always returns a 0 Sets or returns the horizontal sampling interval between incoming waveform points WFMInpre XUNit Sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform WFMiInpre XZEro Sets or returns the time of the first point in the incoming waveform WFMiInpre YMUilt Sets or returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the incoming waveform points WFMInpre Y OFf Sets or returns the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels WFMiInpre YUNit Sets or returns the vertical units of the incoming waveform WFMinpre YZEro Sets or returns the vertical offset of the incoming waveform WFMOutpre Returns the waveform formatting data for the waveform specified by the DATA SOURCE command WFMOutpre BIT_Nr Sets or returns the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms contain WFMOutpre BN_Fmt Sets or returns the format of binary data for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre BYT_Nr Sets or returns the data width for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre BYT_Or Sets or returns the byte order of waveform points for the outgoing waveform Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 33 Waveform Transfer Commands cont Command Description WFMOutpre ENCdg Sets or returns the type of encoding for outgoing wavefo
404. ou should familiarize yourself with the following GPIB requirements A unique device address must be assigned to each device on the bus No two devices can share the same device address No than 15 devices be connected to any one line W One device should be connected for every 6 feet 2 meters of cable used B Nothan 65 feet 20 meters of cable should be used to connect devices to a bus At least two thirds of the devices on the network should be powered on while using the network Connect the devices on the network in a star or linear configuration Do not use loop or parallel configurations To function correctly your oscilloscope must have a unique device address The default setting for the GPIB configuration is GPIB Address 1 To change the GPIB address settings do the following 1 On the front panel push Utility Push Utility Page Select I O with the Multipurpose knob Push GPIB es 92 29 Enter the GPIB address the side bezel menu using the multipurpose knob This will set the GPIB address on an attached TEK USB 488 Adapter The oscilloscope is now set up for bidirectional communication with your controller Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 1 3 Getting Started Documentation The following documents are available for download on the Manuals Finder Web site at www tektronix com Tektronix 4000 Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes User Manual Information about installing a
405. p Syntax Arguments Examples 2 144 Qstring is an integer port number enclosed in quotes NOTE Consider the following if you are using the e Scope control software If you don t enter a port address in the URL then the ETHERnet HTTPPort value must be set to 80 which is the default port for HTTP protocol If you use a URL with a port address for example http DPO4104 04WKLA 1234 the port number is specified by the number after the colon Set the ETHERnet HTTPPort value to this same number ETHERNET HTTPPORT 80 sets the HTTP port value to 80 Sets or returns the IP address assigned to the oscilloscope Ethernet ETHERnet IPADDress Qstring ETHERnet IPADDress lt QString gt is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes ETHERNET IPADDRESS 123 121 13 214 sets the oscilloscope s IP address Sets or returns the network name assigned to the oscilloscope Ethernet ETHERnet NAME Qstring ETHERNET NAME lt QString gt is the network name assigned to the oscilloscope enclosed in quotes ETHERNET NAME labscope1 sets the oscilloscope s network name Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ETHERnet PASSWord Sets or returns the HTTP Ethernet access password If a password is set the user must enter the password before the user s Web browser can access the oscilloscope Group Ethernet Syntax X ETHERnet PASSWord new E
406. p Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss TRIGGER A LOGIC might return TRIGGER A LOGIC CLASS SETHOLD FUNCTION AND THRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A LOGIC INPUT CHL X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X CLOCK SOURCE NONE EDGE RISE TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN INPUT CHl X CH2 X CH3 X CH4 X TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN WHEN TRUE WHEN LESSLIMIT 4 0000E 9 LIMIT 4 0000E 9 TRIGGER A LOGIC PATTERN DELTATIME 4 0000E 9 TRIGger A LOGIc CLAss Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the class of the Logic Trigger This command is used in conjunction with the TRIGger A TYPe command Trigger TRIGger A LOGIC CLAss LOGIC SETHOold j TRIGger A LOGIC CLAss TRIGger A TYPe TRIGger A PULse CLAss LOGIC sets the oscilloscope to trigger on logical combinations of the channels When the TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce is NONE LOGIC sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of channels 1 2 3 and 4 are met on four channel oscilloscopes On two channel oscilloscopes only channel 1 and channel 2 are available When the TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCK SOUrce is set to one of the channels LOGIC sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the specified logical combinations of the remaining channels is true during a transition on the clock channel SETHO1d sets the oscilloscope t
407. panel setup value ranges from 1 to 10 Using an out of range value causes an execution error Any settings that have been stored previously at this location will be overwritten Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 231 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples SAVE SETUP 5 saves the current oscilloscope setup in memory location 5 SAVE SETUP TEK00000 SET saves the current oscilloscope setup in the file TEK00000 SET in the current working directory SAVe WAVEform No Query Form 2 232 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments This command saves a specified waveform or all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms Only individual analog waveforms lt gt MATH and REF lt x gt can be saved to reference memory locations You can save all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to a single CSV file when the SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT is set to SPREADSHEET You can save all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms and digital channels MSO models to consecutive ISF internal save format files when the SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT is set to INTERNAL Save and Recall SAVe WAVEform lt wfm gt REF lt x gt lt wfm gt lt QString gt ALL Qstring RECAII WAV Eform SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat lt wfm gt lt REF lt x gt gt saves the specified waveform to the specified reference memory location lt wfm gt be any live analog channel where
408. plied to all reference waveform searches that uses an upper threshold SEARCH lt x gt is the search number and REF lt x gt is the reference channel number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF x TTL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A UPPerthreshold REF x TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V Sets or returns the selected waveform display controlled by the front panel on or off Vertical SELect ON OFF ON turns the selected waveform display on OFF turns the selected waveform display off SELECT might return the following SELECT BUSI1 0 BUS2 0 CH1 1 CH2 0 CH3 0 CH4 0 0 0 2 O REF3 O REF4 0 CONTROL CH1 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual SELect BUS lt x gt Group Syntax SELect CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples SELect CONTROI Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order This command turns on and off the display of the waveform for lt x gt where x is the bus number The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Vertical SELect BUS x lt NR1 gt OFF ON SELect BUS x Turns the display of the channel x waveform on or off where lt x gt is the channel number This command also resets the acquisition The query returns whether the channel is on or off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform Vertical SELect CH x ON OFF
409. point using WFMOutpre BYT Nr 4 Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using DATa STARt and DATa STOP o Transfer waveform preamble information using the WFMOutpre query 6 Transfer waveform data from the oscilloscope using the CURVe query Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Transferring Waveform You can transfer waveforms to the oscilloscope from an external controller using Data to the Oscilloscope following sequence Specify the reference waveform using DATa DESTination oW ESN Specify the record length of the reference waveform using WFMPre NR Pt Specify the waveform data format using WFMInpre ENCdg Specify the number of bytes per data point using WFMInpre BYT Nr Specify first data point in the waveform record using DATa STARt Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMInpre Transfer waveform data to the oscilloscope using CURVe Table 2 33 Waveform Transfer Commands Command Description CURVe The command format transfers waveform data to the oscilloscope reference waveform specified by DATa DESTination The query format transfers waveform data from oscilloscope specified by the DATa SOUrce command DATa Sets the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe Command Or returns the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe command DATa DESTination DATa EN
410. probe command and value to set in the probe attached to the auxiliary input AUXIN PROBE COMMAND OUTPUT ON turns the output of a Tektronix VPI DPG probe on AUXIN PROBE COMMAND MODE 4 4V1MHz sets a Tektronix VPI DPG probe to the 4 4V1MHz mode AUXIN PROBE COMMAND MODE might return AUXIN PROBE COMMAND 4 4V1MHZ AUXin PRObe DEGAUss No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Starts a degauss autozero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the Aux In input If you send this command to a probe that does not support this function it is ignored Vertical AUXin PRObe DEGAUss EXECute EXECute starts a probe degauss cycle AUXin PROBE DEGAUSS EXECUTE degausses the probe attached to the Aux In input Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 67 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order AUXin PRObe DEGAUss STATE Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the state of the probe degauss NEEDED RECOMMENDED PASSED FAILED RUNNING The command will return PASSED for probes that do not support degauss operations Vertical AUXin PRObe DEGAUSS STATE AUXin PROBE DEGAUSS STATE might return AUXin PROBE DEGAUSS STATE PASSED indicating that the probe has been degaussed AUXin PRObe FORCEDRange Group Syntax Arguments AUXin PRObe GAIN Group Syntax Arguments 2 68 Changes or returns the range a Tek VPI probe attached to
411. put impedance of channel x to I MQ lt NR3 gt specifies the input impedance for channel x Valid values are 50 or 1 00 06 Sets or returns the invert function for channel x where is the channel number When on the invert function inverts the waveform for the specified channel NOTE This command inverts the waveform for display purposes only The oscilloscope does not use an inverted waveform for triggers or trigger logic inputs Vertical CH x INVert ON OFF CH lt x gt INVert OFF sets the invert function for channel lt x gt to off ON sets the invert function for channel lt x gt to on CH4 INVert ON inverts the waveform on channel 4 CH2 INVert might return CH2 INVERT 0 indicating that channel 2 is not inverted Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 99 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH lt x gt LABel Group Syntax Arguments CH lt x gt OFFSet 2 100 Sets or returns the waveform label for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt CH lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt is an alphanumeric string of text enclosed in quotes that contains the text label information for the channel lt x gt waveform The text string is limited to 30 characters Sets or returns the vertical offset for channel lt x gt where x is the channel number This command offsets the vertical acquisition window moves the level at the
412. r This command requires DPO4EMBD application module Trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x I2C DATa VALue lt QString gt is the binary data string where the number of bits is 8 times the number of bytes specified The only allowed characters in the string are 0 1 and X TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN CONDition Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the trigger condition for LIN Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt X gt LIN CONDi tion SYNCField IDentifier DATA TIDANDDATA WAKEUp SLEEP ERROR TRIGger A BUS B Xx LIN CONDi tion SYNCField sets the LIN trigger condition to sync field IDentifier sets the LIN trigger condition to identifier DATA sets the LIN trigger condition to data IDANDDATA sets the LIN trigger condition to id and data WAKEup sets the LIN trigger condition to wake up SLEEP sets the LIN trigger condition to sleep ERROR sets the LIN trigger condition to error TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION ERROR sets the LIN trigger condition to error TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN CONDITION SYNCFIELD indicating the LIN trigger condition is sync field TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Group Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for LIN trigger if trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA
413. r This applies only 1f the trigger condition is ID Requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B X CAN DATa DIRection READ WRITE NOCARE TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection READ sets the CAN data direction to READ WRITE sets the CAN data direction to WRITE Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOCARE sets the CAN data direction to either TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA DIRECTION WRITE sets the CAN data direction to Write TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa QUALifier Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier for bus x where x is the bus number This applies only if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA Requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa QUAL i f ier iLESSThan Than EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual EQual TRIGger A BUS B Xx CAN DATa QUAL i fier LESSThan sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value Than sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data 1s than the qualifier value EQUa sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is equal to the qualifier value UNEQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is not equal to the qualifier value LESSEQual sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than or equal to the qualifier value EQual sets the oscilloscope
414. r lt NR1 gt 0 sets the ink saver mode off HARDCOPY INKSAVER ON will cause subsequent hard copy output to display the screen on a white background Sets or returns the page orientation for hard copy If you set the layout to LANdscape the printer will print hard copies in landscape mode where the long edge of the screen will print to the long edge of the sheet of paper If you set the layout to PORTRait the printer will print hard copies in portrait mode Hard Copy HARDCopy LAYout PORTRait LANdscape HARDCOpy LAYout PORTRai t orients the screen image vertically on the printed page LANdscape orients the screen image horizontally on the printed page HARDCOPY LAYOUT LANDSCAPE sets the hard copy page orientation to Landscape HARDCOPY LAYOUT might return HARDCOPY LAYOUT PORTRAIT indicating that the hard copy page orientation is set to portrait HARDCopy PREVIEW No Query Form Group Syntax Displays a preview of the current screen contents with the InkSaver palette applied Hard Copy HARDCopy PREVIEW ON OFF lt NR1 gt Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 159 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns preview mode on OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns preview mode off HARDCopy PRINTer ADD No Query Form Adds a network printer to the list of available printers All three arguments must be present but only one of server name or server IP address may be speci
415. r A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a RS232 trigger if the condition involves RX SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition Sets or returns the search condition for SPI search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for SPI search if SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOSI OUT VALue Sets or returns the binary data string for an SPI search if the search condition is MISO or MISOMOSI SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for SPI search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce Sets or returns the bus for a serial search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the slope for an edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the source waveform for an edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LE Vel Sets or returns the level for an edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LE Vel lt gt Sets or returns the level for an edge search of the specified channel SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LEVel MATH Sets or returns the math waveform level for edge search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LE Vel REF lt x gt Sets
416. r A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt LIN DATa HIVALue Qstring is a quoted string of 15 05 or Xs representing the binary data string to be used for LIN searches if the search condition is ID or IDANDDATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA HIVALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 DATA HIVALUE OQ900000000000000000000000000000000000000000000000XX XXXXXXXXXXXX indicating the high value is don t care SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALIifier Group Syntax Sets or returns the LIN data qualifier This only applies if the trigger condition is IDANDDATA or DATA Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALi fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrange SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUALi fier Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 257 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples LESSThan sets the LIN data qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than EQUa sets the LIN data qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the LIN data qualifier to less than or equal sets the LIN data qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the LIN data qualifier to in range OUTrange sets
417. r Manual 2 21 Command Groups Horizontal Command Group Use the commands in the Horizontal Command Group to control the oscilloscope time bases You can set the time per division of the main time base You can also use the Horizontal commands to set the scale horizontal position and reference of the time base Table 2 22 Horizontal Commands Command Description HORizontal Returns settings for the horizontal commands HORizontal ACQLENGTH Returns the record length HORizontal DELay MODe Sets or returns the horizontal delay mode HORizontal DELay TIMe Sets or returns the horizontal delay time HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAGnivu Returns the record length of the MagniVu digital acquisition HORizontal DIGital RECOrdlength MAIN Returns the record length of the main digital acquisition HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAGnivu Returns the sample rate of the Magnivu digital acquisition HORizontal DIGital SAMPLERate MAIN Returns the sample rate of the main digital acquisition HORizontal MAln Returns settings for the horizontal main time base HORizontal MAln SAMPLERate Sets the horizontal sample rate to the desired number of samples per second Or returns the current horizontal sample rate HORizontal MAIn SCAle Sets or returns the main time base horizontal scale HORizontal MAln UNIts Returns the units for the horizontal main time b
418. r search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 279 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold NR3 TTL ECL SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk THReshold TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4 V ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V NR3 is the clock level in volts SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce 2 280 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the data source setting for an setup hold trigger search to determine where to place a mark x is the search number You cannot specify the same source for both clock and data Search DPO Models SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 REF MSO Models SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce wfm wfm wfm lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce DPO Models CH1 CH4 specifies an input channel as the search source MATH specifies the math waveform as the sear
419. r the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models NDUty negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage The duty cycle is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Negative Duty Cycle Negative Width Period x 100 NEDGECount is the count of falling edges NOVershoot negative overshoot finds the negative overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Negative Overshoot Low Minimum Amplitude x 100 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NPULSECount is the count of negative pulses NwIdth negative width measurement is the distance time between the middle reference default 5096 amplitude points of a negative pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region PDUty positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the signal period expressed as a percentage It is measured on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region Positive Duty Cycle Positive Width Period x 10096 PEDGECount is the count of rising edges PERIOd is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated region Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds PHAse measures the phase difference amount of time a waveform lea
420. rder Syntax BUS B x I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 BUS B lt x gt 12C DATA SDATA SOUrce Arguments 1 4 specifies the analog channel to use as the I2C SDATA source DO D15 specifies the digital channel to use as the I2C SCLK source BUS B lt x gt LABel Sets or returns the waveform label for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number 1 through 4 Group Bus Syntax BUS B lt x gt LABel lt Qstring gt BUS B lt x gt LABel Arguments lt Qstring gt is an alphanumeric string of text enclosed in quotes that contains the text label information for bus lt x gt The text string is limited to 30 characters BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate Sets or returns the bit rate for LIN Group Bus Syntax BUS B lt X gt LIN BITRate lt NR1 gt BUS B x LIN BITRate Arguments lt 1 gt is the LIN bit rate You can enter any positive integer and the instrument will coerce the value to the closest supported bit rate Examples BUS B1 LIN BITRATE 9600 sets the bit rate 9600 BUS BL LIN BITRATE might return BUS B1 LIN BITRATE 2400 indicating the bit rate is set to 2400 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 77 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmMat Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the LIN ID format Bus BUS B lt X gt LIN IDFORMat NOPARity PARity BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFO
421. rdinates of the bottom right corner of the message box four coordinates are returned by the query Changing the text in the message box using the MESSAGE SHOW command automatically resizes the message box If you want a custom message box size send the MESSAGE BOX command after changing the text using the MESSAGE SHOW command Message box settings and data are saved and restored in saved setups Display MESSage BOX lt X1 gt lt Y1 gt lt X2 gt lt Y2 gt MESSage BOX MESSage STATE MESSage SHOW MESSage CLEAR X1 and X2 0 to 1023 and are pixel positions along the horizontal axis X1 defines the left and X2 defines the right side of the window Y1 and Y2 0 to 767 and are pixel positions along the vertical axis Y1 defines the top and Y2 defines the bottom of the window The reserved height of all characters is 16 pixels so the window must be at least that high to fully display characters X2 and lt 2 gt are optional because the MESSAGE SHOW command automatically sizes the box to fit the message four values are returned in a query MESSage CLEAR No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Removes the message text from the message window Display MESSage CLEAR MESSage BOX MESSage SHOW MESSage STATE MESSage CLEAR removes the message from the message window Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 215 Commands Listed in Alphabet
422. reased signal detail Doe Returns parameters for digital channel x D lt x gt LABel Sets or returns waveform label for digital channel lt x gt D lt x gt POSition Sets or returns the vertical position for digital channel lt x gt D lt x gt THREshold Sets or returns the logical threshold for digital channel lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold D lt x gt Sets the lower threshold for the digital channel selected TRIGger A SETHold THReshold D lt x gt Sets the Threshold for the Selected Digital Channel TRIGger B LOWerthreshold D lt x gt Sets or queries the lower threshold for the digital channel selected Save and Recall Command Group 2 30 Use the commands in the Save and Recall Command Group to store and retrieve internal waveforms and settings When you save a setup you save all the settings of the oscilloscope When you recall a setup the oscilloscope restores itself to the state it was in when you originally saved the setting Table 2 28 Save and Recall Commands Command Description FACtory Resets the oscilloscope to factory default settings RCL Recalls saved oscilloscope settings RECAII SETUp Recalls saved oscilloscope settings RECAII WAVEform Recalls a stored waveform to a reference location SAV Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location SAVe ASSIgn TYPe Sets or returns the assignment of the data to be saved SAVe EVENTtable BUS lt x gt Saves event tabl
423. reates the mark on a channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH creates the mark on the math waveform B x creates the mark on a bus waveform where x is the bus number REF x creates the mark on a reference waveform where x is the reference waveform number DIGital creates the mark on a digital waveform An error will result if no digital channel is turned on COLUMN creates marks on all waveforms in the current zoom pixel column Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MARK DELEte No Query Form Deletes a mark on a particular waveform all waveforms in a column the selected mark or all marks Group Mark Syntax MARK DELEte lt gt lt gt lt gt DIGi tal COLUMN Arguments CH x deletes the mark on a channel waveform where x is the channel number MATH deletes the mark on the math waveform lt gt deletes the mark on a bus waveform where x is the bus number REF x deletes the mark on a reference waveform where x is the reference waveform number DIGital deletes all marks on all digital channels COLUMN deletes marks on all waveforms in the current zoom pixel column MARK FREE Query Only Returns how many marks are available for use Group Mark Syntax MARK FREE MARK SELected END Query Only Returns the end of the selected mark 0 to 100 of the waveform Group Mark
424. rectory listing of the current working directory and the number of bytes of free space available This query is the same as the FILESystem DIR query and the FILESystem FREESpace query File System FILESystem FILESystem CWD FILESystem DELEte FILESystem DIR FILESystem REName None FILESYSTEM might return FILESYSTEM DIR tek00000 bmp elusiveGlitchl png TEMP TMP filel wfm file2 wfm MATH1 wfm REF1 wfm REF2 wfm FREESPACE 30212096 Sets or returns the current working directory CWD for FILESystem commands The default working directory is D Anytime you use this command to change the directory the directory that you specify is retained as the current working directory until you either change the directory or you delete the directory If you delete the current working directory the oscilloscope resets current working directory to the default directory D the next time the oscilloscope is powered on or the next time you execute a file system command This command supports the permutations of file and directory names supported by Microsoft Windows Relative path names for example Temp B Absolute path names for example D My Waveform m Implied relative path names for example newfile txt becomes D TekScope newfile txt if the current working directory is D TekScope File System Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 149 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Ar
425. return REF2 VERTICAL SCALE 1 0000 00 indicating that the current vertical scale setting for Reference 2 is 1 V per division REM No Query Form Embeds a comment within programs as a means of internally documenting the programs The oscilloscope ignores these embedded comment lines Group X Miscellaneous Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 227 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments Examples RST No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples SAV No Query Form 2 228 REM Qstring lt QString gt is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters REM This is a comment is a comment string that the oscilloscope will ignore Resets the oscilloscope to the factory default settings The RST command does not alter the following Calibration data that affect device specifications m The Output Queue B The Service Request Enable Register setting Power on status clear flag setting Alias definitions Stored settings The PUD Response m Any of the values associated with the DATA command Oscilloscope password Status and Error RST FACtory RECAI SETUp SAVe SETUp PSC RCL SAV None RST resets the oscilloscope settings to factory defaults Stores the state of the oscilloscope to a specified memory location You can use the RCL command to restore the oscilloscope to this saved state at a later time Tek
426. return D14 THRESHOLD 1 2500 indicating that the threshold level for the D14 digital channel is 1 25 volts Sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register ESER The ESER prevents events from being reported to the Status Byte Register STB For a detailed discussion on how to use registers see Registers Status and Error ESE lt NR1 gt ESE CLS DESE ESR EVENT EVMsg SRE STB Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples ESR Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples ETHERnet DHCPbootp Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR1 gt specifies the binary bits of the ESER according to this value which ranges from 0 through 255 The power on default for the ESER is 0 if PSC is 1 If PSC is 0 the ESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle NOTE Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same values allows only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on the ESB bit bit 5 of the Status Byte Register Use the DESE command to set the DESER ESE 209 sets the ESER to binary 11010001 which enables the PON URQ EXE and OPC bits ESE might return 186 showing that the ESER contains the binary value 10111010 Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register SESR ESR also clears the SESR reading the SESR clears it For a detailed discussion on how to use registe
427. return LOCK NONE indicating that the front panel controls are enabled by this command Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual LRN Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Returns the commands that list the oscilloscope settings except for configuration information for the calibration values the WFMInpre query and the WFMOutpre query This query allows you to record or learn the current oscilloscope settings You can use these commands to return the oscilloscope to the state it was in when you made the LRN query This command is identical to the SET Command Miscellaneous L RN SET LRN might return a long response part of which could be as follows ACQUIRE STOPAFTER RUNSTOP STATE 1 MODE SAMPLE NUMENV INFINITE NUMAVG 16 SAMPLINGMODE RT HEADER 1 LOCK NONE LANGUAGE ENGLISH VERBOSE 1 ALIAS STATE 0 DISPLAY COLOR PALETTE NORMAL DISPLAY STYLE DOTSONLY 0 DISPLAY PERSISTENCE 0 0000 CLOCK 1 GRATICULE FULL INTEnSITY WAVEFORM 30 GRATICULE 75 BACKLIGHT HIGH HARDCOPY INKSAVER OFF LAYOUT LANDSCAPE PREVIEW 0 SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL SAVE ASSIGN TYPE SETUP TRIGGER A MODE AUTO TYPE EDGE LE VEL 20 0000E 3 LEVEL CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 0000 CH4 0 0000 TRIGGER A UPPERTHRESHOLD CH1 1 4000 CH2 800 0000E 3 CH3 800 0000E 3 CH4 800 0000E 3 TRIGG ER A LOWERTHRESHOLD CH1 20 0000E 3 CH2 0 0000 CH3 0 00
428. returns the A trigger holdoff time Trigger TRIGger A HOLDOff TIMe lt NR3 gt TRIGger A HOLDOff TIMe NR3 specifies the holdoff time in seconds The range is from 20 ns through 8 0 s TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME might return TRIGGER A HOLDOFFTIME 1 2000E 06 indicating that the A trigger holdoff time is set to 1 2 ps TRIGGER A HOLDOFF TIME 10 sets the A trigger holdoff time to 10 s Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual TRIGger A LEVel Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Sets or returns the trigger level for the A trigger Trigger TRIGger A LEVel ECL TTL lt NR3 gt TRIGger A LEVel ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TRIGGER A LEVEL might return TRIGGER A LEVel 1 3000E 00 indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1 3 V TRIGGER A LEVEL TTL sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level which is 1 4 V TRIGger A LEVel AUXin Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the trigger level for the AUXIN port Trigger TRIGger A LEVel AUXin lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LEVel AUXin lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in volts ECL specifies a preset ECL trigger level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL trigger level of 1 4V TRIGGER A LEVEL AUXIN ECL sets the auxiliary input trigger level to 1 3
429. rguments 2 312 Sets or returns the indicator bits portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER INDBits lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER INDBits lt QString gt is a quoted string that is the indicator bits portion of the binary header string Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS 11001 sets the indicator bits portion of the header string to 11001 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS might return TRIGGER A BUS Bl FLEXRAY HEADER INDBITS XXXXX indicating that the indicator bits portion of the header string are don t cares TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAYLength Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the payload length portion of the binary header string to be used for FLEXRAY trigger Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray HEADER PAYLength lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray HEADER PAYLength lt QString gt is the length of the payload portion of the Binary header string TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH 1100101 sets the FLEXRAY header paylength to 1100101 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY HEADER PAYLENGTH might return TRIGGER 1 HEADER PAYLENGTH XXXXXXX indicating the FLEXRAY header paylength is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt
430. rguments CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION x lt NR3 gt CURSor XY RECTangular Y POSITION lt x gt lt NR3 gt is the coordinate in volts CURSor XY RECTangular Y UNIts Query Only CURVe 2 122 Group Syntax Group Syntax Returns the cursor Y rectangular units Cursor CURSor XY RECTangular Y UNIts Transfers waveform data to and from the oscilloscope in binary or ASCII format Each waveform transferred includes a waveform preamble which contains the data format scale and associated information For analog waveforms the CURVe query transfers data from the oscilloscope The data source is specified by the DATa SOUrce command The first and last data points are specified by the DATa STARt and DATa STOP commands The oscilloscope returns data from the last acquisition 1f the source is a channel waveform that is being previewed The data does not reflect the acquisition preview parameters The user should always follow acquisition parameter changes with a single sequence OPC command prior to CURVe to ensure the return data reflects the new acquisition parameters The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the oscilloscope The data 18 stored in the reference memory location specified by DATa DESTination starting with the data point specified by DATa STARt Only one waveform can be transferred at a time The waveform will only be displayed if the reference Is displayed NOTE Transferring large volumes of
431. rigger TRIGger A SETHOld DATa TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA might return TRIGGER A SETHOLD DATA SOURCE 2 THRESHOLD 80 0000E 3 TRIGger A SETHold DATa SOUrce Sets or returns the data source for the setup and hold trigger You cannot specify the same source for both clock and data For DPO models you can specify only a single data source Data sources for DPO models may be one of CH1 CHA or the Auxin port EXT or AUX For MSO models you can specify any combination of CH1 CH4 and D0 D15 as the data sources Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 349 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Trigger DPO Models TRIGger A SETHOld DATa SOUrce lt wfm gt MSO Models TRIGger A SETHOld DATa SOUrce lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt lt wfm gt wfm lt wfm gt lt wfm gt TRIGger A SETHOld DATa SOUrce TRIGger A SETHold CLOCk SOUrce DPO Models lt wfm gt specifies the source channel number and is one of CH1 CH4 EXT or AUX You can specify only one waveform on a DPO MSO Models lt wfm gt specifies the source channel numbers Each lt wfm gt can be one of CH1 CH4 or D0 D15 Auxin EXT or AUX is not valid as a data source TRIGGER A SETHO
432. rms WFMOutpre FRACTional This query always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displayed WFMOutpre NR_Pt Returns the number of points for the waveform transmitted in response to a CURVe query WFMOutpre PT_Fmt Returns the point format for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre PT_Off WFMOutpre PT_ORder This query always returns a 0 if the waveform specified by DATA SOUrce is on or displayed This query always returns LINEAR WFMOutpre WFld WFMOutpre XINcr Returns a string describing the acquisition parameters for the outgoing waveform Returns the horizontal sampling interval for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre XUNit Returns the horizontal units for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre XZEro WFMOutpre YMUIt Returns the time of the first point in the outgoing waveform Returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre YOFf Returns the vertical position in digitizing levels for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre YUNit Returns the vertical units for the outgoing waveform WFMOutpre YZEro Returns the vertical offset for the outgoing waveform Zoom Command Group Use the commands in the Zoom Command Group to expand and position the waveform display horizontally and vertically without changing the time base or vertical settings Table 2 34 Zoom Commands Command Description ZO
433. rn REF1 VERTICAL POSITION 1 3000 00 indicating that the current position of Reference 1 is 1 3 divisions below the center horizontal graticule Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle Sets or returns the vertical scale for the reference waveform specified by lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter For a signal with constant amplitude increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger Scale affects all waveforms but affects reference and math waveforms differently from channel waveforms For reference and math waveforms this setting controls the display only graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition hardware For channel waveforms this setting controls the vertical size of the acquisition window as well as the display scale The range and resolution of scale values depends on the probe attached and any other external factors you have specified Group Vertical Syntax REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle lt NR3 gt REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle Related Commands CH lt x gt SCAle MATH 1 VERTical SCAle Arguments lt NR3 gt is the gain in user units per division Examples REF4 VERTICAL SCALE 100E 03 sets the Reference 4 scale to 100 mV per division REFA4 VERTICAL SCALE might
434. roup Syntax Arguments 2 142 Sets or returns the network domain name Ethernet ETHERnet DOMAINnName lt Qstring gt ETHERnet DOMAINname lt QString gt is the network domain name enclosed in quotes Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order ETHERNET DOMAINNAME Alphal Mycorp com sets the domain name that the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network ETHERnet ENET ADDress Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns the Ethernet address value assigned to the oscilloscope This is assigned at the factory and can not be changed Ethernet ETHERNET ENET ADDress ETHERNET ENET ADDRESS returns an Ethernet address such as 08 00 11 01 02 03 ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Group Syntax Arguments Examples ETHERnet HTTPPort Group Syntax Sets or returns the remote interface gateway IP address Ethernet ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Qstring ETHERnet GATEWay IPADDress Qstring is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes ETHERNET GATEWAY IPADDRESS 128 143 16 1 sets the gateway IP address Sets or returns the remote interface HTTP port value Ethernet ETHERnet HTTPPort Qstring ETHERnet HTTPPort Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 143 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples ETHERnet IPADDress Group Syntax Arguments Examples ETHERnet NAME Grou
435. rs see Registers Status and Error ESR ALLEv CLS DESE ESE EVENT EVMsg SRE STB ESR might return 213 showing that the SESR contains the binary value 11010101 Sets or returns the network initialization search for a DHCP BOOTP server Ethernet ETHERnet DHCPbootp ON OFF ETHERnet DHCPbootp Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 141 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples ON enables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP or BOOTP server in order to automatically assign a dynamic IP address to the oscilloscope NOTE Do not use DHCP BOOTP searching if your oscilloscope has been assigned a static address on a network If you set this command to ON the DHCP BOOTP search will delete or change your static IP address information OFF disables the oscilloscope to search the network for a DHCP or BOOTP server ETHERNET DHCPBOOTP ON sets the oscilloscope to search for a DHCP or BOOTP server and assign a dynamic IP address to the oscilloscope ETHERnet DNS IPADDress Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the network Domain Name Server Dns IP address Ethernet ETHERnet DNS IPADDress lt QString gt ETHERNET DNS IPADDress Qstring is a standard IP address value enclosed in quotes ETHERNET DNS IPADDRESS 128 196 13 352 sets the Dns IP address that the oscilloscope uses to communicate with the network ETHERnet DOMAINname G
436. rtical units 2 24 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups Table 2 24 Math Commands cont Command Description MATH 1 HORizontal POSition Sets or returns the math horizontal display position for FFT or non live math reference waveforms MATH 1 TYPe Sets or returns the math waveform mode type MATHVAR Returns all numerical values used within math expressions MATHVAR VAR lt x gt Sets or returns numerical values you can use within math expressions Measurement Command Group Use the commands in the Measurement Command Group to control the automated measurement system Up to four automated measurements can be displayed on the screen In the commands these measurement readouts are named MEAS lt x gt where lt x gt is the measurement number In addition to the four displayed measurements the measurement commands let you specify an additional measurement IMMed The immediate measurement has no front panel equivalent Immediate measurements are never displayed Because they are computed only when needed immediate measurements slow the waveform update rate less than displayed measurements Whether you use displayed or immediate measurements use the VALue query to obtain measurement results Measurement commands can set and query measurement parameters You can assign some parameters such as waveform sources differently for each measurement Other parameters such as reference levels hav
437. s Command Default value SAVE IMAGE FILEFORMAT PNG SAVE IMAGE LAYOUT LANDSCAPE SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT INTERNAL SAVE WAVEFORM GATING NONE SEARCH SEARCH1 STATE 0 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA DIRECTION NOCARE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN FRAMETYPE DATA SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN IDENTIFIER MODE STANDARD SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CONDITION SOF SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT VALUE XXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA HIVALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA OFFSET 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA QUALIFIER EQUAL SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA SIZE 1 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY EOFTYPE STATIC SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY ERRTYPE CRCHEADER SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID HIVALUE XXXXXXXXXXX SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1
438. s Returns the units string for the horizontal time base Horizontal HORi zontal MAIn UNIts HORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS might return HORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS STRING Hz HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing Query Only Group Syntax Examples HORizontal POSition Group 2 166 Returns the units string for the horizontal time base Horizontal HORizontal MAIn UNIts STRing HORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS STRING might return HORIZONTAL MAIN UNITS STRING Hz indicating that the horizontal units string is set to Hertz Sets or returns the horizontal position If Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off this command is equivalent to adjusting the HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel When Horizontal Delay Mode is on this command stores a new horizontal position that is used when Horizontal Delay Mode is turned off Horizontal Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal POSition NR3 HORizontal POSition NR3 is the horizontal position expressed as the percentage of the waveform displayed left of the center of the graticule HORIZONTAL POSITION 50 sets the horizontal position to 5096 HORIZONTAL POSITION might return HORIZONTAL POSITION 100 indicating that the horizontal position is set to 100 HORizontal PREViewstate Query Only Group Syntax Returns Returns a boolean value to indicate whether the acquisiti
439. s Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID 1 71 sets the mid reference level to 71 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID 0 7100E 00 indicating that the absolute midl reference level is set to 71 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the mid reference level for the to waveform when taking a delay measurement and is the 5096 reference level when MEASUrement REFLevel METHod is set to Absolute This command affects the results of delay measurements NOTE this command affects the associated reference level parameter for all MEASurements IMMed and the four periodic measurements Measurement MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 NR3 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod NR3 is the mid reference level in volts The default is 0 0 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 0 5 sets the mid reference level for the delay waveform to 0 5 V MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 might return MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 0 5000E 00 indicating that the absolute mid2 reference level is set to 0 5 V MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt Group 2 208 Sets or returns the mid reference level for channel lt x gt where x is the measurement channel Measurement Tektronix 4000 Series Progr
440. s Listed in Alphabetical Order HORizontal MAIn Query Only Group Syntax Examples Returns settings for the horizontal main time base Horizontal HORi zontal MAIn HORIZONTAL MAIN might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 4 0000E 6 SAMPLERATE 250 0000E 6 UNITS S UNITS STRING s HORizontal MAIn SAMPLERate Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the current horizontal sample rate Horizontal HORi zontal MAIn SAMPLERate HORizontal RECOrdlength lt NR3 gt specifies the sample rate in seconds HORIZONTAL SAMPLERATE might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SAMPLERATE 2 5000E 09 indicating that the sample rate is currently set to 2 5 GS s HORizontal MAIn SCAle Group Syntax Sets or returns the main horizontal scale The specified scale value is rounded to a valid scale setting Horizontal HORizontal MAIn SCAle HORizontal MAIn SCAle Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 165 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments Examples NR3 is the time per division The range is from 400 ps 1 ns through 1000 s depending on the record length HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2E 6 sets the main scale to 2 us per division HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE might return HORIZONTAL MAIN SCALE 2 0000E 06 indicating that the main scale is currently set to 2 us per division HORizontal MAIn UNIts Query Only Group Syntax Example
441. s and is identical to ALIas DELEte NAMe An error message Is generated if the named alias does not exist Alias ALIas DELEte Qstring ESR ALIas DELEte ALL Qstring is the name of the alias to be removed Using ALIas DELEte without specifying an alias causes an execution error lt QString gt must bea previously defined value Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 63 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples ALIAS DELETE SETUP1 deletes the alias named SETUPI ALlas DELEte ALL No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Examples Deletes all existing aliases Alias ALIas DELEte ALL ALIas DELEte ALIas DELEte NAMe ALIAS DELETE ALL deletes all existing aliases ALlas DELEte NAMe No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples ALlas STATE Group Syntax 2 64 Removes a specified alias This command is identical to ALIas DELEte Alias ALIas DELEte NAMe lt QString gt lt QString gt is the name of the alias to remove Using ALIas DELEte NAMe without specifying an alias causes an execution error lt QString gt must be an existing alias ALIAS STARTUP deletes the alias named STARTUP Turns aliases on or off This command is identical to the ALIas command Alias ALIas STATE lt NR1 gt OFF ON ALIas STATE Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples ALLEv Query Only Group Syn
442. s for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre PT Off DATa SOUrce Arguments are ignored WFMOUTPRE PT OFF might return WFMOUTPRE PT OFF 0 indicating that the waveform specified by DATA SOURCE is on or displayed WFMOutpre PT ORder Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples 2 392 This query is for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes and always returns LINEAR Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre PT_ORder DATa SOUrce WFMOUTPRE PT ORDER returns WFMOUTPRE PT ORDER LINEAR Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOutpre WFld Query Only Returns a string describing several aspects of the acquisition parameters for the waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command The query command will time out and an error will be generated if the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce is not turned on Waveform Transfer Group Syntax wFMoutpre WFId Related Commands DATa SOUrce Returns Qstring comprises the following comma separated fields documented in the tables below Table 2 43 Waveform Suffixes Field Description Examples Source The source identification string as it appears in CH1 4 the front panel scale factor readouts Math1 Ref1 4 Coupling A string describing the vertical coupling of the AC coupling waveform the Source waveform in the case of
443. s not acquiring data TRIGGER indicates that the oscilloscope triggered and is acquiring the post trigger information TRIGGER STATE might return TRIGGER STATE ARMED indicating that the pretrigger data is being acquired Tests self test the interface and returns a 0 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 373 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Miscellaneous Syntax TST Examples 757 always returns 0 UNLock No Query Form Unlocks the front panel The command is equivalent to LOCk NONe Group Miscellaneous Syntax UNLock ALL Related Commands Arguments Examples ALL specifies that all front panel buttons and knobs are unlocked UNLOCK ALL unlocks all front panel buttons and knobs USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal Query Only Group Syntax Related Commands Examples 2 374 This query to returns the USBTMC product ID The product ID numbers vary for each instrument family and model Miscellaneous USBTMC PRODUCTID DECimal USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal USBTMC SERIALnumber USBTMC VENDORID DECimal USBTMC VENDORID HEXadecimal USBTMC PRODUCTID DECIMAL might return USBTMC PRODUCTID DECIMAL 1025 indicating the product ID in decimal is 1025 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order USBTMC PRODUCTID HEXadecimal Query Only This query to returns the USBTMC product ID The product ID numbers vary for each instrument family
444. s setting the front panel controls taking measurements performing statistical calculations and exporting data for use in other programs Setting Up Remote Communications You can remotely communicate between your oscilloscope and PC via the Ethernet USB and GPIB using the TEK USB 488 Adapter Ethernet Ifyou are using Ethernet start by connecting an appropriate Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port RJ 45 connector on the rear panel of your oscilloscope This connects the oscilloscope to a 10 100 Base T local area network To change the Ethernet settings on your oscilloscope do the following 1 On the front panel push Utility Push Utility Page Select I O with the Multipurpose knob Push Ethernet Network Settings Uo e p yP On the side bezel menu if you are on a DHCP Ethernet network and using a through cable set DHCP BOOTP to On D If you are using a cross over cable set DHCP BOOTP to Off and set a hard coded TCPIP address USB Ifyou are using USB start by connecting an appropriate USB cable to the USB 2 0 high speed device port on the rear panel of your oscilloscope Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 1 1 Getting Started GPIB 1785 166 With USB the system automatically configures itself To verify that the USB is enabled On the front panel push Utility Push Utility Page Select I O with the Multipurpose knob ub db m Push USB and verify that USB is enabled 5 If USB is not enable
445. search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the data source setting for SETHold DATa SOUrce an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold DATa THReshold Sets or returns the data threshold setting for an setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the hold time setting for an SETHold HOLDTime setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A Sets or returns the setup time setting for an SETHold SETTime setup hold search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold lower threshold to determine where to place a mark SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold MATH MATH1 Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold lower threshold to determine where to place a mark SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A SETHold THReshold REF lt x gt Sets or returns the trigger search setup and hold lower threshold to determine where to place a mark SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall DELTatime Sets or returns the transition time setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall POLarity Sets or returns the polarity setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Sets or returns the source setting for an transition search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger
446. self test loop option DIAg LOOP OPTion NTIMes Sets the self test loop option to run N times DIAg LOOP STOP Stops the self test at the end of the current loop DIAg RESUIt FLAg Returns the pass fail status from the last self test sequence execution DIAg RESUIt LOG Returns the internal results log from the last self test sequence execution DIAg SELect lt function gt Selects one of the available self test areas DIAg STATE Sets the oscilloscope operating state DIAg SELect Runs self tests on the specified system subsystem Cursor Command Group Use the commands in the Cursor Command Group to control the cursor display and readout You can use these commands to control the setups for cursor and cursor 2 such as cursor position Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Command Groups You can also use the commands to select one of the following cursor functions Off Turns off the display of all cursors Waveform Cursors Consists of two cursors Waveform cursors enable you to conveniently measure waveform amplitude and time B Screen Cursors Consists of two pairs of independent horizontal and vertical cursors You can use these cursors to indicate an arbitrary position within the waveform display area Table 2 17 Cursor Commands Command Description CURSor Returns cursor settings CURSor FUNCtion Sets or returns the cursor type CURSor HBArs Returns hbar cursor settings CURSor HBArs DEL
447. st of quoted strings Each string contains the name of a file or directory in the current working directory File System FILESystem DIR FILESystem CWD FILESystem MKDir None FILESystem DIR returns a list of files and directories in the current working directory FILESYSTEM DIR might return FILESYSTEM DIR tek00000 png my CAN setup set savedwfml isf myImages FILESystem FORMat No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Examples Formats a mass storage device This command should be used with extreme caution as it causes all data on the specified mass storage device to be lost Drive letters e g E are case sensitive and must be upper case For all other FILESYSTEM commands drives letters are not case sensitive Example FILES FORMAT E Formats the USB flash drive installed in the oscilloscope s front panel USB port File System FILESystem FORMat drive name gt is a quoted string that defines the disk drive to format FILESYSTEM FORMAT E Formats the USB flash drive installed in the oscilloscope s front panel USB port Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 151 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FILESystem FREESpace Query Only Returns the number of bytes of free space on the current drive Group File System Syntax X FILESystem FREESpace Related Commands FILESystem FREESpace FILESystem CWD FILESystem MKDir No Query Form Creates a new folder Group File
448. sted in Alphabetical Order ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TRIGGER B LEVEL CH2 might return TRIGGER B LEVEL CH2 1 3000E 00 indicating that the B edge trigger is set to 1 3 V for channel 2 TRIGGER B LEVEL CH3 TTL sets the B edge trigger to TTL high level for channel 3 Sets or returns the B trigger level for digital channel x where x 15 the channel number Each Channel can have an independent Level Trigger TRIGger B LEVel D x ECL TTL NR3 TRIGger B LEVel D lt x gt ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TRIGger B LOWerthreshold lt gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the B trigger lower threshold for the channel x where x is the channel number Each channel can have an independent level Used in Runt and Slew Rate triggers as the lower threshold Used for all other Trigger Types as the single level threshold Trigger TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH x ECL TTL NR3 3 TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH x ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 369 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NR3 is the thres
449. stored starting with the first point in the record The oscilloscope will ignore the value set by DATa STOP when reading in data It will stop reading data when there is no data to read or when it has reached the specified record length When transferring data from the oscilloscope you must specify the first and last data points in the waveform record Setting DATa STARt to 1 and DATa STOP to the record length will always return the entire waveform The DATa SOUrce command specifies the waveform source when transferring a waveform from the oscilloscope You can only transfer one waveform at a time Waveforms sent to the oscilloscope are always stored in one of the reference memory locations Use the DATa DESTination command to specify a reference memory location Each waveform you transfer has an associated waveform preamble which contains information such as horizontal scale vertical scale and the other settings in effect when the waveform was created Refer to the individual WFMInpre and WFMoOutpre commands for information Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller you can convert the data points into voltage values for analysis using information from the waveform preamble You can transfer waveforms from the oscilloscope to an external controller using the following sequence 1 Select the waveform source s using DATa SOUrce 2 Specify the waveform data format using DATa ENCdg 3 Specify the number of bytes per data
450. t CURSor VBArs UNIts SEConds sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the time domain seconds HERtz sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the frequency domain Hertz DEGrees sets the units to degrees for use with an XY display PERcent sets the units to percent for use with ratio cursors SECONDS HERTZ DEGREES or PERCENT depending on the current vertical bar cursor units CURSOR VBARS UNITS HERtz sets the units of the VBArs cursors to 1 seconds CURSOR VBARS UNITS might return CURSOR VBARS UNITS SECONDS indicating that the units for the vertical bar cursor are currently set to seconds Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CURSor VBArs USE No Query Form Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets the vertical bar cursor measurement scale This command is only applicable when ratio cursors are on Cursor CURSOr VBArs USE CURrent FIVEdivs CURSor VBArs UNIts CURrent sets the V Bar measurement scale so that 095 is the current position of the left most V Bar cursor and 100 is the current position of the right most V Bar cursor FIVEdivs sets V Bar measurement scale so that 5 screen major divisions is 100 where 0 is 2 5 divisions and 100 is 42 5 divisions from the center vertical graticule CURSOR VBARS USE CURRENT sets the V Bar measurement scale to use the current cursor positions as 0 and 100
451. t CAN SOUrce Sets or returns the CAN data source BUS B lt x gt DISplay FORMAt Sets the display format for the numerical information in the specified bus waveform BUS B lt x gt DISplay TYPe Sets the display type for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt FLEXray BITRate Sets or returns the bit rate for FLEXRAY BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CHannel Sets or returns the FLEXRAY ID format BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SIGnal Sets or returns the FLEXRAY standard BUS B lt x gt FLEXray SOUrce Sets or returns the FLEXRAY data source BUS B lt x gt I2C ADDRess RWINClude Sets and returns whether the read write bit is included in the address BUS B lt x gt I2C CLOCK SCLK SOUrce Sets or returns the I2C source BUS B lt x gt I2C DATA SDATA SOUrce Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Sets or returns the I2C SDATA source 2 13 Command Groups 2 14 Table 2 15 Bus Commands cont Commands Description BUS B lt x gt LABel Sets or returns the waveform label for the specified bus BUS B lt x gt LIN BITRate Sets or returns the bit rate for LIN BUS B lt x gt LIN IDFORmat Sets or returns the LIN ID format BUS B lt x gt LIN POLARity Sets or returns the LIN polarity BUS B lt x gt LIN SAMPLEpoint Sets or returns the sample point in at which to sample during each bit period BUS B lt x gt LIN SOUrce Sets or returns the LIN data source BUS B lt x gt LIN STANDard Sets or returns the LIN standard BUS B
452. t TRIGger A LE Vel 2 265 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LE Vel CH lt x gt 2 266 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LE Vel MATH 2 266 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LE Vel REF lt x gt 2 267 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc FUNCtion 2 267 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CH lt x gt 2 267 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCK EDGE 2 268 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut CLOCk SOUrce 2 268 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut D lt x gt 2 269 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc INPut MATH 2 269 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIe INPut REF lt x gt 2 269 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut CH lt x gt 2 270 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D lt x gt 2 270 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut MATH 2 271 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut REF lt x gt 2 27 1 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn 2 27 1 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit 2 272 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit 2 272 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH lt x gt 2 273 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIec THReshold MATH 2 273 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold REF lt x gt 2 274 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A
453. t IMMed SOUrce 2 187 MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce lt x gt 2 188 MEASUrement IMMed SOUrce2 2 188 MEASUrement MMed TY Pe 2 189 MEASUrement IMMed UNIts 2 192 MEASUrement IMMed VALue 2 192 MEASUrement INDICators HORZ lt x gt 2 193 MEASUrement INDICators NUMHORZ 2 193 MEASUrement INDICators NUMVERT 2 194 MEASUrement INDICators STATE 2 194 MEASUrement INDICators VERT lt x gt 2 195 MEASUrement INDICators 2 193 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt COUNtT 2 195 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay DIRection 2 196 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay EDGE lt x gt 2 197 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt DELay 2 196 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MA Ximum 2 197 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MEAN 2 198 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt MINImum 2 198 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 2 198 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOUrce lt x gt 2 200 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE2 2 199 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STATE 2 200 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev 2 201 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe 2 201 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts 2 204 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt VALue 2 204 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt 2 195 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute HIGH 2 206 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute LOW 2 206 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID 2 207 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID lt x gt 2 208 MEASUrement REFLevel ABSolute MID2 2 208 MEASUrement REFLevel METHod 2 209 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH 2 209 MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW 2 210 MEASUrement REFLevel
454. t apply to incoming waveform data Group Waveform Transfer Syntax DATa ENCdg ASCIi FAStest RPBinary SRIbinary SRPbinary DATa ENCdg Related Commands WFMOutpre ENCdg WFMOutpre BN Fmt WFMOutpre BYT Or Arguments X ASCIi specifies the ASCII representation for waveform data points If ASCII is the value then BN Fmt and BYT Or are ignored FAStest specifies that the data be sent in the fastest possible manner consistent with maintaining accuracy and is interpreted with respect to the waveform specified by DATa SOUrce RIBINARY specifies signed integer data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first When BYT Nr is 1 the range is from 128 through 127 When BYT Nr is 2 the range is from 32 768 through 32 767 Center screen is 0 zero The upper limit is the top of the screen and the lower limit is the bottom of the screen This is the default argument RPBinary specifies the positive integer data point representation with the most significant byte transferred first When BYT Nr is 1 the range from 0 through 255 When BYT Nr is 2 the range is from 0 to 65 535 The center of the screen is 127 The upper limit is the top of the screen and the lower limit is the bottom of the screen SRIbinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped meaning that the least significant byte 1s transferred first This format is useful when transferring data to IBM
455. t eer 2 5 Argument Types cesse e ex ere E 2 7 Command Groups EMT 2 11 Acquisition Command 2 2 222 2 nen 2 11 Alias Command Group eee operire enes raider du Er br 2 12 Bus Command Groupie eee exerted aene dade eds rer de ds 2 13 Calibration and Diagnostic Command 2 2222 2 16 C rsor Command tbe ee eV rer ee EE OUT 2 16 Display Command 2 2 18 Ethernet Command 2 2 19 File System Command 2 2 2 2 2 20 Hard Copy Command eese ee eme eese eene 2 21 Horizontal Command Group 2 2 22 Mark Command Group etes e RSS Rb ue eese usa desea d eee E EE 2 23 Math Command 2 2 24 Measurement Command 2 25 Miscellaneous Command 2 2 ee nenne 2 28 MSO Command GroU p eta ee nuu IA nyte Dope e Det a odd euge 2 29 Save and Recall Command 2 30 Search Command Group pen setts EE erede eo ERE ORE eda Pea TET P
456. t event type is set to 1 the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one and the event is recorded in the Event Queue 2 If the corresponding bit in the ESER is also enabled 3 then the ESB bit in the SBR is set to one 4 When output is sent to the Output Queue the MAV bit in the SBR is set to one 5 When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the SRER is enabled 6 the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service request is generated 7 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Synchronization Methods Overview Although most commands are completed almost immediately after being received by the oscilloscope some commands start a process that requires time For example once a single sequence acquisition command is executed depending upon the applied signals and trigger settings it may take a few seconds before the acquisition is complete Rather than remain idle while the operation is in process the oscilloscope will continue processing other commands This means that some operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier operation A first operation must complete before the next one is processed The oscilloscope status and event reporting system is designed to accommodate this process The Operation Complete OPC bit of the Standard Event Status Register SESR can be programmed to ind
457. t high value SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE 110010 sets the cycle count high value to 110010 SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE might return Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT HIVALUE XXXXXX indicating the cycle count high value is set to don t cares SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount QUALIifier Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the FLEXRAY cycle count qualifier Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CYCLEcount QUAL i fier LESSThan MOREThan EQUal UNEQual LESSEQual MOREEQual INrange OUTrang SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CYCLEcount QUALi fier LESSThan sets the cycle count qualifier to less than MOREThan sets the cycle count qualifier to greater than EQUal sets the cycle count qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the cycle count qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the cycle count qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the cycle count qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the cycle count qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the cycle count qualifier to out of range SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY CYCLECOUNT QUALIFIER LESSTHANsets the cycle count qualifier to LESSTHAN SE
458. t x gt STATE MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt SOURCE 1 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TY Pe OFF disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot ON enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order lt NR1 gt 0 disables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot any other value enables calculation and display of the specified measurement slot Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS2 STATE ON computes and displays the measurement defined as measurement 2 MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STATE 0 indicating that measurement defined for measurement slot 1 is disabled MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt STDdev Query Only Returns the standard deviation of values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset Measurements are specified by lt x gt the measurement slots from through 4 Group Measurement Syntax X MEASUrement MEAS x STDdev Examples MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STDDEV might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 STDDEV 21 0E 12 MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt TYPe Sets or returns the measurement type defined for the specified measurement slot The measurement slot is specified by x which ranges from I through 4 Digital channel measurements do not have a user settable midRef threshold If you specify a digital channel measurement that is not available on MSO models
459. t x gt PARallel wIDth lt NR1 gt BUS B lt x gt PARal lel wIDth lt NR1 gt is the number of bits Sets or returns the position of the bus lt x gt waveform on the display where x is the bus number 1 through 4 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 81 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Conditions Group Syntax Arguments This command requires a DPO4AUTO DPO4EMBD or DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B x POSition NR3 BUS B x POSition lt NR3 gt specifies the position BUS B lt x gt RS232C BITRate Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the RS232 bit rate for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B x RS232C BITRate lt NR1 gt BUS B x RS232C BITRate lt NR1 gt is the bit rate in bits per second You can enter any positive integer and the instrument will coerce the value to the closest supported bit rate BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits Conditions Group Syntax 2 82 Sets or returns the number of RS232 data bits for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABits 7 8 BUS B lt x gt RS232C DATABItS Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order 7 specifies seven bits in the RS232 data frame 8 specifies eight bits in the RS232 da
460. t x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa HIVALue 2 257 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa QUA Lifier 2 257 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa SIZe 2 258 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN DATa VALue 2 258 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE 2 259 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue 2 259 Index 6 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt PARallel VALue 2 260 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C CONDition 2 260 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa SIZe 2 261 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C RX DATa VALue 2 261 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa SIZe 2 262 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt RS232C TX DATa VALue 2 262 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI CONDition 2 262 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa SIZe 2 264 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MISO IN VALue 2 263 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt SPI DATa MOS 0UT VALue 2 263 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS SOUrce 2 264 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS 2 236 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe 2 265 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce 2 265 SEARCH SEARCH lt x g
461. ta frame BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the RS232 delimiting value for a packet on bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C DELIMiter NUL1 LF CR SPace XFF BUS B x RS232C DELIMi ter NUL specifies 0x00 LF specifies Ox0A CR specifies 0x0D XFF specifies OxFF BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the display mode for the bus lt x gt display and event table where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B x RS232C DISplaymode FRAme PACKET BUS B lt x gt RS232C DISplaymode FRAme displays each frame as a single entity PACKET displays a group of frames terminated with a single frame defined by the BUS B x RS232C DELImi ter command or the front panel Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 83 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the RS232C parity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4COMP application module Bus BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity NONe EVEN ODD BUS B lt x gt RS232C PARity NONE specifies no parity EVEN specifies even parity ODD specifies odd parity BUS B lt x gt RS232C POLarity Conditions
462. tal channel lt x gt waveform The text string is limited to 30 characters D4 LABEL might return D4 LABEL Clk wfm 4 Sets or returns the vertical position for digital channel lt x gt where x is the channel number NOTE Unlike analog channels which use the center baseline as the zero point digital channels use the bottom logic level as the zero point Because of the slot model used to describe digital channel position the oscilloscope rounds off divisions to the nearest slot MSO 2 139 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Arguments D lt x gt THREshold Group Syntax Arguments Examples ESE Group Syntax Related Commands 2 140 D x POSition lt NR3 gt D x POSition NR3 is the position of the digital channel in slot units Use the oscilloscope front panel controls to place the channel then query the channel to obtain an exact value for the position Sets or returns the logical threshold for digital channel x where x is the channel number MSO D x THREshold TTL NR3 1 D x THREShold ECL sets the digital threshold for channel lt x gt to a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL sets the digital threshold for channel x to a preset TTL high level of 1 4V lt NR3 gt specifies the digital threshold for channel x in volts D5 THRESHOLD ECL sets the threshold for D5 digital channel to ECL levels D14 threshold might
463. tax Related Commands Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order MEASUrement MEAS x VALue MEASUrement MEAS lt x gt UNIts ESR ALLEv Examples MEASUREMENT 51 VALUE might return MEASUREMENT MEAS1 VALue 2 8740E 06 If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it then an item 15 added to the error queue The error can be checked for with the ESR and ALLEv commands MEASUrement METHod Sets or returns the method used to calculate the 0 and 100 reference level Group Measurement Syntax MEASUrement METHod Auto HIStogram MINMax Related Commands Arguments Examples MEASUrement METHod MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent HIGH MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent LOW MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID MEASUrement REFLevel PERCent MID2 Auto selects the best method for each data set HIStogram sets the high and low waveform levels statistically using a histogram algorithm MINMax uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record This selection is best for examining waveforms with no large flat portions of a common value such as sine waves and triangle waves MEASUREMENT METHOD might return MEASUREMENT METHOD MINMAX indicating that the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX MEASUrement REFLevel Query Only Group Returns the current reference level parameters Measurement Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 205 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Synt
464. tax Related Commands Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order OFF or lt NR1 gt 0 turns alias expansion off If a defined alias is sent when ALlas STATE is OFF a command error 102 is generated ON or lt NR1 gt 0 turns alias expansion on When a defined alias is received the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed ALIAS STATE OFF turns the command alias feature off ALIAS STATE returns 0 when the alias feature 15 off Prompts the oscilloscope to return all events and their messages delimited by commas and removes the returned events from the Event Queue Use the ESR query to enable the events to be returned This command is similar to repeatedly sending EVMsg queries to the oscilloscope Status and Error ALLEv ESR EVMsg ALLEV might return ALLEV 2225 Measurement error No waveform to measure 420 Query UNTERMINATED AUTOSet No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Sets the vertical horizontal and trigger controls of the oscilloscope to automatically acquire and display the selected waveform Miscellaneous AUTOSet UNDO EXECute autosets the displayed waveform UNDo restores the oscilloscope settings to those present prior to the autoset execution Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 65 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples AUXin Query Only Group Syntax AUXin PRObe Group Syntax Exa
465. ted Commands Arguments Examples PSC Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order PASSWord Qstring NEWpass PUD Qstring is the password and can include up to 10 characters The factory default password is XY ZZY and is always valid PASSWORD XYZZY enables the PUD and NEWpass set commands PASSWORD disables the PUB and NEWpass set commands You can still use the query version of PUD Sets or returns the power on status flag that controls the automatic power on handling of the DESER SRER and ESER registers When PSC is true the DESER register is set to 255 and the SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at power on When PSC is false the current values in the DESER SRER and ESER registers are preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off and are restored at power on Status and Error PSC OFF ON NR1 PSC DESE ESE FACtory RST SRE OFF sets the power on status clear flag to false ON sets the power on status clear flag to true lt NR1 gt 0 sets the power on status clear flag to false This disables the power on clear allowing the oscilloscope to possibly assert SRQ after power on any other value sets the power on status clear flag to true enabling the power on status clear preventing any SRQ assertion after power on PSC 0 sets the power on status clear flag to false PSC might return to indicate that the power
466. ter than EQUa sets the frame id qualifier to equal UNEQual sets the frame id qualifier to not equal LESSEQual sets the frame id qualifier to less than or equal MOREEQual sets the frame id qualifier to greater than or equal INrange sets the frame id qualifier to in range OUTrange sets the frame id qualifier to out of range Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 309 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the frame id qualifier to less than TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID QUALIFIER EQUAL indicating the frame id qualifier is set to equal TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEID VALue Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for FLEXRAY frame ID low value Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray FRAMEID VALUE Qstring is a quoted string that is the FLEXRAY frame ID low value TRIGGER A BUS BL FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE 11001100101 sets the frame id value to 11001100101 TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 FLEXRAY FRAMEID VALUE XXXXXXXXXXX indicating the frame id value is don t care TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray FRAMEType 2 310 Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the frame type for FLEXRAY Trigger TRIGg
467. tern Returns the conditions for generating an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern DELTatime Sets or returns the pattern trigger delta time value TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern INPut D x TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn Sets or returns the A logic trigger pattern for a trigger on digital channel x Sets or returns the pattern logic condition on which to trigger the oscilloscope TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MORELimit Sets or returns the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger Sets or returns the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold CH x Sets or queries the logic trigger threshold voltage for the specified channel TRIGger A LOGIc THReshold D x Sets or returns the trigger A logic threshold level for the specified digital channel TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH x Sets or returns the lower threshold for the channel selected TRIGger A LOWerthreshold EXT AUX Sets or returns the lower threshold for the Auxiliary input TRIGger A MODe Sets or returns the A trigger mode Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 43 Command Groups 2 44 Table 2 30 Trigger Commands cont Command Description TRIGger A PULse Returns the A pulse trigger parameters TRIGger
468. the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the SESR the Event Status Enable Register ESER and the Output Queue When you use a Serial Poll to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the RQS bit When you use the STB query to obtain the SBR bit 6 is the MSS bit Reading the SBR does not clear the bits 6 RAS 5 4 3 12 14 0 6 ESB MSS Figure 3 2 The Status Byte Register SBR Table 3 2 SBR Bit Functions Bit Function 7 MSB Not used 6 RQS Request Service Obtained from a serial poll Shows that the oscilloscope requests service from the GPIB controller 6 MSS Master Status Summary Obtained from STB query Summarizes the ESB and MAV bits in the SBR 5 ESB Event Status Bit Shows that status is enabled and present in the SESR Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Status and Events Table 3 2 SBR Bit Functions cont Bit Function 4 MAV Message Available Shows that output is available in the Output Queue 3 Not used 2 Not used 1 0 Not used Enable Registers DESER ESER and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a Status Register the DESER also acts as a filter to the Event Queue and can prevent information from being recorded in the register or queue Each bit in an Enable
469. the SPI SCLK source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity Sets or returns the SPI MISO polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number Conditions This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module 2 86 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO POLARity LOW HIGH BUS B x SPI IN MISO POLARity LOW specifies an active low polarity HIGH specifies an active high polarity BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the SPI MISO source for bus lt x where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 DO D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D153 BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA IN MISO SOUrce CH1 CH4 or DO D15 is the channel to use as the SPI MISO source BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the SPI MOSI polarity for bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4EMBD application module Bus BUS B lt x gt SPI DATA OUT MOSI POLARity LOW HIGH BUS lt gt SPI DATA OUT 1 POLARi ty LOW specifies the active low polarity HIGH specifies the active high polarity Tektronix 4000 Series
470. the signals to the trigger circuitry LFRej specifies low frequency rejection coupling which attenuates signals below 50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry NOISErej specifies noise rejection coupling which provides stable triggering by increasing the trigger hysteresis Increased hysteresis reduces the trigger sensitivity to noise but may require greater trigger signal amplitude TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING DC sets the A edge trigger coupling to DC TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING might return TRIGGER A EDGE COUPLING DC indicating that the A edge trigger coupling is set to DC Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Sets or returns the slope for the A edge trigger Trigger TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe RISe FALL TRIGger A EDGE SLOpe TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce TRIGger A EDGE COUPIing RISe specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal FALL specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE RISE sets the A edge trigger slope to positive which triggers on the rising edge of the signal TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE might return TRIGGER A EDGE SLOPE FALL indicating that the A edge trigger slope is negative TRIGger A EDGE SOUrce Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Sets or returns the source for the A edge trigger Tri
471. the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is equal to the set volts second rate within a 5 tolerance UNEQual sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is not equal to the set volts second rate 5 SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe 2 284 Sets or returns the trigger type setting for a search to determine where to place a mark lt gt is the search number Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe iEDGe SETHOld PULSEWidth RUNt TRAnsition LOGIC BUS with the appropriate application module installed SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TYPe RUNt triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold but does not cross the second preset threshold before recrossing the first The thresholds are set with the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt and SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt commands PULSEWIdth triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and is either inside or outside the limits as specified by SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn LESSLimit and SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A LOGIc PATtern WHEn MOREL mit The polarity is selected using the SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity command TRAnsition triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction as t
472. ticule CH lt x gt PRObe Query Only Returns all information concerning the probe attached to channel x where x is the channel number Group Vertical Syntax CH x PRObe CH lt x gt PRObe AUTOZero No Query Form Sets the TekVPI probe attached to channel x to zero where x is the channel number Group Vertical Syntax CH x PRObe AUTOZero EXECute Arguments Execute auto zeros the probe CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND No Query Form Sets the state of the probe control specified with the first argument to the state specified with the second argument The commands and states are unique to the attached probe type Only certain VPI probes support this command See the probe documentation for how to set these string arguments Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe COMMAND lt QString gt lt QString gt 2 102 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Qstring are quoted strings specifying the probe command and value to set in the probe attached to the specified channel CH1 PROBE COMMAND MODE 4 4 1 2 sets Tektronix VPI DPG probe to the 4 4V1MHz mode CH1 PROBE COMMAND OUTPUT ON turns the output of a Tektronix VPI DPG probe on 1 PROBE COMMAND MODE might return CH1 PROBE COMMAND 4 4V1MHZ CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments Starts a degauss au
473. time for reference waveform lt x gt where x is the reference channel number The delay time is expressed in seconds and is limited to 5 times the reference horizontal scale Group Vertical 2 224 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order REF x HORizontal DELay TIMe lt NR3 gt REF x ORizontal DELay TIMe NR3 is the delay time in seconds REF2 HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME 4 0 6 sets the horizontal delay time for the REF2 waveform to 4 us REF lt x gt HORizontal SCAle Group Syntax Arguments Examples REF lt x gt LABel Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the horizontal scale for reference waveform lt x gt where x is the reference channel number Vertical REF x HORizontal SCAle lt NR3 gt REF x HORizontal SCATe NR3 is the horizontal scale in seconds REF1 HORIZONTAL SCALE might return REF1 HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 0E 4 Sets or returns the reference waveform label for the channel specified by x where x is the reference channel number Vertical REF lt x gt LABel Qstring REF x LABe1 lt Qstring gt is an alphanumeric string of text enclosed in quotes that contains the label text for the reference channel x waveform The text string is limited to 30 characters REFA LABEL might return REFA LABEL Clk wfm 2 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 225
474. tion FPAnel TURN No Query Form Group Syntax Arguments 2 156 Simulates the action of turning a specified front panel control knob When the front panel is locked the front panel button and multipurpose knob operations are suspended The FPAnel PRESS and FPAnel TURN commands will also not work and they will not generate an error You can work around this by using the appropriate programmatic interface commands instead of the front panel commands For example to set the trigger level to 50 you could use TRIGger A SETLevel To force a trigger you could use TRIGger FORCe Miscellaneous FPAnel TURN knob n knob is the name of a rotating control comma separates the control knob argument from the numeric rotation value argument You do not need a white space between the arguments and the comma n represents the rotation direction and magnitude of rotation Negative values represent a counterclockwise knob rotation and positive values represent a clockwise rotation The magnitude of n specifies the amount of the turn where n 1 represents turning the knob one unit lt n gt 2 represents turning the knob two units lt n gt 4 represents turning the knob four units and so on The range of units depends on which front panel knob is specified Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Table 2 38 FPAnel TURN arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
475. tion module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo LINE lt NR1 gt TRIGger A VIDeo LINE TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD lt NR1 gt argument is an integer that sets the video line number on which the oscilloscope triggers The following table lists the valid choices depending on the active video standard Table 2 42 Video Line Numbering Ranges Video Standard Line Number Range 525 NTSC 1 525 625 PAL SECAM 1 625 SECAM 1 625 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE 23 sets the oscilloscope to trigger on the line 23 TRIGGER A VIDEO LINE might return TRIGger A VIDeo LINE 10 indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on line 10 TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity Conditions Sets or returns the polarity of the A video trigger This command requires a DPO4VID application module Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 361 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity NEGative POSitive TRIGger A VIDeo POLarity POSi tive argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a positive video sync pulse NEGative argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a negative video sync pulse TRIGGER VIDEO POLARITY NEGATIVE sets the oscilloscope to trigger on a negative video pulse TRIGGER A VIDEO POLARITY might return TRIGger A VIDeo POLARITY POSITIVE indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger on a positive video sync pulse TRIGger A VIDeo SOUrce
476. to DC coupling GND sets channel lt x gt to ground Only a flat ground level waveform will be displayed CH2 COUPLING GND sets channel 2 to ground CH3 COUPling might return CH3 COUPling DC indicating that channel 3 18 set to DC coupling Sets or returns the deskew time for channel x where x is the channel number You can adjust the deskew time to add an independent channel based delay time to the delay set by the horizontal position control and common to all channels from the common trigger point to first sample taken for each channel This lets you compensate individual channels for different delays introduced by their individual input hook ups Vertical CH x DESKew NR3 CH x DESKew NR3 is the deskew time for channel x ranging from 100 ns to 100 ns with a resolution of 1 ps Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples CH lt x gt IMPedance Group Syntax Arguments CH lt x gt INVert Group Syntax Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order CH4 DESKew 5 0E 9 sets the deskew time for channel 4 to 5 ns CH2 DESKew might return CH2 DESKEW 2 0000E 09 indicating that the deskew time for channel 2 is set to 2 ns Sets or returns the input impedance of channel lt x gt where x is the channel number Vertical CH lt x gt IMPedance lt NR3 gt FIFty MEG CH x IMPedance FIFty sets the input impedance of channel x to 500 MEG sets the in
477. to the output data Examples CURVE with ASCII encoding start and stop of 1 and 10 respectively and a width set to 1 might return CURVE 61 62 61 60 60 59 59 58 58 59 NOTE Curve data is transferred from the oscilloscope asynchronously depending on the length of the curve record Such transfers may require several seconds to complete During this period the oscilloscope will not respond to the user controls You can interrupt these asynchronous data transfers by sending a device clear message to the oscilloscope or by interrupting the query with another command or query In order to verify that curve data has been completely transferred it is recommended that you follow such queries with an ESR query to verify there are no error bits set You can also check the event queue to determine the cause of the error If the error was caused by an interrupted query then the asynchronous data transfer was not complete when the ESR query was sent In such cases it may be necessary to increase the program time out value to ensure that all data is transferred and read DATa Sets or returns the format and location of waveform data transferred with the CURVe query or CURVe command Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 123 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples DATa DESTination Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples 2 124 Waveform Tr
478. to trigger when the data is than or equal to the qualifier value TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER LESSTHAN sets the oscilloscope to trigger when the data is less than the qualifier value TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER might return TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN DATA QUALIFIER THAN indicating that the oscilloscope is set to trigger when the data is than the qualifier value Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 299 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SiZe Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes for a CAN trigger if the condition is DATA or IDANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe lt NR1 gt is the length of the data string in bytes TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for a CAN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue lt QString gt TRIGger A BUS B x CAN DATa VALue Qstring is the CAN data value in binary format The only allowed characters in the Qstring
479. to zero cycle on a TekVPI current probe attached to the input channel specified by x where x is the channel number Vertical CH x PRObe DEGAUss EXECute EXECute initiates the degauss operation CH lt x gt PRObe DEGAUss STATE Query Only Group Syntax Returns Returns the state of the probe degauss for the channel specified by lt x gt where is x is the channel number NOTE This command will return PASSED for probes that do not support degauss operations Vertical CH x PRObe DEGAUSS STATE NEEDED indicates the probe should be degaussed before taking measurements RECOMMENDED indicates the measurement accuracy might be improved by degaussing the probe PASSED indicates the probe is degaussed Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 103 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order FAILED indicates the degauss operation failed RUNNING indicates the probe degauss operation is currently in progress CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange Group Syntax Arguments Returns CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments 2 104 Sets or returns the range of a Tek VPI probe attached to the channel specified by lt x gt where x is the channel number NOTE This command will return PASSED for probes that do not support degauss operations Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe FORCEDRange lt NR3 gt CH x PRObe FORCEDRange lt NR3 gt specifies the range
480. tpre BIT Nr also changes the values of WFMOutpre BYT Or and Waveform Transfer WFMOutpre BIT Nr lt NR1 gt WFMOutpre BIT Nr DATa SOUrce WFMOutpre BN Fmt lt NR1 gt is the number of bits per data point and can be 8 or 16 WFMOUTPRE BIT NR 16 sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for outgoing waveforms WFMOUTPRE BIT NR might return WFMOUTPRE BIT NR 8 indicating that outgoing waveforms use 8 bits per waveform point Sets or returns the format of binary data for outgoing waveforms specified by the DATa SOUrce command Changing the value of WFMOutpre BN Fmt also changes the value of DATa ENCdg Waveform Transfer wFMOutpre BN_Fmt RI RP WFMOUutpre BN Fmt DATa ENCdg DATa SOUrce RI specifies signed integer data point representation RP specifies positive integer data point representation Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples WFMOutpre BYT Nr Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples WFMOutpre BYT Or Group Syntax Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order WFMOUTPRE BN FMT RP specifies that outgoing waveform data will be in positive integer format WFMOUTPRE BN FMT might return WFMOUTPRE BN FMT RI indicating that the outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer format Sets or returns the data width for the outgoing waveform specified by the DATa SOUrce command Changing WFMOutpre BYT Nr also changes WFMOutpre BIT Nr and Waveform Trans
481. triggering to occur NEGative specifies that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper most positive to lower most negative level for transition triggering to occur EITher specifies either positive or negative polarity Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 283 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the source setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFallj SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MATH SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANSition RISEFal1 SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies one input channel as the edge source MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall WHEn Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the condition setting for an transition trigger search to determine where to place a mark x is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFall wHEn SLOwer FASTer EQual UNEQual SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A TRANsition RISEFal1 wHEn FASTer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is faster than the set volts second rate SLOWer sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal 18 slower than the set volts second rate EQual sets
482. tring is the binary data string for the search SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA VALUE might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN DATA VALUE XXXXXXXX indicating the data value is don t care SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN ERRTYPE Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the error type used for a LIN Search Search SEARCH SEARCH X TRIGger A BUS B x LIN ERRTYPE PARity CHecksum HEADertime RESPtime FRAMetime SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B X LIN ERRTYPE SYNC specifies a sync error type PARi ty specifies a parity error type CHecksum specifies checksum error type HEADertime specifies a header time error type RESPtime specifies a response time error type RAMetime specifies a frame time error type SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A 1 1 might return SEARCH SEARCH1 TRIGGER A BUS B1 LIN ERRTYPE SYNC indicating a SYNC error type SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt LIN IDentifier VALue Sets or returns the binary address string used for LIN search if search condition is ID or IDANDDATA Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 259 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Group Syntax Arguments Examples Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A BUS lt gt LIN IDentifier VALue Qstring SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A BUS B x LIN IDentifier VALue
483. tronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples SAVe ASSIgn TYPe Group Syntax Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Save and Recall SAV lt NR1 gt RCL RECAIL SETUp SAVe SETUp lt NR1 gt specifies a location in which to save the state of the oscilloscope Location values range from 1 through 10 Using an out of range location value causes an execution error Any settings that have been stored previously at this location will be overwritten SAV 2 saves the current oscilloscope state in memory location 2 Sets or returns the assignment of the data to be saved when the front panel Save button is pressed Save and Recall SAVe ASSIgn TYPe IMAGe WAVEform SETUp SAVe ASSIgn TYPe IMAGe assigns the Save button to save screen images WAVEform assigns the Save button to save waveforms SETUp assigns the Save button to save setups SAVe EVENTtable BUS lt x gt No Query Form Group Syntax Saves the data from bus lt x gt to a specified file and location where x is the bus number Save and Recall SAVe EVENTtable BUS x file path Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 229 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Arguments file path is a quoted string that defines the file name and path location where the event table will be stored NOTE filename stands for a filename of up to 125 characters followed by a period
484. ts falls outside or within the specified range of limits Group Trigger Syntax TRIGger A PULSEWidth wHEn LESSthan than EQual UNEQual TRIGger A PULSEWi dth WHEn Related Commands TRIGger A PULSE Width WIDth Arguments LESSthan argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width less than the time set by the TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command than argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width than the time set by the TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth command EQUal argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width equal to the time period specified in TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth within 5 tolerance NOTEQual argument sets the oscilloscope to trigger if a pulse is detected with width greater than or less than but not equal the time period specified in TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth within a 5 tolerance Examples TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN LESSTHAN specifies that the duration of the A pulse will fall within defined high and low limits TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN might return TRIGGER A PULSEWIDTH WHEN THAN indicating the conditions for generating a width trigger TRIGger A PULSEWidth WIDth Sets or returns the width setting for the pulse width trigger Group Trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 343 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples TRIGger A PULSEWi
485. turns the maximum real time sample rate ACQuire MODe Sets or returns the acquisition mode ACQuire NUMACq Returns number of acquisitions that have occurred ACQuire NUMAVg Sets or returns the number of acquisitions for an averaged waveform ACQuire STATE Starts or stops the acquisition system ACQuire STOPAfter Sets or returns whether the acquisition is continuous or single sequence Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 11 Command Groups Alias Command Group 2 12 Use the Alias commands to define new commands as a sequence of standard commands You may find this useful when repeatedly using the same commands to perform certain tasks like setting up measurements Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to substitute parameters into alias bodies The alias mechanism obeys the following rules alias name must consist of a valid 488 2 message unit which may not appear in a message preceded by a colon comma or a command or query program header The alias name may not appear a message followed by a colon comma or question mark B Analias name must be distinct from any keyword or keyword short form An alias name cannot be redefined without first being deleted using one of the alias deletion functions B Alias names do not appear in response messages Table 2 14 Alias Commands Command Description ALlas Sets or returns the alias state
486. ual Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NR3 is the pulse width SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT POLarity Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the polarity setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT POLarity EITher NEGativel POSitivel SEARCH SEARCH x TRIGger A RUNT POLarity POSi tive places a mark when the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the falling edge re crosses the low threshold without either edge ever crossing the high threshold NEGative places a mark when the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the rising edge re crosses the high threshold without either edge ever crossing the low threshold EITher places a mark on a runt of either polarity SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the source setting for a runt trigger search to determine where to place a mark lt x gt is the search number Search SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 REF SEARCH SEARCH lt X gt TRIGger A RUNT SOUrce CH1 CH4 specifies an input channel as the edge source MATH specifies the math waveform as the search source REF specifies the reference waveform as the search source Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 277 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SEARCH
487. uired Optional can be omitted Previous element s may be repeated Comment Command and Query Structure Commands consist of set commands and query commands usually called commands and queries Commands modify oscilloscope settings or tell the oscilloscope to perform a specific action Queries cause the oscilloscope to return data and status information Most commands have both a set form and a query form The query form of the command differs from the set form by its question mark at the end For example the set command ACQui has a query form ACQuire MODe Not all commands have both a set and a query form Some commands have set only and some have query only Messages A command message is a command or query name followed by any information the oscilloscope needs to execute the command or query Command messages may contain five element types defined in the following table Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 Command Syntax Commands Table 2 2 Command Message Elements Symbol Meaning Header This is the basic command name If the header ends with a question mark the command is a query The header may begin with a colon character If the command is concatenated with other commands the beginning colon is required Never use the beginning colon with command headers beginning with a star lt gt This is a header subfunction Some comman
488. uisition hardware Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt SCAle lt NR3 gt CH x SCAle Related Commands CH lt x gt OFFSet CH lt x gt POSition REF lt x gt VERTical SCAle MATH 1 VERTical SCAle Arguments NR3 is the vertical channel scale in units per division The value entered here is truncated to three significant digits Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 107 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples CH lt x gt TERmination Group Syntax Arguments Examples CH lt x gt VOLts 2 108 Group Syntax Arguments CH4 SCALE 100E 03 sets the channel 4 scale to 100 mV per division CH2 SCALE might return CH2 SCALE 1 0000 indicating that the current scale setting of channel 2 is 1 V per division Sets the connected disconnected status of a 50 resistor which may be connected between the specified channel s coupled input and oscilloscope ground The channel is specified by lt x gt There is also a corresponding query that requests the termination parameter and translates this enumeration into one of the two float values Vertical CH x TERmination FIFty MEG lt NR3 gt CH lt x gt TERmMination FIFty sets the channel lt x gt input resistance to 50 Q MEG sets the channel lt x gt input resistance to 1 MQ lt NR3 gt specifies the channel lt x gt input resistance numerically CH4 TERMINATION 50 0E 0 establishes 50 Q impedance on channel 1 CH2 TERMINATION
489. ult values cont Command Default value MEASUREMENT MEAS7 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS7 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS7 SOURCE1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS7 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS7 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAST TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT MEAS8 DELAY DIRECTION FORWARDS MEASUREMENT MEAS8 DELAY EDGE1 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS8 DELAY EDGE2 RISE MEASUREMENT MEAS8 SOURCE 1 CH1 MEASUREMENT MEAS8 SOURCE2 CH2 MEASUREMENT MEAS8 STATE 0 MEASUREMENT MEAS8 TYPE PERIOD MEASUREMENT METHOD AUTO MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE HIGH 0 00E 00 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE LOW 0 00E 00 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID1 0 00E 00 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL ABSOLUTE MID2 0 00E 00 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL METHOD PERCENT MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT HIGH 90 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT LOW 10 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID1 50 MEASUREMENT REFLEVEL PERCENT MID2 50 MEASUREMENT STATISTICS MODE ALL MEASUREMENT STATISTICS WEIGHTING 32 MESSAGE BOX 271 82 292 114 MESSAGE SHOW MESSAGE STATE 0 REF1 HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME 0 00E 00 REF1 HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 00E 06 REF1 VERTICAL POSITION 0 00E 00 REF1 VERTICAL SCALE 1 00E 01 REF2 HORIZONTAL DELAY TIME 0 00E 00 REF2 HORIZONTAL SCALE 4 00E 06 REF2 VERTICAL POSITION 0 00E 00 REF2 VERTICAL SCALE 1 00E 01 SAVE ASSIGN TYPE IMAGE C 12 Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table C 1 Default values cont Appendix C Factory Default
490. uments Examples Assigns a new name to an existing file File System FILESystem REName lt old file path gt lt new file path gt FILESystem CWD old file path is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name new file path is a quoted string that defines the file name and path If the file path is within the current working directory you need only specify the file name FILESYSTEM RENAME D TEK00000 SET D MYSETTING SET gives the file named TEK00000 SET the new name of MYSETTING SET The file remains in the root directory on the D drive FILESystem RMDir No Query Form Group Deletes a named directory This command deletes the specified directory and all of its contents The directory must not be a read only directory File System Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 153 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples FILESystem RMDir directory path FILESystem CWD directory path is a quoted string that defines the directory name and path If the file path 1s within the current working directory you need only specify the file name FILESYSTEM RMDIR D OldDirectory removes the directory named OldDirectory from the root of the D drive FILESystem WRITEFile No Query Form Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Writes the
491. vertical center of the acquisition window for the specified channel Visualize offset as scrolling the acquisition window towards the top of a large signal for increased offset values and scrolling towards the bottom for decreased offset values The resolution of the vertical window sets the offset increment for this control Offset adjusts only the vertical center of the acquisition window for channel waveforms to help determine what data is acquired The oscilloscope always displays the input signal minus the offset value The channel offset range depends on the vertical scale factor Table 2 35 Channel Offset Range Offset range VIDiv Setting 1 MQ Input 50 0 Input 1 mV div 50 mV div 1V 1V 50 5 mV div 99 5 mV div 05 V 0 5 V 100 mV div 500 mV div 10 V 5 V 505 mV div 995 mV div 5 V 5 V 1 Vidiv 5 V div 100 V 5 V 1 5 05 V div 10 V div 50 V N A 1 1 50 0 input 1 V div is the maximum setting Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples CH lt x gt POSition Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order NOTE The above table describes oscilloscope behavior only when no probe is attached and when the external attenuation factor is 1 0 Vertical CH lt x gt OFFSet lt NR3 gt CH x OFFSet CH lt x gt POSition lt NR3 gt is the offset value for th
492. volts TRIGGER A LEVEL AUXIN might return TRIGGER A LEVEL AUXIN 0 0E 0 indicating the auxiliary input trigger level is 0 0 volts Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 329 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A LEVel CH lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Examples TRIGger A LEVel D lt x gt Group Syntax Arguments Sets or returns the trigger level for the specified channel Each channel can have an independent level Trigger TRIGger A LEVel CH x lt NR3 gt TTL ECL TRIGger A LEVel CH x lt NR3 gt specifies the trigger level in user units usually volts TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 might return TRIGGER A LEVEL CH2 1 3000 00 indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1 3 V for channel 2 TRIGGER A LEVEL CH3 TTL sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level for channel 3 Sets or returns the trigger level for the specified digital channel x where x is the channel number Each digital channel can have an independent level Trigger TRIGger A LEVel D x lt NR3 gt ECL TTL TRIGger A LEVel D x ECL specifies a preset ECL high level of 1 3V TTL specifies a preset TTL high level of 1 4V NR3 specifies the trigger level in volts TRIGger A LOGIc Query Only 2 330 Returns all of the A logic trigger parameters Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Grou
493. which is probe specific This command returns 0 0 for probes that do no support forced range Sets or returns the gain factor for the probe attached to the channel specified by x where x is the channel number The gain of a probe is the output divided by the input transfer ratio For example a common 10 probe has a gain of 0 1 Vertical CH lt x gt PRObe GAIN lt NR3 gt CH x PRObe GAIN CH lt x gt SCAle lt NR3 gt is the probe gain Allowed values depend on the specific probe Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples CH2 PROBE GAIN might return CH2 PROBE GAIN 0 1000E 00 indicating that the attached 10x probe delivers 0 1 V to the channel 2 BNC for every 10 V applied to the probe input CH lt x gt PRObe ID Query Only Returns the type and serial number of the probe attached to channel x where x is the channel number Group Vertical Syntax lt gt PRObe ID Examples CH2 PROBE ID might return CH2 PROBE ID TYPE 10 SERNUMBER N A indicating that a passive 10 probe of unknown serial number is attached to channel 2 CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber Query Only Returns the serial number of the probe attached to channel x where x is the channel number NOTE For Level 0 and 1 probes the serial number will be Group Vertical Syntax CH lt x gt PRObe ID SERnumber Examples CH1 PROBE ID SERNUMBER might
494. x is the channel number the MATHI waveform or another reference waveform such as lt wfm gt lt QString gt saves the specified waveform to the file specified in the quoted string argument Any live channel such as CH1 the MATHI waveform any reference waveform and for MSO models digital waveforms such as DO can be saved to a file Digital waveforms can only be saved when the SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT is set to SPREADSHEET ALL lt QString gt saves all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to a single CSV file specified by the quoted string argument when the SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT is set to SPREADSHEET or saves all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms and digital channel waveforms MSO models to individual ISF internal save format files with a file name prefix specified by the argument with an underscore and the waveform ID such as CHI MATH appended to the file name s Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order SAVE WAVEFORM 1 saves the waveform in reference memory location 1 SAVE WAVEFORM FILEFORMAT SPREADSHEET SAVE WAVEFORM ALL D test folder testl all csv saves all displayed waveforms excluding serial bus waveforms to D test folder testl all csv SAVe WAVEform FILEFormat INTERNal SAVe WAVEform ALL D test folder test1 saves all displayed waveforms excluding seria
495. x 1080 pixel progressive 25 fps 1080sf24 1125 Lines 1080 active 1920 x 1080 pixel progressive sF 24 fps 720 60 750 lines 720 active 1280 x 720 pixel progressive 60 fps 480p60 525 lines 480 active 640 or 704 x 480 pixel progressive 60 fps TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD 2 360 Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the video trigger holdoff in terms of video fields This command requires a DPO4VID application module Trigger TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD lt NR3 gt TRIGger A VIDeo HOLDoff FIELD lt NR3 gt argument is a real number from 0 0 to 8 5 in increments of 0 5 The argument sets the number of fields that the oscilloscope waits before rearming the video trigger TRIGGER A VIDEO HOLDOFF FIELD might return TRIGger A VIDeo HOLdoff FIELD 5 indicating that the oscilloscope is set to wait 5 video fields before rearming the trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual TRIGger A VIDeo LINE Conditions Group Syntax Related Commands Arguments Examples Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGGER A VIDEO HOLDOFF FIELD 4 5 sets the oscilloscope to wait 4 5 video fields before rearming the trigger Sets or returns the video line number on which the oscilloscope triggers Use the TRIGger A VIDeo SYNC FIELD command to actually trigger the oscilloscope on the line that you specify with this command This command requires a DPO4VID applica
496. x gt COPy Copies the search criteria to the trigger or the trigger criteria to the search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt STATE Sets the search state to on or off SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TOTAL Returns the total number of matches for search lt x gt SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Returns the serial search type SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS Returns the serial search type SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN CONDition Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Sets or returns the search condition for CAN search Command Groups Search Commands cont 2 32 Command Description SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa DIRection Sets or returns the CAN search condition to be valid on a READ WRITE or either SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa QUALIfier Sets or returns the CAN data qualifier SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa SIZe Sets or returns the length of the data string in bytes to be used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN DATa VALue Sets or returns the binary data string to be used for CAN search SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN FRAMEtype Sets or returns the CAN Frame Type to be used SEARCH SEARCH lt x gt TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CANF IDentifier ADDRess MODe Sets or returns the CAN addressing mode to sta
497. xtended addressing mode Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 301 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue Conditions Group Syntax Arguments Examples Sets or returns the binary address string used for a CAN trigger if the trigger condition is ID or IDANDDATA Applies to bus lt x gt where x is the bus number This command requires a DPO4AUTO application module Trigger TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue Qstring TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt CAN IDentifier ADDRess VALue lt QString gt is up to 29 bits specifying the binary CAN identifier value The only allowed characters in the QString are 0 1 and X TRIGGER A BUS B1 CAN IDENTIFIER VALUE 1011 sets the CAN trigger identifier value to 1011 TRIGger A BUS B lt x gt FLEXray CONDition Group Syntax Arguments 2 302 Sets or returns the trigger condition for FLEXRAY Trigger TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CONDi tion SOF IDenti fier CYCLEcount HEADer DATA IDANDDATA EOF ERROR TRIGger A BUS B x FLEXray CONDi tion SOF sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to start of frame FRAMEType sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to frame type IDentifier sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to identifier CYCLEcount sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to cycle count HEADer sets the FLEXRAY trigger condition to header DATA sets the FLEXRA
498. y Cycle Positive Width Period x 10096 PEDGECount is the count of positive edges PERIOd is the time required to complete the first cycle in a waveform or gated region Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds PHAse measures the phase difference amount of time a waveform leads or lags the reference waveform between two waveforms The measurement is made between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in degrees where 360 represents one waveform cycle 2 peak to peak finds the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models POVershoot is the positive overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region This measurement is available only on DPO models Positive Overshoot Maximum High Amplitude x100 PPULSECount is the count of positive pulses PWIdth positive width is the distance time between the middle reference default 50 amplitude points of a positive pulse The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual 2 203 Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order Examples RISe timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform The rise time is the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a low reference value default is 10 to a high refer
499. ype parameters TRIGger B EDGE COUPIing Sets or returns the type of B trigger coupling TRIGger B EDGE SLOpe Sets or returns the B edge trigger slope TRIGger B EDGE SOUrce Sets or returns the B edge trigger source TRIGger B EVENTS Returns the current B trigger events parameter TRIGger B EVENTS COUNt Sets or returns the number of events that must occur before the B trigger occurs TRIGger B LE Vel Sets or returns the level for the B trigger Tektronix 4000 Series Programmer Manual Table 2 30 Trigger Commands cont Command Command Groups Description TRIGger B LEVel CH lt x gt Sets or returns the level for the B trigger for a specific channel TRIGger B LEVel D lt x gt TRIGger B LOWerthreshold CH lt x gt Sets or returns the B trigger level for digital channel lt x gt Sets or returns the B trigger lower threshold for the channel selected TRIGger B STATE Returns the current state of the B trigger TRIGger B TIMe Sets or returns the B trigger delay time TRIGger B TYPe Sets or returns the type of B trigger TRIGger B UPPerthreshold CH lt x gt TRIGger EXTernal Sets or returns the B trigger upper threshold for the channel selected Returns external trigger parameters TRIGger EXTernal PRObe TRIGger EXTernal YUNIts Sets or returns the attenuation factor value of the external probe connector Returns the external trigger vertical Y units v

Programmer Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents